11 #include "ff_timesig.h"
13 #include "ff_region.h"
35 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "__FCOther"; }
61 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
63 virtual bool LoadFirst() {
return false; }
78 virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno, twobyte inci);
92 virtual bool SaveNew(CMPER itemno);
157 twobyte _inciblock[6];
159 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(_inciblock); }
160 virtual void* Allocate() {
return _GetDataPtr(); }
169 memcpy(&_inciblock, ((
FCOtherInci*)pSource)->_GetDataPtr(),
sizeof(_inciblock));
182 memset(&_inciblock, 0,
sizeof(_inciblock));
187 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
194 void* _GetDataPtr() {
return &_inciblock; }
197 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCOtherInci"; }
215 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
223 int _DataSizeLoadFullCmper(CMPER cmper, ETAG othertag);
232 bool _SaveOtherFullCmper(CMPER cmper,
void* buffer,
int size, ETAG othertag);
241 bool _LoadOtherFullCmper(CMPER cmper,
void* buffer,
int size, ETAG othertag);
244 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "__FCNoInciOther"; }
253 virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno);
263 virtual bool SaveAs(CMPER itemno);
330 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
347 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
350 EDTCompositeTimeUpper _compositetimeupperdata;
353 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_CompositeTimeUpper; }
354 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTCompositeTimeUpper); }
355 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_compositetimeupperdata; }
374 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "__FCCompositeTimeSigTopElement"; }
377 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
384 void* _GetDataPtr() {
return &_compositetimeupperdata; }
390 memset(&_compositetimeupperdata, 0,
sizeof(_compositetimeupperdata));
402 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
418 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
421 EDTCompositeTimeLower _compositetimelowerdata;
424 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_CompositeTimeLower; }
425 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTCompositeTimeLower); }
426 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_compositetimelowerdata; }
445 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "__FCCompositeTimeSigBottomElement"; }
448 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
455 void* _GetDataPtr() {
return &_compositetimelowerdata; }
461 memset(&_compositetimelowerdata, 0,
sizeof(_compositetimelowerdata));
476 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
486 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_COMPOSITETIMESIGS
498 ECompositeTimeUpper* _pArray;
504 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
509 ECompositeTimeUpper* _GetGroupElementPtr(
int groupindex,
int subindex)
512 int currentindex = 0;
513 int subindexcount = 0;
514 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
516 if (_pArray[i].chainstart) currentindex++;
517 if (currentindex == groupindex)
519 if (subindexcount == subindex)
return &_pArray[i];
522 if (currentindex > groupindex)
return NULL;
534 void _RedistributeArray(CMPER cmper = 0)
540 cmper = pFirstInci->
_GetDataID()->other.cmper;
545 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
550 EDataID* pDataID = (EDataID*) pCurrentObject->
_GetDataID();
551 pDataID->other.cmper = cmper;
552 pDataID->other.inci = inci;
554 memcpy(pCurrentObject->
_GetFirstRecordPtr(), &_pArray[i],
sizeof(ECompositeTimeUpper));
560 pCurrentObject = NULL;
563 if (pCurrentObject)
Add(pCurrentObject);
567 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
572 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
581 int activerecords = 0;
582 for (
int i = 0; i <
GetCount(); i++)
586 if ((pCompositeTimeUpper->main == 0) &&
587 (pCompositeTimeUpper->fraction == 0))
continue;
590 if ((pCompositeTimeUpper->main == 0) &&
591 (pCompositeTimeUpper->fraction == 0))
continue;
594 if (activerecords == 0)
return;
596 _pArray =
new ECompositeTimeUpper[activerecords];
597 int currentindex = 0;
598 for (
int i = 0; i <
GetCount(); i++)
602 if ((pCompositeTimeUpper->main == 0) &&
603 (pCompositeTimeUpper->fraction == 0))
continue;
604 memcpy(&_pArray[currentindex], pCompositeTimeUpper,
sizeof(ECompositeTimeUpper));
607 if ((pCompositeTimeUpper->main == 0) &&
608 (pCompositeTimeUpper->fraction == 0))
continue;
609 memcpy(&_pArray[currentindex], pCompositeTimeUpper,
sizeof(ECompositeTimeUpper));
612 _arraycounter = activerecords;
616 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCCompositeTimeSigTop"; }
641 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
643 if (_pArray[i].chainstart) groupcount++;
656 if (elementcount < 1)
return -1;
657 if (elementcount > 10)
return -1;
659 ECompositeTimeUpper* pNewArray =
new ECompositeTimeUpper[_arraycounter + elementcount];
664 int bytesize =
sizeof(ECompositeTimeUpper) * _arraycounter;
665 memcpy(pNewArray, _pArray, bytesize);
670 ECompositeTimeUpper* pNewAddedData = &pNewArray[_arraycounter];
671 for (
int i = 0; i < elementcount; i++)
673 pNewAddedData->chainstart = (i == 0);
674 pNewAddedData->fraction = 0;
675 pNewAddedData->main = 1;
680 _arraycounter += elementcount;
694 if (groupindex < 1)
return;
695 ECompositeTimeUpper* pData = _GetGroupElementPtr(groupindex, 0);
697 pData->chainstart =
false;
711 int currentindex = 0;
713 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
715 if (_pArray[i].chainstart) currentindex++;
716 if (currentindex == index) count++;
717 if (currentindex > index)
return count;
734 for (
int elementidx = 0; elementidx < elementcount; elementidx++)
750 ECompositeTimeUpper* pCompositeTimeUpper = _GetGroupElementPtr(groupindex, subindex);
751 if (!pCompositeTimeUpper)
return 0;
752 return pCompositeTimeUpper->main;
759 return _arraycounter;
771 ECompositeTimeUpper* pCompositeTimeUpper = _GetGroupElementPtr(groupindex, subindex);
772 if (!pCompositeTimeUpper)
return;
773 pCompositeTimeUpper->main = value;
780 if (_arraycounter == 0)
return false;
783 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DIAGNOSE
784 DebugOut(
"FCCompositeTimeSigTop()::SaveAll(): No existing collection items to read CMPER.");
788 _RedistributeArray();
790 CMPER cmper = pFirstInci->
_GetDataID()->other.cmper;
799 if (_arraycounter == 0)
return false;
801 _RedistributeArray(cmper);
805 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DIAGNOSE
806 DebugOut(
"FCCompositeTimeSigTop()::SaveAllForItem(): No existing collection items to read CMPER.");
821 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_COMPOSITETIMESIGS
833 ECompositeTimeLower* _pArray;
839 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
844 ECompositeTimeLower* _GetGroupElementPtr(
int groupindex,
int subindex)
847 int currentindex = 0;
848 int subindexcount = 0;
849 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
851 if (_pArray[i].chainstart) currentindex++;
852 if (currentindex == groupindex)
854 if (subindexcount == subindex)
return &_pArray[i];
857 if (currentindex > groupindex)
return NULL;
868 void _RedistributeArray(CMPER cmper = 0)
874 cmper = pFirstInci->
_GetDataID()->other.cmper;
879 EDataID* pDataID = NULL;
880 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
885 pDataID = (EDataID*) pCurrentObject->
_GetDataID();
886 pDataID->other.cmper = cmper;
887 pDataID->other.inci = inci;
889 memcpy(pCurrentObject->
_GetFirstRecordPtr(), &_pArray[i],
sizeof (ECompositeTimeLower));
895 memcpy(pCurrentObject->
_GetThirdRecordPtr(), &_pArray[i],
sizeof (ECompositeTimeLower));
897 pCurrentObject = NULL;
901 if (pCurrentObject)
Add(pCurrentObject);
905 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
910 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
919 int activerecords = 0;
920 for (
int i = 0; i <
GetCount(); i++)
924 if (pCompositeTimeLower->main == 0)
continue;
927 if (pCompositeTimeLower->main == 0)
continue;
930 if (pCompositeTimeLower->main == 0)
continue;
933 if (activerecords == 0)
return;
935 _pArray =
new ECompositeTimeLower[activerecords];
936 int currentindex = 0;
937 for (
int i = 0; i <
GetCount(); i++)
941 if (pCompositeTimeLower->main == 0)
continue;
942 memcpy(&_pArray[currentindex], pCompositeTimeLower,
sizeof(ECompositeTimeLower));
945 if (pCompositeTimeLower->main == 0)
continue;
946 memcpy(&_pArray[currentindex], pCompositeTimeLower,
sizeof(ECompositeTimeLower));
949 if (pCompositeTimeLower->main == 0)
continue;
950 memcpy(&_pArray[currentindex], pCompositeTimeLower,
sizeof(ECompositeTimeLower));
953 _arraycounter = activerecords;
957 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCCompositeTimeSigBottom"; }
982 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
984 if (_pArray[i].chainstart) groupcount++;
999 int currentindex = 0;
1001 for (
int i = 0; i < _arraycounter; i++)
1003 if (_pArray[i].chainstart) currentindex++;
1004 if (currentindex == groupindex) count++;
1005 if (currentindex > groupindex)
return count;
1021 ECompositeTimeLower* pCompositeTimeLower = _GetGroupElementPtr(groupindex, subindex);
1022 if (!pCompositeTimeLower)
return 0;
1023 return pCompositeTimeLower->main;
1030 return _arraycounter;
1039 ECompositeTimeLower* pNewArray =
new ECompositeTimeLower[_arraycounter + 1];
1044 int bytesize =
sizeof(ECompositeTimeLower) * _arraycounter;
1045 memcpy(pNewArray, _pArray, bytesize);
1050 ECompositeTimeLower* pNewAddedData = &pNewArray[_arraycounter];
1051 pNewAddedData->chainstart =
true;
1052 pNewAddedData->main = 1024;
1057 _pArray = pNewArray;
1070 if (groupindex < 0)
return false;
1074 for (
int idx = groupindex; idx < _arraycounter - 1; idx ++)
1092 ECompositeTimeLower* pCompositeTimeLower = _GetGroupElementPtr(groupindex, subindex);
1093 if (!pCompositeTimeLower)
return;
1094 pCompositeTimeLower->main = value;
1101 if (_arraycounter == 0)
return false;
1104 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DIAGNOSE
1105 DebugOut(
"FCCompositeTimeSigBottom()::SaveAll(): No existing collection items to read CMPER.");
1109 _RedistributeArray();
1111 CMPER cmper = pFirstInci->
_GetDataID()->other.cmper;
1120 if (_arraycounter == 0)
return false;
1121 _RedistributeArray(cmper);
1124 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DIAGNOSE
1125 DebugOut(
"FCCompositeTimeSigBottom()::SaveAllForItem(): No existing collection items to read CMPER.");
1139 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_SHAPES
1141 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
1143 #include "pragma_align_begin.h"
1144 #if OPERATING_SYSTEM == WINDOWS
1145 struct __EDTPathData2014
1151 #elif OPERATING_SYSTEM == MAC_OS
1152 struct __EDTPathData2014
1159 #include "pragma_align_end.h"
1174 EDTPathData2002* _pPathDataOld;
1175 __EDTPathData2014* _pPathData2014;
1176 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
1177 EDTPathData2014b* _pPathData2014b;
1181 bool _Is2014Format();
1182 bool _Is2014bFormat();
1184 void _SetTag(ETAG tag)
1190 void _AllocateParameters(
int parametercount);
1193 void _SetFourbyteParameter(
int parameterindex, fourbyte intvalue);
1281 void _SetMemory(EDTPathInst* pPathInstruction,
void* pPathData,
int offset);
1309 if (
GetTag() != pTestInstruction->
GetTag())
return false;
1311 for (
int i = 0; i < count; i++)
1330 case st_startobject:
1415 if (index < 0)
return false;
1416 if (index >= _size)
return false;
1417 _SetFourbyteParameter(index, fbvalue);
1442 void Init_StartObject(
int xorigin,
int yorigin,
int left,
int top,
int right,
int bottom,
int xtransform = 1000,
int ytransform = 1000,
int rotation = 0)
1444 _SetTag(st_startobject);
1445 _AllocateParameters(11);
1446 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, xorigin);
1447 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, yorigin);
1448 _SetFourbyteParameter(2, left);
1449 _SetFourbyteParameter(3, top);
1450 _SetFourbyteParameter(4, right);
1451 _SetFourbyteParameter(5, bottom);
1452 _SetFourbyteParameter(6, xtransform);
1453 _SetFourbyteParameter(7, ytransform);
1454 _SetFourbyteParameter(8, rotation);
1462 void Init_StartGroup(
int xorigin,
int yorigin,
int left,
int top,
int right,
int bottom,
int xtransform = 1000,
int ytransform = 1000,
int rotation = 0)
1464 _SetTag(st_startgroup);
1465 _AllocateParameters(11);
1466 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, xorigin);
1467 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, yorigin);
1468 _SetFourbyteParameter(2, left);
1469 _SetFourbyteParameter(3, top);
1470 _SetFourbyteParameter(4, right);
1471 _SetFourbyteParameter(5, bottom);
1472 _SetFourbyteParameter(6, xtransform);
1473 _SetFourbyteParameter(7, ytransform);
1474 _SetFourbyteParameter(8, rotation);
1483 _SetTag(st_endgroup);
1484 _AllocateParameters(0);
1490 _SetTag(st_rmoveto);
1491 _AllocateParameters(2);
1492 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, x);
1493 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, y);
1497 void Init_CurveTo(
int x1,
int y1,
int x2,
int y2,
int endpt_x,
int endpt_y)
1499 _SetTag(st_curveto);
1500 _AllocateParameters(6);
1501 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, x1);
1502 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, y1);
1503 _SetFourbyteParameter(2, x2);
1504 _SetFourbyteParameter(3, y2);
1505 _SetFourbyteParameter(4, endpt_x);
1506 _SetFourbyteParameter(5, endpt_y);
1510 void Init_Slur(
int x1,
int y1,
int x2,
int y2,
int endpt_x,
int endpt_y)
1513 _AllocateParameters(6);
1514 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, x1);
1515 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, y1);
1516 _SetFourbyteParameter(2, x2);
1517 _SetFourbyteParameter(3, y2);
1518 _SetFourbyteParameter(4, endpt_x);
1519 _SetFourbyteParameter(5, endpt_y);
1528 _SetTag(st_linewidth);
1529 _AllocateParameters(1);
1530 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, linewidth);
1538 _SetTag(st_setgray);
1539 _AllocateParameters(1);
1540 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, greyvalue);
1546 _SetTag(st_fillsolid);
1547 _AllocateParameters(0);
1553 _SetTag(st_closepath);
1554 _AllocateParameters(0);
1564 _SetTag(st_ellipse);
1565 _AllocateParameters(2);
1566 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, width);
1567 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, height);
1576 _SetTag(st_rectangle);
1577 _AllocateParameters(2);
1578 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, width);
1579 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, height);
1587 _SetTag(st_drawchar);
1588 _AllocateParameters(1);
1589 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, character);
1597 _SetTag(st_setfont);
1598 _AllocateParameters(3);
1599 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, pFontInfo->
GetNameByID());
1600 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, pFontInfo->
GetSize());
1608 _SetTag(st_setdash);
1609 _AllocateParameters(2);
1610 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, dashlength);
1611 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, spacebetween);
1617 _SetTag(st_rlineto);
1618 _AllocateParameters(2);
1619 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, x);
1620 _SetFourbyteParameter(1, y);
1626 _SetTag(st_bracket);
1627 _AllocateParameters(1);
1628 _SetFourbyteParameter(0, brackettype);
1635 _AllocateParameters(0);
1642 _AllocateParameters(0);
1646 #if PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
1655 for (
int i = 0; i < _size; i++)
1657 FCString parameterstring(
"Parameter ");
1672 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_SHAPES
1683 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCShapeDefInstructions"; }
1703 return pInstruction;
1724 int xtransform = 1000,
int ytransform = 1000,
1727 if (!pOrigin)
return NULL;
1728 if (!pBoundLeftTop)
return NULL;
1729 if (!pBoundRightBottom)
return NULL;
1733 (int) pOrigin->
GetY(),
1734 (int) pBoundLeftTop->
GetX(),
1735 (int) pBoundLeftTop->
GetY(),
1736 (int) pBoundRightBottom->
GetX(),
1737 (int) pBoundRightBottom->
GetY(),
1738 xtransform, ytransform, rotation);
1740 return pInstruction;
1751 int xtransform = 1000,
int ytransform = 1000,
1754 if (!pOrigin)
return NULL;
1755 if (!pBoundLeftTop)
return NULL;
1756 if (!pBoundRightBottom)
return NULL;
1760 (int) pOrigin->
GetY(),
1761 (int) pBoundLeftTop->
GetX(),
1762 (int) pBoundLeftTop->
GetY(),
1763 (int) pBoundRightBottom->
GetX(),
1764 (int) pBoundRightBottom->
GetY(),
1765 xtransform, ytransform, rotation);
1767 return pInstruction;
1777 return pInstruction;
1793 return pInstruction;
1807 return pInstruction;
1819 return pInstruction;
1832 return pInstruction;
1847 return pInstruction;
1862 return pInstruction;
1881 pInstruction->
Init_CurveTo(72, ctrlpt_height, 144, 0, 72, -ctrlpt_height);
1883 return pInstruction;
1913 pInstruction->
Init_CurveTo(x1, y1, x2, y2, endpt_x, endpt_y);
1915 return pInstruction;
1928 pInstruction->
Init_Slur(72, ctrlpt_height, 144, 0, 72, -ctrlpt_height);
1930 return pInstruction;
1943 return pInstruction;
1958 return pInstruction;
1973 return pInstruction;
1987 return pInstruction;
2011 return pInstruction;
2025 if (!pFontInfo)
return NULL;
2029 return pInstruction;
2056 if (!pszString)
return NULL;
2057 int length = (int) strlen(pszString);
2059 for (
int i = 0; i < length; i++)
2079 if (!pString)
return NULL;
2082 for (
int i = 0; i < length; i++)
2091 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_SHAPES
2092 #define __ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG MAKEEXTAG(edOther,'S','D')
2116 SHAPEDEFTYPE_UNKNOWN = -1,
2117 SHAPEDEFTYPE_OTHER = 0,
2118 SHAPEDEFTYPE_ARTICULATION = 1,
2119 SHAPEDEFTYPE_BARLINE = 2,
2120 SHAPEDEFTYPE_EXECUTABLESHAPE = 3,
2121 SHAPEDEFTYPE_EXPRESSION = 4,
2122 SHAPEDEFTYPE_NOTE = 5,
2123 SHAPEDEFTYPE_FRAME = 6,
2124 SHAPEDEFTYPE_ARROWHEAD = 7,
2125 SHAPEDEFTYPE_FRETBOARD = 8,
2126 SHAPEDEFTYPE_CLEF = 9
2130 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
2131 EDTShape* _TypeCast()
const {
return (EDTShape*)
_datablock; }
2132 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2133 EDTShape2014b* _TypeCast2014b()
const {
return (EDTShape2014b*)
_datablock; }
2140 void _AllocateMemory(
int size)
2153 bool _Is2014Format()
const;
2155 bool _Is2014bFormat()
const;
2164 if (_Is2014bFormat())
return true;
2168 dataID.other.cmper =
_dataid.other.cmper;
2169 dataID.other.inci = 0;
2170 fourbyte size =
sizeof(oneinci);
2172 if (!FX_LoadEData(__ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG, &dataID, &oneinci, &size))
return false;
2173 oneinci[2] = (twobyte) shapedeftype;
2174 _shapedeftype = shapedeftype;
2175 return FX_SaveEData(__ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG, &dataID, &oneinci, size) != 0;
2185 if (_Is2014bFormat())
return true;
2189 dataID.other.cmper =
_dataid.other.cmper;
2190 dataID.other.inci = 0;
2191 fourbyte size =
sizeof(oneinci);
2193 if (!FX_LoadEData(__ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG, &dataID, &oneinci, &size))
return false;
2210 _isemptyshape = ((
FCShapeDef*) pSource)->_GetIsEmptyShape();
2218 if (!_Is2014bFormat())
2221 SetCustomTag((size ==
sizeof(EDTShape)) ? __ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG : ot_Shape);
2247 EDTPathInst* _GetPathInstructionArray()
2249 if (_isemptyshape)
return NULL;
2250 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2252 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2253 return (EDTPathInst*) ((
char *)
_datablock + _TypeCast2014b()->instrucOff);
2258 return (EDTPathInst*) ((
char *)
_datablock + _TypeCast()->instrucOff);
2268 void* _GetPathDataArray()
2270 if (_isemptyshape)
return NULL;
2271 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2273 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2274 return (
void*) ((
char *)
_datablock + _TypeCast2014b()->dataOff);
2279 return (
void*) ((
char *)
_datablock + _TypeCast()->dataOff);
2293 bool _EmptyShapeCheck(CMPER cmper,
bool* pIsEmpty)
2295 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DIAGNOSE
2296 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2298 DebugOut(
"FCShapeDef::_EmptyShapeCheck was called on 2014b struct.");
2306 memset(&shapetest, 0,
sizeof(shapetest));
2308 dataID.other.cmper = cmper;
2309 dataID.other.inci = 0;
2310 fourbyte size =
sizeof(shapetest);
2312 bool result = FX_LoadEData(__ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG,
2314 if (!result)
return false;
2315 int loopcount = size /
sizeof(twobyte);
2316 twobyte* pNonZeroCheck = (twobyte*) &shapetest;
2317 for (
int i = 0; i < loopcount; i++)
2319 if (pNonZeroCheck[i])
2321 if (i == 1)
continue;
2323 if (i == 2)
continue;
2339 void* _GetInstructionDataPointer(
int index);
2349 _isemptyshape =
true;
2350 _shapedeftype = SHAPEDEFTYPE_UNKNOWN;
2368 if (_Is2014bFormat())
return false;
2373 dataID.other.inci = 0;
2374 fourbyte size =
sizeof(buffer);
2375 memset(buffer, 0,
sizeof(buffer));
2376 if (!FX_LoadEData(__ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG, &dataID, buffer, &size, FINALEVERSION_2010))
return false;
2377 return ((buffer[2] & 0x0008) != 0);
2405 bool result =
false;
2406 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2412 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2415 _isemptyshape = (_TypeCast2014b()->instrucLen == 0);
2420 _shapedeftype = SHAPEDEFTYPE_UNKNOWN;
2421 _isemptyshape =
true;
2427 if (!_EmptyShapeCheck(itemno, &isemptyshape))
return false;
2428 SetCustomTag(isemptyshape ? __ot_Shape_WORKAROUNDTAG : ot_Shape);
2429 _isemptyshape = isemptyshape;
2434 _shapedeftype = SHAPEDEFTYPE_UNKNOWN;
2452 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
2459 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2461 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2465 return _shapedeftype;
2478 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
2486 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2489 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2490 _TypeCast2014b()->shapeType = shapedeftype;
2494 if (!_Is2014bFormat())
2513 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
2520 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2523 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2524 _TypeCast2014b()->shapeType = shapedeftype;
2527 if (!
Save())
return false;
2528 if (!_Is2014bFormat())
2542 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2544 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2545 return _isemptyshape ? 0 : _TypeCast2014b()->dataLen;
2550 return _isemptyshape ? 0 : _TypeCast()->dataLen;
2565 if (_Is2014bFormat())
2567 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014B
2569 returnval = _TypeCast2014b()->instrucLen;
2574 returnval = _isemptyshape ? 0 : _TypeCast()->instrucLen;
2577 if ((returnval > 300) || (returnval < 0))
return -1;
2592 if (index < 0)
return 0;
2594 EDTPathInst* pPathArray = _GetPathInstructionArray();
2595 return pPathArray[index].tag;
2602 if (index < 0)
return -1;
2604 EDTPathInst* pPathArray = _GetPathInstructionArray();
2605 return pPathArray[index].numdata;
2620 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
2640 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
2691 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
2700 DebugOutDigit(
"sizeof EDTPathData2002: ",
sizeof(EDTPathData2002));
2745 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
2747 EDTEnclosure _enclosuredataold;
2750 FIN25_4_CODE(EDTEnclosure25_4 _enclosuredata25_4;)
2755 EDTEnclosure* _pEnclosureOld;
2756 FIN25_4_CODE(EDTEnclosure25_4* _pEnclosure25_4;)
2760 bool Use25_4Version()
const;
2763 const FLAG_16* _GetFlagPtr()
const
2765 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return &_pEnclosure25_4->flag; )
2766 return &_pEnclosureOld->flag;
2770 const EVPUFixedShort* _GetLineWidthPtr()
const
2772 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return &_pEnclosure25_4->lineWidth; )
2773 return &_pEnclosureOld->lineWidth;
2777 const Evpu16* _GetXAddPtr()
const
2779 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return &_pEnclosure25_4->xAdd; )
2780 return &_pEnclosureOld->xAdd;
2784 const Evpu16* _GetYAddPtr()
const
2786 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return &_pEnclosure25_4->yAdd; )
2787 return &_pEnclosureOld->yAdd;
2791 const Evpu16* _GetXMarginPtr()
const
2793 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return &_pEnclosure25_4->xMargin; )
2794 return &_pEnclosureOld->xMargin;
2798 const Evpu16* _GetYMarginPtr()
const
2800 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return &_pEnclosure25_4->yMargin; )
2801 return &_pEnclosureOld->yMargin;
2808 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return ot_TextExpEnclosure25_4; )
2809 return ot_TextExpEnclosure;
2813 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return sizeof(EDTEnclosure25_4); )
2814 return sizeof(EDTEnclosure);
2820 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return (
void*) _pEnclosure25_4; )
2821 return (
void*) _pEnclosureOld;
2830 void* pData = _GetEnclosure();
2832 memcpy(pData, ((
FCEnclosure*)pSource)->_GetEnclosure(), size);
2844 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
2853 void* _GetEnclosure()
const {
2854 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return (
void*) _pEnclosure25_4; )
2855 return (
void*) _pEnclosureOld;
2910 if (Use25_4Version())
2912 FIN25_4_CODE( _pEnclosure25_4 = &_enclosuredata25_4; )
2916 _pEnclosureOld = &_enclosuredataold;
2926 if (Use25_4Version())
2928 FIN25_4_CODE( _pEnclosure25_4 = (EDTEnclosure25_4*) pPointer; )
2932 _pEnclosureOld = (EDTEnclosure*) pPointer;
2943 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
2950 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
2951 if (shape < 0)
return;
2952 if (shape > 15)
return;
2953 *(FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr() &= ~NEWSIDES;
2954 *(FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr() |= shape;
2965 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
2966 *(Evpu16*)_GetLineWidthPtr() = width;
2975 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
2976 *(Evpu16*)_GetXAddPtr() = offset;
2985 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
2986 *(Evpu16*)_GetYAddPtr() = offset;
2996 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
2997 *(Evpu16*)_GetXMarginPtr() = margin;
3007 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
3008 *(Evpu16*)_GetYMarginPtr() = margin;
3017 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
3018 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), FIXED_SIZE, state);
3027 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return;
3028 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), ENCL_OPAQUE, state);
3040 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), 0x0400 , state); )
3052 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version()) _pEnclosure25_4->m_cornerRadius = radius; )
3060 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
3067 switch (enclosuremode)
3070 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), NOT_TALL,
false);
3071 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), EQUAL_ASPECT,
false);
3075 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), EQUAL_ASPECT,
false);
3078 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), NOT_TALL,
false);
3079 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), EQUAL_ASPECT,
true);
3091 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
3109 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return 0;
3110 return *_GetLineWidthPtr();
3119 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return 0;
3120 return *_GetXAddPtr();
3129 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return 0;
3130 return *_GetYAddPtr();
3140 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return 0;
3141 return *_GetXMarginPtr();
3151 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return 0;
3152 return *_GetYMarginPtr();
3161 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return false;
3162 return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), FIXED_SIZE);
3171 if (!_GetEnclosure())
return false;
3172 return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), ENCL_OPAQUE);
3185 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), 0x0400 ); )
3198 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (Use25_4Version())
return _pEnclosure25_4->m_cornerRadius; )
3206 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
3219 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
3229 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LAYOUT
3242 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
3245 EDTPageSpec pagespec;
3247 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_EDTPageSpec; }
3248 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTPageSpec); }
3249 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &pagespec; }
3257 memcpy(&pagespec, ((
FCPage*)pSource)->_GetPageSpec(),
sizeof(pagespec));
3268 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
3275 void* _GetPageSpec() {
return &pagespec; }
3292 eSsys GetFirstSystem();
3298 void SetFirstSystem(eSsys firstsysno);
3308 void UpdateLayout(
bool bUnfreezeMeasures =
false);
3318 return (GetHeight() > GetWidth());
3404 void SetWidth(Evpu32 width) { pagespec.width = width; }
3481 eSsys CalcLastSystem();
3492 eMeas CalcFirstMeasure();
3503 eMeas CalcLastMeasure();
3518 int CalcInteriorHeight(
bool resize);
3520 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
3529 #endif // PDK_FRAMEWORK_LAYOUT
3532 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LAYOUT
3534 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
3550 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
3553 EDTStaffSystemSpec2005 _staffsystem;
3555 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_EDTStaffSystemSpec; }
3556 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTStaffSystemSpec2005); }
3557 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_staffsystem; }
3565 memcpy(&_staffsystem, ((
FCStaffSystem*)pSource)->_GetStaffSystemSpec(),
sizeof(_staffsystem));
3577 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
3584 void* _GetStaffSystemSpec() {
return &_staffsystem; }
3593 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
3598 if ((offsetof(EDTStaffSystemSpec2005, horzPercent) - offsetof(EDTStaffSystemSpec2005, mend)) != 2)
3600 DebugOut(
"ERROR: Packed struct alignment isn't set up correctly in the compiler options! Use "
3601 "-fpack-struct=1 for GCC.");
3616 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->mestart = measure; }
3627 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->mend = measure; }
3635 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->extraStartSystemSpace = space; }
3643 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->extraEndSystemSpace = space; }
3651 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->betweensystems = -space; }
3662 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->top = -margin; }
3675 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->bottom = -margin; }
3685 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->left = margin; }
3694 { ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->right = margin; }
3702 _staffsystem.ssysPercent = value;
3718 { _staffsystem.staffHeight = value; }
3727 Set16BitFlag(&_staffsystem.staveflag, SSPEC_RESIZE_VERT, value);
3739 Set16BitFlag(&_staffsystem.staveflag, SSPEC_LINEPERC, state);
3748 Set16BitFlag(&_staffsystem.staveflag, SSPEC_HOLD_MARGINS, state);
3758 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->mestart; }
3765 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->mend; }
3772 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->extraStartSystemSpace; }
3780 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->extraEndSystemSpace; }
3789 {
return -((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->betweensystems; }
3797 {
return -((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->top; }
3804 {
return -((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->bottom; }
3814 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->left; }
3822 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->right; }
3833 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->staffHeight; }
3840 {
return ((EDTStaffSystemSpec2005*)
_datablock)->ssysPercent; }
3859 return GetBitFlag(_staffsystem.staveflag, SSPEC_LINEPERC);
3868 return GetBitFlag(_staffsystem.staveflag, SSPEC_HOLD_MARGINS);
3877 twobyte GetTopStaff()
const;
3888 return _staffsystem.horzPercent;
3896 bool HasPageBreak();
3902 eStaff CalcTopStaff();
3908 eStaff CalcBottomStaff();
3916 int CalcStavesSpan();
3928 int CalcHeight(
bool verticalresize);
3941 int CalcWhiteSpaceBottom(
bool verticalresize);
3951 bool IsOptimized()
const;
3963 if (measurenumber < GetFirstMeasure())
return false;
3964 if (measurenumber >= GetNextSysMeasure())
return false;
3982 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4004 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4022 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
4027 DebugOutDigit(
"Next System Measure: ", GetNextSysMeasure());
4036 #endif // PDK_FRAMEWORK_LAYOUT
4055 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
4075 EVERSION _VersionToUse()
const;
4080 EDTMeasureSpec2005 _measurespec2005;
4082 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4083 EDTMeasureSpec2014 _measurespec2014;
4089 FLAG_16* _GetMeFlagPtr()
const;
4094 FLAG_16* _GetNewFlagPtr()
const;
4099 FLAG_16* _GetAuxFlagPtr()
const;
4104 void _SetMeFlag(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state);
4109 bool _GetMeFlag(FLAG_16 mask)
const
4117 void _SetNewFlag(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state);
4122 bool _GetNewFlag(FLAG_16 mask)
const {
return GetBitFlag(*_GetNewFlagPtr(), mask); }
4127 void _SetAuxFlag(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state);
4132 bool _GetAuxFlag(FLAG_16 mask)
const {
return GetBitFlag(*_GetAuxFlagPtr(), mask); }
4137 return _VersionToUse();
4139 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_MeasureSpec; }
4141 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4142 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
return sizeof(EDTMeasureSpec2014);
4144 return sizeof(EDTMeasureSpec2005);
4149 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4150 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
return (
void*) &_measurespec2014;
4152 return (
void*) &_measurespec2005;
4161 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4162 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4164 memcpy(&_measurespec2014, ((
FCMeasure*)pSource)->_GetMeasureSpec(),
sizeof(_measurespec2014));
4170 memcpy(&_measurespec2005, ((
FCMeasure*)pSource)->_GetMeasureSpec(),
sizeof(_measurespec2005));
4221 bool _GetBarlineMask(
4222 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4227 style, FLAG_16* pFlag);
4240 POSITIONING_TIMESIG = 0,
4246 POSITIONING_BEATCHART
4258 SHOWSTATE_IFNEEDED = 0,
4270 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
4277 void* _GetMeasureSpec()
4279 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4280 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
return &_measurespec2014;
4282 return &_measurespec2005;
4295 _pTimeSigDisplay = NULL;
4303 if (_pKeySig)
delete _pKeySig;
4304 if (_pTimeSig)
delete _pTimeSig;
4305 if (_pTimeSigDisplay)
delete _pTimeSigDisplay;
4309 virtual bool Save();
4312 virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno);
4323 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4337 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4351 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4361 if (_VersionToUse() != FINALEVERSION_2014)
return;
4362 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4363 _measurespec2014.isKeyless = state;
4371 if (_VersionToUse() != FINALEVERSION_2014)
return;
4372 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4373 _measurespec2014.hideKeySigShowAccis = state;
4387 { _SetNewFlag(MEAS_PAGEBREAK, state); }
4397 { _SetMeFlag(MEAS_BREAKREST, state); }
4406 { _SetMeFlag(MEAS_FORREPBAR, state); }
4417 { _SetMeFlag(MEAS_DYNAMBIT, state); }
4428 { _SetMeFlag(MEAS_MEASURETEXT, state); }
4443 { _SetMeFlag(MEAS_BACREPBAR, state); }
4493 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4494 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4496 _measurespec2014.measpace = width;
4500 _measurespec2005.measpace = width;
4511 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4512 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4514 _measurespec2014.frontSpaceExtra = space;
4518 _measurespec2005.frontSpaceExtra = space;
4529 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4530 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4532 _measurespec2014.backSpaceExtra = space;
4536 _measurespec2005.backSpaceExtra = space;
4560 void SetShowKeySignature(
4561 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4577 void SetShowTimeSignature(
4578 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4594 void SetShowFullNames(
bool state);
4636 void SetPositioningNotesMode(
4637 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4638 POSITIONING_MODES mode
4660 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4674 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4675 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4677 _measurespec2014.custombarshape = shapeID;
4681 _measurespec2005.custombarshape = shapeID;
4692 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4693 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4695 _measurespec2014.customleftbarshape = shapeID;
4699 _measurespec2005.customleftbarshape = shapeID;
4712 void SetLeftBarline(
4713 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4714 BARLINE_STYLES style
4745 return FX_GetMeasureDuration(0,
GetItemNo());
4756 if (_VersionToUse() != FINALEVERSION_2014)
return false;
4757 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4758 return _measurespec2014.isKeyless != 0;
4770 if (_VersionToUse() != FINALEVERSION_2014)
return false;
4771 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4772 return _measurespec2014.hideKeySigShowAccis != 0;
4886 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4887 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4889 return _measurespec2014.measpace;
4892 return _measurespec2005.measpace;
4902 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4903 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4905 return _measurespec2014.frontSpaceExtra;
4908 return _measurespec2005.frontSpaceExtra;
4918 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
4919 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
4921 return _measurespec2014.backSpaceExtra;
4924 return _measurespec2005.backSpaceExtra;
4946 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4951 GetShowKeySignature()
const;
4962 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
4967 GetShowTimeSignature()
const;
4986 bool GetShowFullNames()
const;
5029 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5034 GetPositioningNotesMode()
const;
5050 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5065 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5070 GetLeftBarline()
const;
5079 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
5080 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
5082 return _measurespec2014.custombarshape;
5085 return _measurespec2005.custombarshape;
5095 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
5096 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
5098 return _measurespec2014.customleftbarshape;
5101 return _measurespec2005.customleftbarshape;
5120 if (_pKeySig)
return _pKeySig;
5122 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
5123 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
5125 _pKeySig->
SetID(_measurespec2014.key);
5129 _pKeySig->
SetID(_measurespec2005.key);
5169 if (_pTimeSig)
return _pTimeSig;
5171 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
5172 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
5174 _pTimeSig->
SetBeats(_measurespec2014.beats);
5179 _pTimeSig->
SetBeats(_measurespec2005.beats);
5201 if (!GetUseTimeSigForDisplay())
return NULL;
5202 if (_pTimeSigDisplay)
return _pTimeSigDisplay;
5204 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
5205 if (_VersionToUse() == FINALEVERSION_2014)
5207 _pTimeSigDisplay->
SetBeats(_measurespec2014.dispBeats);
5212 _pTimeSigDisplay->
SetBeats(_measurespec2005.dispBeats);
5215 _pTimeSigDisplay->
SetCompositeTop(_GetNewFlag(MEAS_DISPLAY_ALTNUMTSIG));
5217 _pTimeSigDisplay->
SetAbbreviate(_GetNewFlag(MEAS_ABBRVTIME));
5218 return _pTimeSigDisplay;
5233 if (GetUseTimeSigForDisplay() == value)
return;
5236 if (_pTimeSigDisplay)
5238 delete _pTimeSigDisplay;
5239 _pTimeSigDisplay = NULL;
5242 return _SetNewFlag(MEAS_USE_DISPLAY_TIMESIG, value);
5256 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
5267 FIN25_4_CODE(EDTMeasNumberRegion25_4 _measureregion25_4;)
5270 FIN2012_CODE(EDTMeasNumberRegion2012 _measureregion2012;)
5272 EDTMeasNumberRegion2010 _measureregion2010;
5273 EDTMeasNumberRegion _measureregionold;
5282 const FLAG_16* _GetScorePartFlagsPtr(
bool parts);
5285 const FLAG_16* _GetScorePartFlags2Ptr(
bool parts);
5288 const twobyte* _GetScorePartIncidencePtr(
bool parts)
const;
5291 const twobyte* _GetScorePartStartxdispPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5294 const twobyte* _GetScorePartStartydispPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5297 const twobyte* _GetScorePartMultiplexdispPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5300 const twobyte* _GetScorePartMultipleydispPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5303 const twobyte* _GetScorePartMmrestxdispPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5306 const twobyte* _GetScorePartMmrestydispPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5309 const twobyte* _GetScorePartStartWithPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5315 const void* _GetScorePartLeftMMBracketCharPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5321 const void* _GetScorePartRightMMBracketCharPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5324 const EFONTID* _GetScorePartStartFontPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5327 const FLAG_16* _GetScorePartStartEfxPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5330 const twobyte* _GetScorePartStartSizePtr(
bool parts)
const;
5333 const EFONTID* _GetScorePartMultipleFontPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5336 const FLAG_16* _GetScorePartMultipleEfxPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5339 const twobyte* _GetScorePartMultipleSizePtr(
bool parts)
const;
5342 const EFONTID* _GetScorePartMmRestFontPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5345 const FLAG_16* _GetScorePartMmRestEfxPtr(
bool parts)
const;
5348 const twobyte* _GetScorePartMmRestSizePtr(
bool parts)
const;
5351 const twobyte* _GetStartMeasPtr()
const;
5354 const twobyte* _GetEndMeasPtr()
const;
5357 const twobyte* _GetOffsetPtr()
const;
5361 const void* _GetPrefixPtr()
const;
5364 const void* _GetSuffixPtr()
const;
5367 const FLAG_16* _GetFlagPtr()
const;
5370 const FLAG_16* _GetFlag2Ptr()
const;
5373 const twobyte* _GetRegionPtr()
const;
5376 const twobyte* _GetBasePtr()
const;
5381 const void* _GetStartcharPtr()
const;
5383 bool _GetScorePartFlags(
bool parts, FLAG_16 flag);
5384 void _SetScorePartFlags(
bool parts, FLAG_16 flag,
bool state);
5386 FLAG_16 _GetScorePartFlagsValue(
bool parts);
5387 void _SetScorePartFlagsValue(
bool parts, FLAG_16 flag);
5388 FLAG_16 _GetScorePartFlags2Value(
bool parts);
5389 void _SetScorePartFlags2Value(
bool parts, FLAG_16 flag2);
5392 EVERSION _FXTVersionToUse()
const;
5397 void _FormatDisplayedNumberForIndex(twobyte meas_num_index,
FCString* pString);
5399 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_MeasNumberRegion; }
5431 NUMBERING_DIGITS = 0,
5434 NUMBERING_LOWERCASEDOUBLE,
5461 NUMBERING_CUSTOM = 101
5474 NUMBERVIEW_PAGEONLY,
5477 NUMBERVIEW_SCROLLONLY
5503 MNJUSTIFY_LEFT = TEXT_JUSTIFY_LEFT,
5506 MNJUSTIFY_CENTER = TEXT_JUSTIFY_CENTER,
5509 MNJUSTIFY_RIGHT = TEXT_JUSTIFY_RIGHT
5512 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCMeasureNumberRegion"; }
5515 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
5522 void* _GetData() {
return Allocate(); }
5537 void SetStartMeasure(twobyte measure);
5545 void SetEndMeasure(twobyte measure);
5554 void SetStartNumber(twobyte offset);
5573 void SetUseScoreInfoForParts(
bool value);
5577 void SetID(twobyte newid);
5590 void SetStartFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo,
bool parts);
5602 void SetMultipleFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo,
bool parts);
5615 void SetMultiMeasureFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo,
bool parts);
5627 void SetUseEnclosureStart(
bool use,
bool parts);
5637 void SetExcludeOtherStaves(
bool exclude,
bool parts);
5647 void SetUseEnclosureMultiple(
bool use,
bool parts);
5657 void SetShowOnTopStaff(
bool showontop,
bool parts);
5667 void SetShowOnSystemStart(
bool showonstart,
bool parts);
5677 void SetShowOnBottomStaff(
bool showonbottom,
bool parts);
5687 void SetShowMultiples(
bool showmultiples,
bool parts);
5697 void SetHideFirstNumber(
bool hide,
bool parts);
5709 void SetShowMultiMeasureRange(
bool show,
bool parts);
5721 void SetShowOnMultiMeasureRests(
bool show,
bool parts);
5731 void SetMultipleValue(twobyte value,
bool parts);
5741 void SetMultipleStartMeasure(twobyte measure,
bool parts);
5753 void SetMultiMeasureBracketLeft(eUniChar32 character,
bool parts);
5765 void SetMultiMeasureBracketRight(eUniChar32 character,
bool parts);
5776 void SetBreakMultiMeasureRests(
bool breakstate,
bool parts);
5783 void SetStartAlignment(
5784 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5797 void SetStartJustification(
5798 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5811 void SetMultipleAlignment(
5812 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5825 void SetMultipleJustification(
5826 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5839 void SetMultiMeasureAlignment(
5840 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5853 void SetMultiMeasureJustification(
5854 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5870 void SetStartHorizontalPosition(twobyte distance,
bool parts);
5880 void SetStartVerticalPosition(twobyte distance,
bool parts);
5890 void SetMultipleHorizontalPosition(twobyte distance,
bool parts);
5900 void SetMultipleVerticalPosition(twobyte distance,
bool parts);
5910 void SetMultiMeasureHorizontalPosition(twobyte distance,
bool parts);
5920 void SetMultiMeasureVerticalPosition(twobyte distance,
bool parts);
5929 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5943 void SetNumberingStyle(
5944 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
5962 void SetBase(twobyte base);
5976 void SetStartCharacter(eUniChar32 character);
5983 void SetTime(
bool state);
5989 void SetTimeFrames(
bool state);
5997 void SetUseHours(
bool state);
6003 void SetTimePrecision(twobyte precision);
6017 void SetCountFromOne(
bool value);
6029 void SetNoZero(
bool value);
6044 void SetDoubleUp(
bool value);
6050 twobyte GetStartMeasure()
const;
6056 twobyte GetEndMeasure()
const;
6065 twobyte GetStartNumber()
const;
6071 bool GetTime()
const;
6077 bool GetTimeFrames()
const;
6085 bool GetUseHours()
const;
6091 twobyte GetTimePrecision()
const;
6103 bool GetNoZero()
const;
6119 bool GetDoubleUp()
const;
6131 bool GetCountFromOne()
const;
6145 eUniChar32 GetStartCharacter()
const;
6157 twobyte GetBase()
const;
6169 bool GetUseScoreInfoForParts()
const;
6187 bool GetDisplayedNumber(eMeas number,
FCString* pString);
6202 bool GetDisplayedNumberWithID(eMeas number,
FCString* pString);
6231 return parts ? &_startEnclosureParts : &_startEnclosureScore;
6245 return parts ? &_multipleEnclosureParts : &_multipleEnclosureScore;
6254 bool GetUseEnclosureStart(
bool parts);
6263 bool GetExcludeOtherStaves(
bool parts);
6269 bool GetUseEnclosureMultiple(
bool parts);
6275 bool GetShowOnTopStaff(
bool parts);
6281 bool GetShowOnSystemStart(
bool parts);
6287 bool GetShowOnBottomStaff(
bool parts);
6293 bool GetShowMultiples(
bool parts);
6299 bool GetHideFirstNumber(
bool parts);
6307 bool GetShowMultiMeasureRange(
bool parts);
6315 bool GetShowOnMultiMeasureRests(
bool parts);
6322 twobyte GetMultipleValue(
bool parts);
6328 twobyte GetMultipleStartMeasure(
bool parts);
6336 eUniChar32 GetMultiMeasureBracketLeft(
bool parts);
6344 eUniChar32 GetMultiMeasureBracketRight(
bool parts);
6350 bool GetBreakMultiMeasureRests(
bool parts);
6356 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6361 GetStartAlignment(
bool parts);
6367 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6372 GetStartJustification(
bool parts);
6380 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6385 GetMultipleAlignment(
bool parts);
6391 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6396 GetMultipleJustification(
bool parts);
6404 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6409 GetMultiMeasureAlignment(
bool parts);
6415 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6420 GetMultiMeasureJustification(
bool parts);
6427 twobyte GetStartHorizontalPosition(
bool parts);
6433 twobyte GetStartVerticalPosition(
bool parts);
6439 twobyte GetMultipleHorizontalPosition(
bool parts);
6445 twobyte GetMultipleVerticalPosition(
bool parts);
6451 twobyte GetMultiMeasureHorizontalPosition(
bool parts);
6457 twobyte GetMultiMeasureVerticalPosition(
bool parts);
6464 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6477 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6482 GetNumberingStyle()
const;
6495 void GetStartFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo,
bool parts);
6513 GetStartFontInfo(pFontInfo, parts);
6517 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6519 FCFontInfo* CreateStartFontInfo_GC(
bool parts);
6532 void GetMultipleFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo,
bool parts);
6550 GetMultipleFontInfo(pFontInfo, parts);
6554 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6556 FCFontInfo* CreateMultipleFontInfo_GC(
bool parts);
6569 void GetMultiMeasureFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo,
bool parts);
6587 GetMultiMeasureFontInfo(pFontInfo, parts);
6591 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6593 FCFontInfo* CreateMultiMeasureFontInfo_GC(
bool parts);
6610 FCString* CreateDisplayedString(twobyte measure);
6612 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
6614 FCString* CreateDisplayedString_GC(twobyte measure);
6638 if (measureno > GetEndMeasure())
return false;
6639 if (measureno < GetStartMeasure())
return false;
6656 bool AssignAllMeasures(
FCMeasures* pAllMeasures);
6673 _pTempAllMeasuresStorage = _pAllMeasures;
6675 _pAllMeasures = pAllMeasuresToUse;
6685 _pAllMeasures = _pTempAllMeasuresStorage;
6688 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
6708 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
6711 EDTInstrumentUsed _instrumentused;
6715 virtual bool LoadFirst() {
return false; }
6717 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_InstrumentUsed; }
6718 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTInstrumentUsed); }
6719 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_instrumentused; }
6727 memcpy(&_instrumentused, ((
FCSystemStaff*)pSource)->_GetDataPtr(),
sizeof(_instrumentused));
6739 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
6746 void* _GetDataPtr() {
return &_instrumentused; }
6756 memset(&_instrumentused, 0,
sizeof(_instrumentused));
6763 virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno, twobyte inci);
6766 virtual bool SaveNew(CMPER itemno);
6769 virtual bool Save();
6779 void SetDistance(Evpu32 distance) { _instrumentused.separ = -distance; }
6785 void SetStaff(eStaff staffno) { _instrumentused.inst = staffno; }
6801 eStaff
GetStaff()
const {
return _instrumentused.inst; }
6810 if (
_dataid.other.cmper == 0)
return 100;
6835 if (
_dataid.other.cmper == 0)
return false;
6838 dataID.detail.cmper1 =
_dataid.other.cmper;
6839 dataID.detail.cmper2 = _instrumentused.inst;
6840 dataID.detail.inci = 0;
6841 return FX_DeleteEData(dt_StaffEnduction, &dataID,
EnigmaVersion()) != 0;
6844 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
6862 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
6865 EDTDrumStaff2010 _drumstaff;
6868 virtual bool LoadFirst() {
return false; }
6871 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTDrumStaff2010); }
6872 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_drumstaff; }
6880 memcpy(&_drumstaff, ((
FCPercussionStaff*)pSource)->_GetDataPtr(),
sizeof(_drumstaff));
6888 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCPercussionStaff"; }
6891 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
6898 void* _GetDataPtr() {
return &_drumstaff; }
6904 memset(&_drumstaff, 0,
sizeof(_drumstaff));
6917 return _drumstaff.whichDrumLib;
6926 _drumstaff.whichDrumLib = cmper;
6936 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
6940 DebugOutDigit(
"Percussion Library: ", GetPercussionLibrary());
6945 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_PREFS
6958 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
6964 EDTNamePos _namepos;
6967 virtual bool LoadFirst() {
return false; }
6970 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTNamePos); }
6971 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_namepos; }
6988 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCStaffNamePosition"; }
6991 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
6993 bool _GetFullNamePos() {
return _fullnamepos; }
7001 void* _GetDataPtr() {
return &_namepos; }
7038 FLAG_16
GetAlignment()
const {
return (_namepos.flag & NAMEPOS_HALIGNBITS) >> 4; }
7076 justification &= NAMEPOS_JUSTIBITS;
7077 _namepos.flag &= ~NAMEPOS_JUSTIBITS;
7078 _namepos.flag |= justification;
7089 alignment = alignment << 4;
7090 alignment &= NAMEPOS_HALIGNBITS;
7091 _namepos.flag &= ~NAMEPOS_HALIGNBITS;
7092 _namepos.flag |= alignment;
7101 Set16BitFlag(&_namepos.flag, NAMEPOS_EXPAND_SINGLE_WORD, state);
7114 Evpu16 CalcHorizontalPosition();
7120 Evpu16 CalcVerticalPosition();
7138 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
7145 EVERSION _VersionToUse()
const;
7154 virtual const uonebyte* _GetInstUUIDPtr()
const = 0;
7157 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetInstFlagPtr()
const = 0;
7160 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetFlagPtr()
const = 0;
7163 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetAltFlagPtr()
const = 0;
7166 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetAltFlag2Ptr()
const = 0;
7169 virtual const twobyte* _GetTranspositionPtr()
const = 0;
7172 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlagsPtr()
const = 0;
7175 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlags2Ptr()
const = 0;
7178 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlags3Ptr()
const = 0;
7181 virtual const twobyte* _GetAbbrvNamePtr()
const = 0;
7184 virtual const twobyte* _GetFullNamePtr()
const = 0;
7187 virtual const twobyte* _GetClefsPtr()
const = 0;
7190 virtual const Efix32* _GetVertTabNumOffPtr()
const = 0;
7193 virtual const CMPER* _GetFretInstIDPtr()
const = 0;
7196 virtual const Evpu16* _GetBottomBarlineOffsetPtr()
const = 0;
7199 virtual const Evpu16* _GetTopBarlineOffsetPtr()
const = 0;
7202 virtual const utwobyte* _GetCapoLowFretPtr()
const = 0;
7205 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetBotLinesPtr()
const = 0;
7208 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetTopLinesPtr()
const = 0;
7211 virtual const Efix32* _GetLineSpacePtr()
const = 0;
7214 virtual const twobyte* _GetDwWRestPtr()
const = 0;
7217 virtual const twobyte* _GetStemReversalPtr()
const = 0;
7220 virtual const twobyte* _GetRepeatDotsOffPtr()
const = 0;
7223 virtual const twobyte* _GetHOtherRestPtr()
const = 0;
7230 void _SetFlag(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
7232 FLAG_16* pFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr();
7242 bool _GetInstFlag(FLAG_16 mask)
const
7249 void _SetInstFlag(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
7251 FLAG_16* pInstFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetInstFlagPtr();
7259 bool _GetFlag(FLAG_16 mask)
const
7268 bool _GetAltFlag(FLAG_16 mask)
const
7277 void _SetAltFlag(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
7279 FLAG_16* pFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetAltFlagPtr();
7287 bool _GetTranspositionFlag(FLAG_16 mask)
const
7289 return GetBitFlag(*_GetTranspositionPtr(), mask);
7296 void _SetTranspositionFlag(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
7298 FLAG_16* pFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetTranspositionPtr();
7306 bool _GetMoreFlags(FLAG_16 mask)
const
7308 return GetBitFlag(*_GetMoreFlagsPtr(), mask);
7311 bool _GetMoreFlags2(FLAG_16 mask)
const
7313 return GetBitFlag(*_GetMoreFlags2Ptr(), mask);
7316 bool _GetMoreFlags3(FLAG_16 mask)
const
7318 return GetBitFlag(*_GetMoreFlags3Ptr(), mask);
7325 void _SetMoreFlags(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
7327 FLAG_16* pFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetMoreFlagsPtr();
7335 void _SetMoreFlags2(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
7337 FLAG_16* pFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetMoreFlags2Ptr();
7345 void _SetMoreFlags3(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
7347 FLAG_16* pFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetMoreFlags3Ptr();
7352 void _SetAbbreviatedNameID(CMPER cmperid)
7354 CMPER* pCmper = (CMPER*) _GetAbbrvNamePtr();
7359 void _SetFullNameID(CMPER cmperid)
7361 CMPER* pCmper = (CMPER*) _GetFullNamePtr();
7365 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
8980 STAFFNOTATION_NORMAL = 0,
8983 STAFFNOTATION_PERCUSSION = 1,
8986 STAFFNOTATION_TABLATURE = 2
8998 ALTSTAFF_NORMAL = FXUseNormalNotation,
9001 ALTSTAFF_SLASHBEATS = FXUseSlashBeatsNotation,
9004 ALTSTAFF_RHYTHMIC = FXUseRhythmicNotation,
9007 ALTSTAFF_ONEBARREPEAT = FXUseOneBarRepeatSymbol,
9010 ALTSTAFF_TWOBARREPEAT = FXUseTwoBarRepeatSymbol,
9013 ALTSTAFF_BLANKNOTATIONRESTS = 5,
9016 ALTSTAFF_BLANKNOTATION = FXUseBlankNotation
9027 STAFFHIDE_NORMAL = 0,
9030 STAFFHIDE_SCORE = 1,
9033 STAFFHIDE_SCORE_AND_PARTS = 2,
9036 STAFFHIDE_CUTAWAY = 3
9089 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_25
9090 return !_GetInstFlag(STAFF_NEGTIME);
9092 return !_GetInstFlag(STAFF_NEGTIME_SCORE);
9105 return GetShowTimeSignatures();
9118 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_25
9119 return !_GetMoreFlags3(STAFF_MF3_NEGTIME_PARTS);
9121 return GetShowScoreTimeSignatures();
9209 twobyte result = LOBYTE(*_GetHOtherRestPtr());
9224 twobyte result = LOBYTE(*_GetHOtherRestPtr());
9239 twobyte result = HIBYTE(*_GetDwWRestPtr());
9254 twobyte result = LOBYTE(*_GetDwWRestPtr());
9277 return !
GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), STAFF_HIDE_REPEAT_TOP_DOT);
9287 return !
GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), STAFF_HIDE_REPEAT_BOTTOM_DOT);
9297 twobyte result = HIBYTE(*_GetRepeatDotsOffPtr());
9313 twobyte result = LOBYTE(*_GetRepeatDotsOffPtr());
9368 bool GetShowTies()
const {
return _GetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_SHOW_TIES); }
9377 return _GetAltFlag(STAFF_ALT_SHOWOTHERNOTES);
9406 return _GetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_SHOW_TUPLETS);
9415 return _GetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_CLEF_FIRST_MEAS_ONLY);
9424 return _GetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_USE_TAB_LETTERS);
9433 return _GetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_BREAK_LINES_AT_NOTES);
9447 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
9454 if (_GetFlag(STAFF_DOPERCUSSIONNOTES))
return STAFFNOTATION_PERCUSSION;
9455 if (_GetFlag(STAFF_TABNOTES))
return STAFFNOTATION_TABLATURE;
9456 return STAFFNOTATION_NORMAL;
9465 bool GetAllowHiding()
const;
9474 twobyte GetTransposeInterval()
const;
9480 bool GetShowStaffLines()
const;
9489 twobyte GetLineCount()
const;
9499 return *_GetLineSpacePtr();
9506 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
9509 FLAG_16 GetAltNotationStyle()
const {
return *_GetAltFlagPtr() & STAFF_ALTNOTATION; }
9517 return ((*_GetAltFlagPtr() & STAFF_ALTLAYER) >> 4) + 1;
9611 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
9616 GetHideMode()
const;
9626 const FLAG_16 *pMoreFlags3 = _GetMoreFlags3Ptr();
9627 if ( !pMoreFlags3 )
return false;
9628 return (_GetMoreFlags3(0x0001 ));
9639 const FLAG_16 *pMoreFlags2 = _GetMoreFlags2Ptr();
9640 if ( !pMoreFlags2 )
return false;
9641 return (_GetMoreFlags2(0x0001 ));
9672 return LOBYTE(*_GetCapoLowFretPtr());
9681 return HIBYTE(*_GetCapoLowFretPtr());
9690 return *_GetVertTabNumOffPtr();
9700 return *_GetFretInstIDPtr();
9710 return *_GetBottomBarlineOffsetPtr();
9720 return *_GetTopBarlineOffsetPtr();
9723 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
9736 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2012)
return "";
9739 const uonebyte* pInstUUID = _GetInstUUIDPtr();
9740 for (
int i = 0; i < UUID_SIZE_PDK; i++)
9742 uonebyte abyte = pInstUUID[i];
9743 int highnibble = (abyte & 0xf0) >> 4;
9744 int lownibble = (abyte & 0x0f);
9745 if (highnibble < 10)
9806 SetShowScoreTimeSignatures(value);
9807 SetShowPartTimeSignatures(value);
9820 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_25
9821 _SetInstFlag(STAFF_NEGTIME, !value);
9823 _SetInstFlag(STAFF_NEGTIME_SCORE, !value);
9836 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_25
9837 _SetMoreFlags3(STAFF_MF3_NEGTIME_PARTS, !value);
9925 if (position < 0) position |= 0x80;
9927 BYTE hibyte = HIBYTE(*_GetHOtherRestPtr());
9928 utwobyte* pRestStorage = (utwobyte*) _GetHOtherRestPtr();
9929 *pRestStorage = MAKEWORD((BYTE) position, hibyte);
9939 if (position < 0) position |= 0x80;
9941 BYTE lobyte = LOBYTE(*_GetHOtherRestPtr());
9942 utwobyte* pRestStorage = (utwobyte*) _GetHOtherRestPtr();
9943 *pRestStorage = MAKEWORD(lobyte, (BYTE) position);
9953 if (position < 0) position |= 0x80;
9955 BYTE lobyte = LOBYTE(*_GetDwWRestPtr());
9956 utwobyte* pRestStorage = (utwobyte*) _GetDwWRestPtr();
9957 *pRestStorage = MAKEWORD(lobyte, (BYTE) position);
9967 if (position < 0) position |= 0x80;
9969 BYTE hibyte = HIBYTE(*_GetDwWRestPtr());
9970 utwobyte* pRestStorage = (utwobyte*) _GetDwWRestPtr();
9971 *pRestStorage = MAKEWORD((BYTE) position, hibyte);
9981 twobyte* pStemReversal = (twobyte*) _GetStemReversalPtr();
9982 *pStemReversal = position;
9992 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), STAFF_HIDE_REPEAT_TOP_DOT, !state);
10002 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), STAFF_HIDE_REPEAT_BOTTOM_DOT, !state);
10012 if (position < 0) position |= 0x80;
10013 position &= 0x00ff;
10014 BYTE lobyte = LOBYTE(*_GetRepeatDotsOffPtr());
10015 utwobyte* pDotsOffsetStorage = (utwobyte*) _GetRepeatDotsOffPtr();
10016 *pDotsOffsetStorage = MAKEWORD(lobyte, (BYTE) position);
10026 if (position < 0) position |= 0x80;
10027 position &= 0x00ff;
10028 BYTE hibyte = HIBYTE(*_GetRepeatDotsOffPtr());
10029 utwobyte* pDotsOffsetStorage = (utwobyte*) _GetRepeatDotsOffPtr();
10030 *pDotsOffsetStorage = MAKEWORD((BYTE) position, hibyte);
10085 void SetShowTies(
bool state) { _SetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_SHOW_TIES, state); }
10093 _SetAltFlag(STAFF_ALT_SHOWOTHERNOTES, state);
10122 _SetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_SHOW_TUPLETS, state);
10131 _SetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_CLEF_FIRST_MEAS_ONLY, state);
10140 _SetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_USE_TAB_LETTERS, state);
10149 _SetMoreFlags(STAFF_MF_BREAK_LINES_AT_NOTES, state);
10161 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10170 case STAFFNOTATION_PERCUSSION:
10171 _SetFlag(STAFF_DOPERCUSSIONNOTES,
true);
10172 _SetFlag(STAFF_TABNOTES,
false);
10174 case STAFFNOTATION_TABLATURE:
10175 _SetFlag(STAFF_DOPERCUSSIONNOTES,
false);
10176 _SetFlag(STAFF_TABNOTES,
true);
10178 case STAFFNOTATION_NORMAL:
10179 _SetFlag(STAFF_DOPERCUSSIONNOTES,
false);
10180 _SetFlag(STAFF_TABNOTES,
false);
10198 void SetAllowHiding(
bool state);
10209 twobyte GetTransposeAlteration()
const;
10220 void SetTransposeAlteration(twobyte value);
10231 void SetTransposeInterval(twobyte value);
10237 void SetShowStaffLines(
bool value);
10246 void SetLineCount(twobyte value);
10256 Efix32* pStorage = (Efix32*) _GetLineSpacePtr();
10257 *pStorage = (distance / 64) * 64;
10267 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10274 FLAG_16* pAltFlag = (FLAG_16*)_GetAltFlagPtr();
10275 *pAltFlag &= ~STAFF_ALTNOTATION;
10276 *pAltFlag |= value;
10287 if (value < 1)
return;
10288 if (value > 4)
return;
10290 value = value << 4;
10291 FLAG_16* pAltFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetAltFlagPtr();
10292 *pAltFlag &= ~STAFF_ALTLAYER;
10293 *pAltFlag |= value;
10373 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10390 clefindex &= 0x00ff;
10391 clefindex *= 0x100;
10392 twobyte* pClefs = (twobyte*)_GetClefsPtr();
10394 *pClefs |= clefindex;
10404 twobyte* pClefs = (twobyte*) _GetClefsPtr();
10406 *pClefs |= clefindex;
10417 const FLAG_16 *pMoreFlags3 = _GetMoreFlags3Ptr();
10418 if ( !pMoreFlags3 )
return;
10419 _SetMoreFlags3(0x0001 ,state);
10430 const FLAG_16 *pMoreFlags2 = _GetMoreFlags2Ptr();
10431 if ( !pMoreFlags2 )
return;
10432 _SetMoreFlags2(0x0001 ,state);
10441 BYTE lobyte = LOBYTE(*_GetCapoLowFretPtr());
10442 utwobyte* pCapoLowFret = (utwobyte*) _GetCapoLowFretPtr();
10443 *pCapoLowFret = MAKEWORD(lobyte, value);
10454 BYTE hibyte = HIBYTE(*_GetCapoLowFretPtr());
10455 utwobyte* pCapoLowFret = (utwobyte*) _GetCapoLowFretPtr();
10456 *pCapoLowFret = MAKEWORD(value, hibyte);
10465 Efix32* pVertTabNumOff = (Efix32*) _GetVertTabNumOffPtr();
10466 *pVertTabNumOff = value;
10477 CMPER* pFretInstID = (CMPER*) _GetFretInstIDPtr();
10478 *pFretInstID = newid;
10488 Evpu16* pData = (Evpu16*) _GetBottomBarlineOffsetPtr();
10499 Evpu16* pData = (Evpu16*) _GetTopBarlineOffsetPtr();
10503 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
10520 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2012)
return;
10521 if (!pszUUID)
return;
10522 if (strlen(pszUUID) != 36)
return;
10523 if (pszUUID[8] !=
'-')
return;
10524 if (pszUUID[13] !=
'-')
return;
10525 if (pszUUID[18] !=
'-')
return;
10526 if (pszUUID[23] !=
'-')
return;
10527 for (
int i = 0; i < 36; i++)
10535 if (pszUUID[i] !=
'-')
return;
10538 if ((pszUUID[i] >=
'a') && (pszUUID[i] <=
'f'))
break;
10539 if ((pszUUID[i] >=
'0') && (pszUUID[i] <=
'9'))
break;
10544 const char* pszCurrent = pszUUID;
10545 for (
int i = 0; i < UUID_SIZE_PDK; i++)
10547 int result1, result2;
10548 if (*pszCurrent >=
'a') result1 = *pszCurrent -
'a' + 10;
10549 else if (*pszCurrent >=
'A') result1 = *pszCurrent -
'A' + 10;
10550 else result1 = *pszCurrent -
'0';
10552 if (*pszCurrent >=
'a') result2 = *pszCurrent -
'a' + 10;
10553 else if (*pszCurrent >=
'A') result2 = *pszCurrent -
'A' + 10;
10554 else result2 = *pszCurrent -
'0';
10555 int result = (result1 * 0x10) | result2;
10556 uonebyte* pInstUUID = (uonebyte*) _GetInstUUIDPtr();
10557 pInstUUID[i] = result;
10559 if ((i == 3) || (i == 5) || (i == 7) || (i == 9)) pszCurrent ++;
10574 _SetFlag(STAFF_DOPERCUSSIONNOTES,
false);
10575 _SetFlag(STAFF_TABNOTES,
false);
10585 return (GetNotationStyle() == STAFFNOTATION_PERCUSSION);
10595 return (GetNotationStyle() == STAFFNOTATION_TABLATURE);
10604 return (GetNotationStyle() == STAFFNOTATION_NORMAL);
10616 return ((*_GetTranspositionPtr() & ~STAFF_NOKEYOPT) != 0);
10626 bool SaveFullNameString(
FCString* pString);
10635 bool SaveAbbreviatedNameString(
FCString* pString);
10642 bool SaveNewFullNameString(
FCString* pString);
10649 bool SaveNewAbbreviatedNameString(
FCString* pString);
10658 SetLineSpacing(24 * 64);
10659 SetTopBarlineOffset(0);
10660 SetBottomBarlineOffset(0);
10661 SetDoubleWholeRestPosition(-4);
10662 SetWholeRestPosition(-4);
10663 SetHalfRestPosition(-4);
10664 SetOtherRestPosition(-4);
10665 SetStemReversalPosition(-4);
10666 SetShowTopRepeatDot(
true);
10667 SetTopRepeatDotPosition(-3);
10668 SetShowBottomRepeatDot(
true);
10669 SetBottomRepeatDotPosition(-5);
10680 SetLineSpacing(24 * 64);
10681 SetTopBarlineOffset(48);
10682 SetBottomBarlineOffset(-48);
10683 SetDoubleWholeRestPosition(-5);
10684 SetWholeRestPosition(-6);
10685 SetHalfRestPosition(-4);
10686 SetOtherRestPosition(-4);
10687 SetStemReversalPosition(-4);
10688 SetShowTopRepeatDot(
true);
10689 SetTopRepeatDotPosition(-3);
10690 SetShowBottomRepeatDot(
true);
10691 SetBottomRepeatDotPosition(-5);
10702 SetLineSpacing(24 * 64);
10703 SetTopBarlineOffset(24);
10704 SetBottomBarlineOffset(-24);
10705 SetDoubleWholeRestPosition(-5);
10706 SetWholeRestPosition(-6);
10707 SetHalfRestPosition(-4);
10708 SetOtherRestPosition(-4);
10709 SetStemReversalPosition(-4);
10710 SetShowTopRepeatDot(
true);
10711 SetTopRepeatDotPosition(-3);
10712 SetShowBottomRepeatDot(
true);
10713 SetBottomRepeatDotPosition(-5);
10724 SetLineSpacing(24 * 64);
10725 SetTopBarlineOffset(0);
10726 SetBottomBarlineOffset(0);
10727 SetDoubleWholeRestPosition(-4);
10728 SetWholeRestPosition(-4);
10729 SetHalfRestPosition(-4);
10730 SetOtherRestPosition(-4);
10731 SetStemReversalPosition(-4);
10732 SetShowTopRepeatDot(
true);
10733 SetTopRepeatDotPosition(-3);
10734 SetShowBottomRepeatDot(
true);
10735 SetBottomRepeatDotPosition(-5);
10748 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10750 FCString* CreateFullNameString_GC();
10761 FCString* CreateAbbreviatedNameString();
10763 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10765 FCString* CreateAbbreviatedNameString_GC();
10768 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENIGMASTRINGS
10782 FCString* CreateDisplayFullNameString();
10784 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10786 FCString* CreateDisplayFullNameString_GC();
10797 FCString* CreateTrimmedFullNameString();
10799 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10801 FCString* CreateTrimmedFullNameString_GC();
10812 FCString* CreateTrimmedAbbreviatedNameString();
10814 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
10816 FCString* CreateTrimmedAbbreviatedNameString_GC();
10822 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
10834 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2012)
return false;
10835 uonebyte* pInstUUID = (uonebyte*) _GetInstUUIDPtr();
10837 if (strlen(pszUUID) != 36)
return false;
10838 if (pszUUID[8] !=
'-')
return false;
10839 if (pszUUID[13] !=
'-')
return false;
10840 if (pszUUID[18] !=
'-')
return false;
10841 if (pszUUID[23] !=
'-')
return false;
10842 const char* pszCurrent = pszUUID;
10843 for (
int i = 0; i < UUID_SIZE_PDK; i++)
10845 int result1, result2;
10846 if (*pszCurrent >=
'a') result1 = *pszCurrent -
'a' + 10;
10847 else if (*pszCurrent >=
'A') result1 = *pszCurrent -
'A' + 10;
10848 else result1 = *pszCurrent -
'0';
10850 if (*pszCurrent >=
'a') result2 = *pszCurrent -
'a' + 10;
10851 else if (*pszCurrent >=
'A') result2 = *pszCurrent -
'A' + 10;
10852 else result2 = *pszCurrent -
'0';
10853 int result = (result1 * 0x10) | result2;
10854 if (result != pInstUUID[i])
return false;
10856 if ((i == 3) || (i == 5) || (i == 7) || (i == 9)) pszCurrent ++;
10862 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
10877 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2012)
return false;
10878 uonebyte* pInstUUID = (uonebyte*) _GetInstUUIDPtr();
10879 bool blockisempty =
true;
10880 for (
int i = 0; i < UUID_SIZE_PDK; i++)
if (pInstUUID[i]) blockisempty =
false;
10881 if (blockisempty)
return false;
10882 if (InstrumentMatchesUUID(FFUUID_BLANKSTAFF))
return false;
10883 if (InstrumentMatchesUUID(FFUUID_UNKNOWN))
return false;
10893 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
10894 #define PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(code) code
10896 #define PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(code)
10900 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
10901 #define PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(code) code
10903 #define PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(code)
10916 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_PREFS
10923 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
10930 EDTStaffSpec2010 _staffspec2010;
10931 PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(EDTStaffSpec2012 _staffspec2012;)
10932 PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(EDTStaffSpec2014 _staffspec2014;)
10934 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_EDTStaffSpec; }
10937 switch (_VersionToUse())
10939 case FINALEVERSION_2010:
10940 return sizeof(EDTStaffSpec2010);
10941 case FINALEVERSION_2012:
10942 PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(
return sizeof(EDTStaffSpec2012));
10945 PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(
return sizeof(EDTStaffSpec2014));
10951 switch (_VersionToUse())
10953 case FINALEVERSION_2010:
10954 return (
void*) &_staffspec2010;
10955 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
10956 case FINALEVERSION_2012:
10957 return (
void*) &_staffspec2012;
10960 PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(
return (
void*) &_staffspec2014);
10971 void* pStaffSpec = NULL;
10973 switch (_VersionToUse())
10975 case FINALEVERSION_2010:
10976 pStaffSpec = &_staffspec2010;
10977 size =
sizeof(_staffspec2010);
10979 case FINALEVERSION_2012:
10980 PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(
10981 pStaffSpec = &_staffspec2012;
10982 size =
sizeof(_staffspec2012);)
10985 PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(
10986 pStaffSpec = &_staffspec2014;
10987 size =
sizeof(_staffspec2014);)
10991 memcpy(pStaffSpec, ((
FCStaff*)pSource)->_GetStaffSpec(), size);
11007 virtual const uonebyte* _GetInstUUIDPtr()
const
11009 if (_VersionToUse() >= FINALEVERSION_2014)
11010 return _staffspec2014.instUUID;
11011 if (_VersionToUse() >= FINALEVERSION_2012)
11012 return _staffspec2012.instUUID;
11017 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetInstFlagPtr()
const
11019 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->instflag;
11023 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetFlagPtr()
const
11025 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->flag;
11029 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetAltFlagPtr()
const
11031 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->altFlag;
11035 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetAltFlag2Ptr()
const
11037 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->altFlag2;
11041 virtual const twobyte* _GetTranspositionPtr()
const
11043 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->transposition;
11047 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlagsPtr()
const
11049 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->moreFlags;
11053 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlags2Ptr()
const
11055 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2014)
return NULL;
11056 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_25
11057 return (
const FLAG_16*)&((EDTStaffSpec2014*)_GetStaffSpec())->hideKeySigsShowAccis;
11059 return &((EDTStaffSpec2014*)_GetStaffSpec())->moreFlags2;
11064 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlags3Ptr()
const
11066 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2014)
return NULL;
11067 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_25
11068 return (
const FLAG_16*) &((EDTStaffSpec2014*)_GetStaffSpec())->redisplayLayerAccis;
11070 return &((EDTStaffSpec2014*)_GetStaffSpec())->moreFlags3;
11075 virtual const twobyte* _GetAbbrvNamePtr()
const
11077 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->abbrvName;
11081 virtual const twobyte* _GetFullNamePtr()
const
11083 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->fullName;
11087 virtual const twobyte* _GetClefsPtr()
const
11089 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->clefs;
11093 virtual const Efix32* _GetVertTabNumOffPtr()
const
11095 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->vertTabNumOff;
11099 virtual const CMPER* _GetFretInstIDPtr()
const
11101 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->fretInstID;
11105 virtual const Evpu16* _GetBottomBarlineOffsetPtr()
const
11107 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->botBarlineOffset;
11111 virtual const Evpu16* _GetTopBarlineOffsetPtr()
const
11113 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->topBarlineOffset;
11117 virtual const utwobyte* _GetCapoLowFretPtr()
const
11119 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->capoLowFret;
11123 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetBotLinesPtr()
const
11125 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->botLines;
11129 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetTopLinesPtr()
const
11131 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->topLines;
11135 virtual const Efix32* _GetLineSpacePtr()
const
11137 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->lineSpace;
11141 virtual const twobyte* _GetDwWRestPtr()
const
11143 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->dw_wRest;
11147 virtual const twobyte* _GetStemReversalPtr()
const
11149 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->stemReversal;
11153 virtual const twobyte* _GetRepeatDotsOffPtr()
const
11155 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->repeatDotsOff;
11159 virtual const twobyte* _GetHOtherRestPtr()
const
11161 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->h_otherRest;
11166 const ETAG* _GetFullNamePosTagPtr()
const
11168 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->fullNamePosTag;
11172 const twobyte* _GetFullNamePosCmperPtr()
const
11174 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->fullNamePosCmper;
11178 const ETAG* _GetAbbrvNamePosTagPtr()
const
11180 return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->abbrvNamePosTag;
11184 const twobyte* _GetAbbrvNamePosCmperPtr() {
return &((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->abbrvNamePosCmper; }
11190 ETAG _GetFullNamePosTag() {
return *_GetFullNamePosTagPtr(); }
11196 twobyte _GetFullNamePosCmper() {
return *_GetFullNamePosCmperPtr(); }
11202 ETAG _GetAbbreviatedNamePosTag() {
return *_GetAbbrvNamePosTagPtr(); }
11208 twobyte _GetAbbreviatedNamePosCmper() {
return *_GetAbbrvNamePosCmperPtr(); }
11213 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
11217 return _VersionToUse();
11225 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
11233 const void* _GetStaffSpec()
const
11235 switch (_VersionToUse())
11237 case FINALEVERSION_2010:
11238 return &_staffspec2010;
11239 case FINALEVERSION_2012:
11240 PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(
return &_staffspec2012);
11243 PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(
return &_staffspec2014);
11256 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_PREFS
11257 _pFullNamePosition = NULL;
11258 _pAbbreviatedNamePosition = NULL;
11262 switch (_VersionToUse())
11264 case FINALEVERSION_2010:
11265 size =
sizeof(_staffspec2010);
11266 memset(&_staffspec2010, 0, size);
11268 case FINALEVERSION_2012:
11269 PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(size =
sizeof(_staffspec2012);)
11270 PROTECTED2012STAFFSPEC(memset(&_staffspec2012, 0, size));
11273 PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(size =
sizeof(_staffspec2014);)
11274 PROTECTED2014STAFFSPEC(memset(&_staffspec2014, 0, size));
11281 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_PREFS
11282 delete _pFullNamePosition;
11283 _pFullNamePosition = NULL;
11285 delete _pAbbreviatedNamePosition;
11286 _pAbbreviatedNamePosition = NULL;
11291 virtual bool Save();
11306 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
11321 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
11337 int CalcPercussionLayoutID();
11342 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_PREFS
11387 bool SavePercussionLayout(
int layoutID,
int mapID);
11401 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
11423 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
11428 DebugOutBool(
"Chromatic Transposition:" , GetTransposeChromatic());
11429 DebugOutBool(
"Transposition - Set to clef: ", GetTransposeUseClef());
11430 DebugOutBool(
"Transposition - Simplify key: ", GetTransposeSimplifyKey());
11431 DebugOutDigit(
"Transposition - Alteration: ", GetTransposeAlteration());
11432 DebugOutDigit(
"Transposition - Interval: ", GetTransposeInterval());
11433 DebugOutHex(
"topLines :", ((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->topLines);
11434 DebugOutHex(
"botLines :", ((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->botLines);
11435 DebugOutDigit(
"drumStaffCmper: ", ((EDTStaffSpec2010*)_GetStaffSpec())->drumStaffCmper);
11458 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
11461 virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno) {
return false; }
11465 virtual bool SaveAs(CMPER itemno) {
return false; }
11469 virtual bool SaveNew() {
return false; }
11473 virtual CMPER
GetItemNo() {
return 0; }
11475 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_EDTCurrStaffSpec; }
11478 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCCurrentStaffSpec"; }
11480 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
11505 bool LoadForCell(
FCCell* pCell, TimeEdu32 durationpos);
11538 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
11540 EDTArticulationDefinition _articdefold;
11542 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
11543 EDTArticulationDefinition2012 _articdef2012;
11546 bool Use2012Version()
const;
11548 mutable EFONTNAME _mainsymbolfontname;
11549 mutable EFONTNAME _flippedsymbolfontname;
11551 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_25
11552 mutable EnigmaFontName _mainsymbolfontnameUTF16;
11553 mutable EnigmaFontName _flippedsymbolfontnameUTF16;
11556 const FLAG_16* _GetFlag1Ptr()
const;
11557 const FLAG_16* _GetFlag2Ptr()
const;
11558 const twobyte* _GetMainShapePtr()
const;
11559 const twobyte* _GetFlippedShapePtr()
const;
11560 const twobyte* _GetStartTopNotePtr()
const;
11561 const twobyte* _GetStartBotNotePtr()
const;
11562 const twobyte* _GetDurTopNotePtr()
const;
11563 const twobyte* _GetDurBotNotePtr()
const;
11564 const twobyte* _GetAmpTopNotePtr()
const;
11565 const twobyte* _GetAmpBotNotePtr()
const;
11566 const Evpu16* _GetDefaultVerticalPosPtr()
const;
11567 const Evpu16* _GetMainHandleVerticalOffsetPtr()
const;
11568 const Evpu16* _GetMainHandleHorizontalOffsetPtr()
const;
11569 const Evpu16* _GetFlippedHandleVerticalOffsetPtr()
const;
11570 const Evpu16* _GetFlippedHandleHorizontalOffsetPtr()
const;
11572 bool _GetFlag1State(FLAG_16 state)
const {
return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlag1Ptr(), state); }
11573 void _SetFlag1State(FLAG_16 flagbits,
bool state)
11575 FLAG_16* pData = (FLAG_16*) _GetFlag1Ptr();
11578 bool _GetFlag2State(FLAG_16 state)
const {
return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlag2Ptr(), state); }
11579 void _SetFlag2State(FLAG_16 flagbits,
bool state)
11581 FLAG_16* pData = (FLAG_16*) _GetFlag2Ptr();
11586 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_ArticulationDefinition; }
11592 if (Use2012Version())
return FINALEVERSION_2012;
11593 return FINALEVERSION_2010;
11622 ARTPOS_MANUAL_POSITIONING,
11623 ARTPOS_AUTO_NOTESTEM,
11624 ARTPOS_ALWAYS_NOTE_SIDE,
11625 ARTPOS_ALWAYS_STEM_SIDE,
11626 ARTPOS_BELOW_ENTRY,
11634 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
11641 void* _GetArticDef() {
return Allocate(); }
11675 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
11689 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
11691 FCFontInfo* CreateFlippedSymbolFontInfo_GC();
11705 if (GetAboveUsesMain())
11706 return GetMainSymbolChar();
11708 return GetFlippedSymbolChar();
11722 if (GetBelowUsesMain())
11723 return GetMainSymbolChar();
11725 return GetFlippedSymbolChar();
11736 eUniChar32 GetMainSymbolChar()
const;
11753 eUniChar32 GetFlippedSymbolChar()
const;
11769 const char* GetMainSymbolFont()
const;
11776 const EFONTID GetMainSymbolFontID()
const;
11782 const eUniChar16* GetMainSymbolFontUTF16()
const;
11790 const char* GetFlippedSymbolFont()
const;
11797 const EFONTID GetFlippedSymbolFontID()
const;
11803 const eUniChar16* GetFlippedSymbolFontUTF16()
const;
11811 twobyte GetMainSymbolSize()
const;
11819 twobyte GetFlippedSymbolSize()
const;
11974 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
11975 ARTPOSITIONING_SIDES
11979 GetAutoPosSide()
const;
12032 if (GetAboveUsesMain())
12034 if (GetMainSymbolIsShape())
return true;
12038 if (GetFlippedSymbolIsShape())
return true;
12040 if (GetBelowUsesMain())
12042 if (GetMainSymbolIsShape())
return true;
12046 if (GetFlippedSymbolIsShape())
return true;
12061 bool IsMainSymbolFont(
const char* pszFontName);
12071 bool IsMainSymbolFontUTF16(
const eUniChar16* pszFontName);
12083 bool IsFlippedSymbolFont(
const char* pszFontName);
12093 bool IsFlippedSymbolFontUTF16(
const eUniChar16* pszFontName);
12112 bool IsIdenticalTo(
FCArticulationDef* pDef,
bool playbackinfo,
bool positioningvalues,
bool positioningoptions,
bool defaultside);
12127 void GetMainSymbolFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo);
12142 void GetFlippedSymbolFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo);
12162 void SetMainSymbolFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo);
12175 void SetFlippedSymbolFontInfo(
FCFontInfo* pFontInfo);
12182 void SetMainSymbolSize(twobyte size);
12189 void SetFlippedSymbolSize(twobyte size);
12196 void SetMainSymbolFont(
const char* pszFontName);
12203 void SetFlippedSymbolFont(
const char* pszFontName);
12208 void SetMainSymbolFontUTF16(
const eUniChar16* pszFontName);
12213 void SetFlippedSymbolFontUTF16(
const eUniChar16* pszFontName);
12223 if (GetAboveUsesMain())
12224 SetMainSymbolChar(symbol);
12226 SetFlippedSymbolChar(symbol);
12237 if (GetBelowUsesMain())
12238 SetMainSymbolChar(symbol);
12240 SetFlippedSymbolChar(symbol);
12252 if (Use2012Version())
12254 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12255 _articdef2012.charMain = symbol;
12260 _articdefold.efxsymbolMain &= 0xff00;
12261 _articdefold.efxsymbolMain |= (symbol & 0xff);
12272 _SetFlag2State(ARTIC_MAIN_IS_SHAPE, useshape);
12282 _SetFlag2State(ARTIC_FLIPPED_IS_SHAPE, useshape);
12293 CMPER* pValue = (CMPER*) _GetMainShapePtr();
12305 CMPER* pValue = (CMPER*) _GetFlippedShapePtr();
12318 if (Use2012Version())
12320 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12321 _articdef2012.charAlt = symbol;
12326 _articdefold.efxsymbolFlipped &= 0xff00;
12327 _articdefold.efxsymbolFlipped |= (symbol & 0xff);
12387 twobyte* pValue = (twobyte*) _GetStartTopNotePtr();
12397 twobyte* pValue = (twobyte*) _GetStartBotNotePtr();
12405 void SetAutoPosSide(
12406 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
12407 ARTPOSITIONING_SIDES mode
12450 Evpu16* pValue = (Evpu16*) _GetDefaultVerticalPosPtr();
12461 Evpu16* pValue = (Evpu16*) _GetMainHandleVerticalOffsetPtr();
12472 Evpu16* pValue = (Evpu16*) _GetMainHandleHorizontalOffsetPtr();
12483 Evpu16* pValue = (Evpu16*) _GetFlippedHandleVerticalOffsetPtr();
12493 Evpu16* pValue = (Evpu16*) _GetFlippedHandleHorizontalOffsetPtr();
12504 twobyte* pValue = (twobyte*) _GetDurTopNotePtr();
12514 twobyte* pValue = (twobyte*) _GetDurBotNotePtr();
12530 twobyte* pValue = (twobyte*) _GetAmpTopNotePtr();
12540 twobyte* pValue = (twobyte*) _GetAmpBotNotePtr();
12550 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
12574 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
12575 EDTMarkingCategory _categorydefold;
12577 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12578 EDTMarkingCategory2012 _categorydef2012;
12581 bool _Use2012Version()
const;
12583 const FLAG_16* _GetFlagPtr()
const
12585 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12586 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.categoryFlags;
12588 return &_categorydefold.categoryFlags;
12591 const twobyte* _GetCatIDPtr()
const
12593 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12594 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.catID;
12596 return &_categorydefold.catID;
12599 const twobyte* _GetStaffListPtr()
const
12601 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12602 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.staffList;
12604 return &_categorydefold.staffList;
12607 const twobyte* _GetVertAlignPtr()
const
12609 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12610 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.vertAlign;
12612 return &_categorydefold.vertAlign;
12615 const twobyte* _GetVertOffsetBaseLinePtr()
const
12617 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12618 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.vertOffsetBaseline;
12620 return &_categorydefold.vertOffsetBaseline;
12623 const twobyte* _GetVertOffsetEntryPtr()
const
12625 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12626 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.vertOffsetEntry;
12628 return &_categorydefold.vertOffsetEntry;
12631 const twobyte* _GetJustificationPtr()
const
12633 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12634 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.justification;
12636 return &_categorydefold.justification;
12639 const twobyte* _GetHorzAlignPtr()
const
12641 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12642 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.horzAlign;
12644 return &_categorydefold.horzAlign;
12647 const twobyte* _GetHorzOffsetPtr()
const
12649 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12650 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.horzOffset;
12652 return &_categorydefold.horzOffset;
12655 const EEnigmaFont* _GetTextFontPtr()
const
12657 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12658 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.textFont;
12660 return &_categorydefold.textFont;
12663 const EEnigmaFont* _GetMusicFontPtr()
const
12665 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12666 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.musicFont;
12668 return &_categorydefold.musicFont;
12671 const EEnigmaFont* _GetNumberFontPtr()
const
12673 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12674 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_categorydef2012.numberFont;
12676 return &_categorydefold.numberFont;
12679 bool _GetFlagState(FLAG_16 state)
const
12681 FLAG_16* pValue = (FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr();
12685 void _SetFlagState(FLAG_16 mask,
bool state)
12687 FLAG_16* pValue = (FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr();
12693 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
12695 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_MarkingCategory; }
12699 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12700 if (_Use2012Version())
return sizeof(EDTMarkingCategory2012);
12702 return sizeof(EDTMarkingCategory);
12707 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12708 if (_Use2012Version())
return (
void*) &_categorydef2012;
12710 return (
void*) &_categorydefold;
12731 if (_Use2012Version())
return FINALEVERSION_2012;
12732 return FINALEVERSION_2010;
12745 DEFAULTCATID_DYNAMICS = 1,
12748 DEFAULTCATID_TEMPOMARKS = 2,
12751 DEFAULTCATID_TEMPOALTERATIONS = 3,
12754 DEFAULTCATID_EXPRESSIVETEXT = 4,
12757 DEFAULTCATID_TECHNIQUETEXT = 5,
12760 DEFAULTCATID_REHEARSALMARK = 6
12768 CATEGORYMODE_NONE = 0,
12771 CATEGORYMODE_TEXT = 1,
12774 CATEGORYMODE_MUSIC = 2,
12777 CATEGORYMODE_NUMBER = 3
12784 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
12791 void* _GetCategoryDef() {
return Allocate(); }
12802 ALIGNVERT_CLICKPOS = 2,
12805 ALIGNVERT_STAFF_REFERENCE_LINE = 3,
12808 ALIGNVERT_ABOVE_STAFF_BASELINE = 0,
12811 ALIGNVERT_BELOW_STAFF_BASELINE = 1,
12814 ALIGNVERT_TOPNOTE = 4,
12817 ALIGNVERT_BOTTOMNOTE = 5,
12820 ALIGNVERT_ABOVEENTRY = 6,
12823 ALIGNVERT_BELOWENTRY = 7,
12826 ALIGNVERT_ABOVE_STAFF_BASELINE_OR_ENTRY = 8,
12829 ALIGNVERT_BELOW_STAFF_BASELINE_OR_ENTRY = 9
12840 ALIGNHORIZ_CLICKPOS = 3,
12843 ALIGNHORIZ_LEFTOFALLNOTEHEAD = 9,
12846 ALIGNHORIZ_LEFTOFPRIMARYNOTEHEAD = 13,
12849 ALIGNHORIZ_STEM = 10,
12852 ALIGNHORIZ_CENTERPRIMARYNOTEHEAD = 11,
12855 ALIGNHORIZ_CENTERALLNOTEHEADS = 12,
12858 ALIGNHORIZ_RIGHTALLNOTEHEADS = 14,
12861 ALIGNHORIZ_LEFTBARLINE = 0,
12864 ALIGNHORIZ_TIMESIGSTART = 1,
12867 ALIGNHORIZ_AFTERCLEFKEYTIMEREPEAT = 2,
12870 ALIGNHORIZ_STARTOFMUSIC = 7,
12873 ALIGNHORIZ_CENTERBETWEENBARLINES = 4,
12876 ALIGNHORIZ_CENTEROVERUNDERMUSIC = 5,
12879 ALIGNHORIZ_RIGHTBARLINE = 6,
12890 EXPRJUSTIFY_LEFT = 0,
12893 EXPRJUSTIFY_CENTER = 1,
12896 EXPRJUSTIFY_RIGHT = 2
12918 if (pOtherCategory->
GetID() != GetID())
return false;
12919 if (*pOtherCategory->_GetFlagPtr() != *_GetFlagPtr())
return false;
12921 pOtherCategory->
GetName(&othername);
12922 GetName(&thisname);
12933 return _GetFlagState(0x400);
12942 return _GetFlagState(0x0010);
12955 return *_GetCatIDPtr();
12967 return *_GetStaffListPtr();
12979 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
12980 if (_Use2012Version())
13004 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13016 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13045 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13046 HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION
13060 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13077 return *_GetHorzOffsetPtr();
13089 if (!UsesTextFont())
return false;
13103 if (!UsesMusicFont())
return false;
13117 if (!UsesNumberFont())
return false;
13132 if (!UsesTextFont())
return false;
13133 EEnigmaFont* pFont = (EEnigmaFont*) _GetTextFontPtr();
13136 pFont->size = pInfo->
GetSize();
13149 if (!UsesMusicFont())
return false;
13150 EEnigmaFont* pFont = (EEnigmaFont*) _GetMusicFontPtr();
13153 pFont->size = pInfo->
GetSize();
13166 if (!UsesNumberFont())
return false;
13167 EEnigmaFont* pFont = (EEnigmaFont*) _GetNumberFontPtr();
13170 pFont->size = pInfo->
GetSize();
13183 twobyte* pStaffList = (twobyte*) _GetStaffListPtr();
13184 *pStaffList = value;
13201 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13214 return _GetFlagState(MC_USER_CREATED);
13224 if (GetUserCreated())
return false;
13225 return GetID() == 7;
13235 if (GetUserCreated())
return false;
13236 return GetID() == DEFAULTCATID_DYNAMICS;
13246 if (GetUserCreated())
return false;
13247 return GetID() == DEFAULTCATID_TEMPOMARKS;
13257 if (GetUserCreated())
return false;
13258 return GetID() == DEFAULTCATID_TEMPOALTERATIONS;
13268 if (GetUserCreated())
return false;
13269 return GetID() == DEFAULTCATID_EXPRESSIVETEXT;
13279 if (GetUserCreated())
return false;
13280 return GetID() == DEFAULTCATID_TECHNIQUETEXT;
13290 if (GetUserCreated())
return false;
13291 return GetID() == DEFAULTCATID_REHEARSALMARK;
13326 if (!pString)
return;
13332 if (_Use2012Version())
13334 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
13336 memcpy(_categorydef2012.name, tempstring._GetUnicodeBuffer(), (len + 1) *
sizeof (eUniChar16));
13337 _categorydef2012.name[len] = 0;
13342 strcpy(_categorydefold.name, tempstring.
GetCString());
13354 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13362 twobyte* pAlign = (twobyte*) _GetVertAlignPtr();
13363 *pAlign = (twobyte) value;
13378 _SetFlagState(0x400, state);
13387 _SetFlagState(0x0010, state);
13396 twobyte* pData = (twobyte*) _GetCatIDPtr();
13407 twobyte* pVertOffsetBase = (twobyte*) _GetVertOffsetBaseLinePtr();
13408 *pVertOffsetBase = value;
13418 twobyte* pOffset = (twobyte*) _GetVertOffsetEntryPtr();
13428 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13437 case EXPRJUSTIFY_LEFT:
13438 case EXPRJUSTIFY_CENTER:
13439 case EXPRJUSTIFY_RIGHT:
13444 twobyte* pJustification = (twobyte*) _GetJustificationPtr();
13445 *pJustification = value;
13456 twobyte* pHorizontalOffset = (twobyte*) _GetHorzOffsetPtr();
13457 *pHorizontalOffset = value;
13466 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
13474 twobyte* pHorizAlign = (twobyte*) _GetHorzAlignPtr();
13475 *pHorizAlign = (twobyte) value;
13478 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
13509 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
13510 EDTFreezeMeasures _freezemeasures;
13514 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
13516 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_FreezeMeasures; }
13517 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTFreezeMeasures); }
13518 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_freezemeasures; }
13528 memcpy(&_freezemeasures, ((
FCFreezeSystem*)pSource)->_GetFreezeMeasures(),
sizeof(_freezemeasures));
13536 virtual bool LoadFirst() {
return false; }
13543 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
13550 void* _GetFreezeMeasures() {
return Allocate(); }
13559 memset(&_freezemeasures, 0,
sizeof(_freezemeasures));
13560 _freezemeasures.mode = 1;
13585 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
13589 DebugOutDigit(
"Next system measure: ", GetNextSysMeasure());
13605 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
13606 EDTTextExpression2004 _nullexpression;
13609 EDTTextExpression2004* _TypeCast()
const
13611 if (!
_datablock)
return (EDTTextExpression2004*) &_nullexpression;
13615 void _AllocateMemory(
int size);
13617 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_TextExpression; }
13643 REHMARKSTYLE_MANUAL = FX_EXPR_REHEARSAL_MANUAL,
13646 REHMARKSTYLE_LETTER = FX_EXPR_REHERASAL_LETTERS,
13649 REHMARKSTYLE_LETNUM = FX_EXPR_REHEARSAL_LETNUM,
13652 REHMARKSTYLE_LETTER_LC = FX_EXPR_REHEARSAL_LETTERS_LC,
13655 REHMARKSTYLE_LETNUM_LC = FX_EXPR_REHEARSAL_LETNUM_LC,
13658 REHMARKSTYLE_NUMBER = FX_EXPR_REHEARSAL_NUMBERS,
13661 REHMARKSTYLE_MEASNUM = FX_EXPR_REHEARSAL_MEASNUM
13668 SMARTMUSICTYPE_NONE = 0,
13671 SMARTMUSICTYPE_UNKNOWN = -1,
13779 SMARTMUSICTYPE_SWINGASSESSMENTOFF
13782 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCTextExpressionDef"; }
13801 FCString* pString = CreateTextString();
13802 SaveNewTextBlock(pString);
13808 pEnclosure->
SaveAs(itemno);
13828 CMPER GetTextBlockID();
13837 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_VALUEisEXEC);
13848 if (!GetUseExecutableShape())
return 0;
13849 return _TypeCast()->value;
13861 _TypeCast()->value = shapeID;
13862 SetUseExecutableShape((shapeID != 0) ?
true :
false);
13872 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_VALUEisEXEC, state);
13882 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, 0x8000);
13902 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, TEXT_EXP_NEWENCLOSURE);
13912 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, TEXT_EXP_NEWENCLOSURE, value);
13929 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
13930 return (_TypeCast()->category & 0x3fff);
13932 return (_TypeCast()->measYadjust & 0x3fff);
13951 if (!
GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_USEauxDATA))
return 0;
13952 if (!
GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_TIME))
return 0;
13953 return _TypeCast()->value;
13965 if (!
GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_USEauxDATA))
return 0;
13966 if (!
GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_TIME))
return 0;
13967 return _TypeCast()->auxdata1;
13978 return _TypeCast()->playPass;
13989 _TypeCast()->playPass = value;
13997 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14029 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14030 REHEARSALMARK_STYLES
14048 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14056 _TypeCast()->categorySpecific = value;
14066 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, 0x400);
14087 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14088 _TypeCast()->category &= 0xc000;
14089 _TypeCast()->category |= (ID & 0x3fff);
14091 _TypeCast()->measYadjust &= 0xc000;
14092 _TypeCast()->measYadjust |= (ID & 0x3fff);
14107 void SetUseCategoryFont(
bool value);
14118 void SetUseCategoryPos(
bool value);
14126 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_USEauxDATA,
true);
14127 _TypeCast()->flag &= ~EXP_DYTYPEBITS;
14128 _TypeCast()->flag |= EXP_MIDI_CONTROLLER;
14129 _TypeCast()->value = value;
14130 _TypeCast()->auxdata1 = controllernumber;
14139 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_USEauxDATA,
true);
14140 _TypeCast()->flag &= ~EXP_DYTYPEBITS;
14141 _TypeCast()->flag |= EXP_TIME;
14142 _TypeCast()->value = tempo;
14143 _TypeCast()->auxdata1 = eduduration;
14152 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14159 _TypeCast()->vertMeasExprAlign = (twobyte) value;
14168 _TypeCast()->noteYadjustBaseline = value;
14178 _TypeCast()->noteYadjustEntry = value;
14188 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14195 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14210 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14217 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14218 _TypeCast()->horzExprAlign = (twobyte) value;
14220 _TypeCast()->measExprAlign = (twobyte) value;
14229 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14236 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14249 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14256 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14257 _TypeCast()->horzMeasExprAlign = (twobyte) value;
14259 _TypeCast()->measAlign = (twobyte) value;
14271 return _TypeCast()->measXadjust;
14281 _TypeCast()->measXadjust = value;
14294 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14309 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14320 return (_TypeCast()->flag & EXP_DYTYPEBITS) == EXP_TIME;
14330 return (_TypeCast()->flag & EXP_SMARTMUSICMARKER) == EXP_SMARTMUSICMARKER;
14337 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14338 SMARTMUSIC_MARKER_TYPES
14342 GetSmartMusicMarkerType()
const;
14348 void SetSmartMusicMarkerType(
14349 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14364 return (GetRehearsalMarkStyle() != REHMARKSTYLE_MANUAL);
14380 bool MakeRehearsalMark(
FCString* pString,
int measure);
14389 bool SaveTextString(
FCString* pString);
14398 bool SaveNewTextBlock(
FCString* pString);
14405 bool DeleteTextBlock();
14423 bool GetUseCategoryFont()
const;
14429 bool GetUseCategoryPos()
const;
14436 void SetDescription(
FCString* pDescriptionString);
14442 void GetDescription(
FCString* pDescriptionString);
14453 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14459 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
14464 GetDescription(&description);
14467 FCString* pString = CreateTextString();
14486 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
14489 EDTShapeExpression2004* _TypeCast()
const {
return (EDTShapeExpression2004*)
_datablock; }
14491 const char* _TypeCastTextPtr()
const
14499 void _AllocateMemory(
int size);
14503 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
14505 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
14509 virtual EVERSION
EnigmaVersion() {
return _unicode ? FINALEVERSION_2012 : FINALEVERSION_2010; }
14523 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
14525 virtual bool Load(CMPER cmper);
14527 virtual bool Save();
14533 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCShapeExpressionDef"; }
14542 void* _GetShapeExpression() {
return Allocate(); }
14555 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_SHAPES
14587 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_VALUEisEXEC);
14597 return !
GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, SHAPE_EXP_LOCKDOWN);
14606 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, SHAPE_EXP_NOPRINT);
14615 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, SHAPE_EXP_BREAKMMREST);
14626 if (!GetUseExecutableShape())
return 0;
14627 return _TypeCast()->value;
14636 return _TypeCast()->shapedef;
14646 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14654 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14676 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14683 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14696 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14697 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->category, USE_CATEGORY_POS_MASK);
14698 #elif FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
14699 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->measYadjust, USE_CATEGORY_POS_MASK);
14701 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->measYadjust, 0x4000);
14712 return _TypeCast()->measXadjust;
14721 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_2014
14722 return _TypeCast()->noteYadjustEntry;
14724 return _TypeCast()->yAdjustEntry;
14735 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14751 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_2014
14752 return _TypeCast()->noteYadjustBaseline;
14754 return _TypeCast()->yAdjustBaseline;
14762 void GetDescription(
FCString* pName);
14771 _TypeCast()->shapedef = shapeID;
14784 _TypeCast()->value = shapeID;
14785 SetUseExecutableShape((shapeID != 0) ?
true :
false);
14796 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, EXP_VALUEisEXEC, state);
14805 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, SHAPE_EXP_LOCKDOWN, !state);
14814 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, SHAPE_EXP_NOPRINT, state);
14823 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, SHAPE_EXP_BREAKMMREST, state);
14835 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14836 return (_TypeCast()->category & 0x3fff);
14838 return (_TypeCast()->measYadjust & 0x3fff);
14850 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14851 _TypeCast()->category &= 0xc000;
14852 _TypeCast()->category |= (ID & 0x3fff);
14854 _TypeCast()->measYadjust &= 0xc000;
14855 _TypeCast()->measYadjust |= (ID & 0x3fff);
14868 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14876 twobyte setting = 0;
14889 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14890 _TypeCast()->horzExprAlign = (twobyte) setting;
14892 _TypeCast()->measExprAlign = (twobyte) setting;
14904 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14911 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14912 _TypeCast()->horzMeasExprAlign = (twobyte) value;
14914 _TypeCast()->measAlign = (twobyte) value;
14924 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
14925 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) &_TypeCast()->category, USE_CATEGORY_POS_MASK, value);
14926 #elif FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
14927 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) &_TypeCast()->measYadjust, USE_CATEGORY_POS_MASK, value);
14929 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) &_TypeCast()->measYadjust, 0x4000, value);
14940 _TypeCast()->measXadjust = value;
14950 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_2014
14951 _TypeCast()->noteYadjustEntry = value;
14953 _TypeCast()->yAdjustEntry = value;
14965 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
14972 _TypeCast()->vertMeasExprAlign = (twobyte) value;
14981 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_2014
14982 _TypeCast()->noteYadjustBaseline = value;
14984 _TypeCast()->yAdjustBaseline = value;
14992 void SetDescription(
FCString* pName);
14994 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_SHAPES
15003 if (!pShapeDef)
return false;
15004 if (pShapeDef->
GetItemNo() < 1)
return false;
15005 _TypeCast()->shapedef = pShapeDef->
GetItemNo();
15018 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15024 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
15042 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
15043 EDTTextBlock2004 _textblock2004;
15044 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_25_4
15045 EDTTextBlock25_4 _textblock25_4;
15050 bool UseVersion25_4()
const;
15053 const FLAG_16* _GetFlagPtr()
const
15055 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.flag; )
15056 return &_textblock2004.flag;
15060 const eText* _GetTextIDPtr()
const
15062 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.textID; )
15063 return &_textblock2004.textID;
15067 const eShape* _GetShapeIDPtr()
const
15069 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.shapeID; )
15070 return &_textblock2004.shapeID;
15074 const twobyte* _GetLineSpacingPtr()
const
15076 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.lineSpacing; )
15077 return &_textblock2004.lineSpacing;
15081 const ETAG* _GetTextTagPtr()
const
15083 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.textTag; )
15084 return &_textblock2004.textTag;
15088 const Evpu16* _GetWidthPtr()
const
15090 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.width; )
15091 return &_textblock2004.width;
15095 const Evpu16* _GetHeightPtr()
const
15097 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.height; )
15098 return &_textblock2004.height;
15102 const Evpu16* _GetXaddPtr()
const
15104 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.xadd; )
15105 return &_textblock2004.xadd;
15109 const Evpu16* _GetYaddPtr()
const
15111 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.yadd; )
15112 return &_textblock2004.yadd;
15116 const EVPUFixedShort* _GetInsetHiPtr()
const
15118 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.insethi; )
15119 return &_textblock2004.insethi;
15123 const EVPUFixedShort* _GetInsetLoPtr()
const
15125 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.insetlo; )
15126 return &_textblock2004.insetlo;
15130 const EVPUFixedShort* _GetStdLineLoPtr()
const
15132 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.stdlinelo; )
15133 return &_textblock2004.stdlinelo;
15137 const EVPUFixedShort* _GetStdLineHiPtr()
const
15139 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return &_textblock25_4.stdlinehi; )
15140 return &_textblock2004.stdlinehi;
15143 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
15145 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_TextBlock; }
15148 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return sizeof(EDTTextBlock25_4);)
15149 return sizeof(EDTTextBlock2004);
15153 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return (
void*) &_textblock25_4; )
15154 return (
void*) &_textblock2004;
15177 TEXTJUSTIFY_LEFT = TEXT_JUSTIFY_LEFT,
15178 TEXTJUSTIFY_RIGHT = TEXT_JUSTIFY_RIGHT,
15179 TEXTJUSTIFY_CENTER = TEXT_JUSTIFY_CENTER,
15180 TEXTJUSTIFY_FULL = TEXT_JUSTIFY_FULL,
15181 TEXTJUSTIFY_FORCED_FULL = TEXT_JUSTIFY_FORCED_FULL
15188 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
15195 void* _GetTextBlock() {
return Allocate(); }
15203 memset(pTextBlock, 0, size);
15205 TEXTBLOCK_NEWPOS | TEXTBLOCK_SHOWMAINSHAPE |
15206 TEXTBLOCK_WORDWRAP | TEXTBLOCK_LINESPACINGISPERCENT,
15208 SetLineSpacing(100);
15209 SetRawText(0, LO_UTWOBYTE(tx_TextBlock));
15223 void _SetRawTextID(twobyte therawtextid) { *(eText*)_GetTextIDPtr() = therawtextid; }
15228 EXTAG rawtextextag = tx_TextBlock;
15229 rawtextextag &= 0xffff0000;
15230 rawtextextag |= *_GetTextTagPtr();
15231 return rawtextextag;
15251 #if PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15253 FCString* CreateRawTextString_GC();
15265 bool SaveRawTextString(
FCString* pString);
15275 bool SaveNewRawTextString(
FCString* pString);
15281 void SetShapeID(twobyte shapeID) { *(eShape*)_GetShapeIDPtr() = shapeID; }
15287 *(eText*)_GetTextIDPtr() = theid;
15288 *(ETAG*)_GetTextTagPtr() = tag;
15299 FLAG_16* pFlag = (FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr();
15300 *pFlag &= ~TEXTBLOCK_JUSTIBITS;
15301 *pFlag |= (justification % TEXTBLOCK_JUSTIBITS);
15309 rawtext.
Load(GetRawTextID());
15325 void SetLineSpacing(twobyte linespacing) { *(twobyte*)_GetLineSpacingPtr() = linespacing; }
15336 return (*_GetFlagPtr() & TEXTBLOCK_JUSTIBITS);
15348 return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_NEWPOS);
15359 return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_LINESPACINGISPERCENT);
15370 return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_WORDWRAP);
15380 return !
GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_NOEXPANDSINGLEWORD);
15393 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_ROUND_CORNERS); )
15408 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
return _textblock25_4.m_cornerRadius; )
15422 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_NEWPOS, state);
15433 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_LINESPACINGISPERCENT, state);
15444 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_WORDWRAP, state);
15454 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_NOEXPANDSINGLEWORD, !state);
15467 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4())
Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) _GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_ROUND_CORNERS, state); )
15481 FIN25_4_CODE(
if (UseVersion25_4()) _textblock25_4.m_cornerRadius = radius; )
15490 *(EVPUFixedShort*)_GetStdLineLoPtr() = LOWORD(value);
15491 *(EVPUFixedShort*)_GetStdLineHiPtr() = HIWORD(value);
15500 *(EVPUFixedShort*)_GetInsetLoPtr() = LOWORD(value);
15501 *(EVPUFixedShort*)_GetInsetHiPtr() = HIWORD(value);
15510 *(Evpu16*) _GetXaddPtr() = value;
15519 *(Evpu16*) _GetYaddPtr() = value;
15528 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_SHOWMAINSHAPE, state);
15541 *(Evpu16*)_GetWidthPtr() = width;
15554 *(Evpu16*)_GetHeightPtr() = height;
15564 return MAKELONG(*_GetStdLineLoPtr(), *_GetStdLineHiPtr());
15573 return MAKELONG(*_GetInsetLoPtr(), *_GetInsetHiPtr());
15582 return *_GetXaddPtr();
15591 return *_GetYaddPtr();
15600 return GetBitFlag(*_GetFlagPtr(), TEXTBLOCK_SHOWMAINSHAPE);
15613 return *_GetWidthPtr();
15626 return *_GetHeightPtr();
15637 return (GetWidth() == 0);
15649 return (GetHeight() == 0);
15652 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
15657 DebugOutHex(
"Text tag (hex): ", *_GetTextTagPtr());
15677 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
15678 EDTPageText _pagetext;
15681 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
15683 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_PageText; }
15684 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTPageText); }
15685 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_pagetext; }
15693 memcpy(&_pagetext, ((
FCPageText*)pSource)->_GetPageText(),
sizeof(_pagetext));
15706 if (
Load(0, 0))
return true;
15720 TEXTHORIZALIGN_LEFT = TEXT_HALIGN_LEFT,
15722 TEXTHORIZALIGN_RIGHT = TEXT_HALIGN_RIGHT,
15724 TEXTHORIZALIGN_CENTER = TEXT_HALIGN_CENTER
15734 TEXTVERTALIGN_TOP = TEXT_VALIGN_TOP,
15736 TEXTVERTALIGN_BOTTOM = TEXT_VALIGN_BOTTOM,
15738 TEXTVERTALIGN_CENTER = TEXT_VALIGN_CENTER
15747 TEXTASSIGN_ALL = PAGETEXT_ASSIGN_ALL,
15748 TEXTASSIGN_ODD = PAGETEXT_ASSIGN_ODD,
15749 TEXTASSIGN_EVEN = PAGETEXT_ASSIGN_EVEN
15755 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
15762 void* _GetPageText() {
return Allocate(); }
15771 memset(&_pagetext, 0,
sizeof(_pagetext));
15787 textblock.
Load(GetTextBlockID());
15791 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15806 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15819 return _pagetext.startPage;
15830 return _pagetext.endPage;
15839 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15840 TEXT_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN
15854 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15855 TEXT_VERTICAL_ALIGN
15870 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15871 TEXT_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN
15884 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
15903 return GetBitFlag(_pagetext.flag, PAGETEXT_HPOS_PAGE_EDGE);
15915 if (!textblock.
Load(GetTextBlockID()))
return false;
15926 return _pagetext.xdisp;
15935 return _pagetext.rightpgxdisp;
15944 return _pagetext.ydisp;
15953 return _pagetext.rightpgydisp;
15963 return !
GetBitFlag(_pagetext.flag, (PAGETEXT_ANNOTATION));
15972 return GetBitFlag(_pagetext.flag, PAGETEXT_INDRP_POS);
15982 return _pagetext.block;
15991 _pagetext.block = textblockid;
16001 CMPER GetStringID()
const;
16009 bool SaveNewTextBlock(
FCString* pString);
16016 bool SaveTextString(
FCString* pString);
16028 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16036 _pagetext.flag &= ~PAGETEXT_HPOS_LP_BITS;
16037 _pagetext.flag |= ((alignment << 2) & PAGETEXT_HPOS_LP_BITS);
16038 if (!GetIndependentRightPage()) SetHorizontalAlignmentRightPage(alignment);
16048 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16055 _pagetext.flag &= ~PAGETEXT_HPOS_RP_BITS;
16056 _pagetext.flag |= ((alignment << 4) & PAGETEXT_HPOS_RP_BITS);
16065 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16073 _pagetext.flag &= ~PAGETEXT_VPOS_BITS;
16074 _pagetext.flag |= ((alignment << 8) & PAGETEXT_VPOS_BITS);
16082 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16090 _pagetext.flag &= ~PAGETEXT_OE_BITS;
16091 _pagetext.flag |= (assign & PAGETEXT_OE_BITS);
16103 _pagetext.startPage = page;
16115 _pagetext.endPage = page;
16127 _pagetext.xdisp = value;
16128 if (!GetIndependentRightPage()) SetHorizontalPosRightPage(value);
16137 _pagetext.rightpgxdisp = value;
16150 _pagetext.ydisp = value;
16151 if (!GetIndependentRightPage()) SetVerticalPosRightPage(value);
16160 _pagetext.rightpgydisp = value;
16170 Set16BitFlag(&_pagetext.flag, PAGETEXT_ANNOTATION, !visible);
16179 Set16BitFlag(&_pagetext.flag, PAGETEXT_INDRP_POS, state);
16195 Set16BitFlag(&_pagetext.flag, PAGETEXT_HPOS_PAGE_EDGE, state);
16196 Set16BitFlag(&_pagetext.flag, PAGETEXT_VPOS_PAGE_EDGE, state);
16208 if (!textblock.
Load(GetTextBlockID()))
return;
16216 textblock.
Load(GetTextBlockID());
16221 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
16254 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
16255 EDTSeparatePlacement _separateplacement;
16258 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
16261 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTSeparatePlacement); }
16262 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_separateplacement; }
16270 memcpy(&_separateplacement, ((
FCSeparatePlacement*)pSource)->_GetSeparatePlacement(),
sizeof(_separateplacement));
16284 SEPARMODE_BACKWARDREPEAT = 0,
16287 SEPARMODE_TEXTREPEAT = 1,
16290 SEPARMODE_ENDINGREPEAT = 2,
16293 SEPARMODE_ENDINGREPEATTEXT = 3
16296 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCSeparatePlacement"; }
16299 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
16306 void* _GetSeparatePlacement() {
return Allocate(); }
16316 memset(&_separateplacement, 0,
sizeof(_separateplacement));
16332 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16361 virtual eStaff
GetStaff()
const {
return _separateplacement.instno; }
16422 void SetStaff(eStaff staff) { _separateplacement.instno = staff; }
16486 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
16487 EDTScoreExpression2009 _expression;
16490 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
16492 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTScoreExpression2009); }
16493 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_expression; }
16501 memcpy(&_expression, ((
FCExpression*)pSource)->_GetExpression(),
sizeof(_expression));
16518 EXPRPLAYSTART_POSINMEASURE = 0,
16521 EXPRPLAYSTART_ALIGNMENTPOINT = 1,
16524 EXPRPLAYSTART_BEGINNINGOFMEASURE = 2
16531 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_ScoreExpression2009; }
16533 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
16540 void* _GetExpression() {
return Allocate(); }
16549 memset(&_expression, 0,
sizeof(_expression));
16578 bool CalcMetricPos(
FCPoint* pPoint);
16586 SetHorizontalPos(0);
16598 virtual twobyte
GetStaff()
const {
return _expression.staffAssign; }
16632 return (_expression.flag & 0x70) >> 4;
16641 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16642 EXPRESSION_PLAYBACK_STARTPOINTS
16648 if (
GetBitFlag(_expression.flag, 0x0400))
return EXPRPLAYSTART_POSINMEASURE;
16649 if (
GetBitFlag(_expression.flag, 0x0200))
return EXPRPLAYSTART_ALIGNMENTPOINT;
16650 return EXPRPLAYSTART_BEGINNINGOFMEASURE;
16659 return !
GetBitFlag(_expression.flag, 0x1000);
16669 return !
GetBitFlag(_expression.flag, 0x0800);
16715 TimeEdu32
GetMeasurePos()
const {
return 0x10000 * _expression.horzEDUOffHi + _expression.horzEDUOffLo; }
16746 bool IsVisibleOnStaff(twobyte staff);
16758 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16773 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16812 twobyte
GetID()
const {
return _expression.dynumber; }
16819 bool SaveNewToCell(
FCCell* pCell);
16829 void SetID(twobyte
id) { _expression.dynumber = id; }
16840 _expression.flag &= ~0x07;
16841 _expression.flag |= layer;
16876 _expression.flag &= ~0x70;
16877 _expression.flag |= layer;
16887 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
16897 case EXPRPLAYSTART_POSINMEASURE:
16901 case EXPRPLAYSTART_ALIGNMENTPOINT:
16918 void SetStaff(twobyte staffno) { _expression.staffAssign = staffno; }
16972 _expression.horzEDUOffHi = (value & 0xffff0000) / 0x10000;
16973 _expression.horzEDUOffLo = value & 0x0000ffff;
16997 if (index < 0)
return;
16998 _expression.graceNoteIndex = index;
17001 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
17006 DebugOutHex(
"Flag bits (hex): ", _expression.flag);
17009 DebugOutDigit(
"Rehearsal Mark Offset: ", GetRehearsalMarkOffset());
17011 DebugOutDigit(
"Horizontal Pos (EVPUs): ", GetHorizontalPos());
17020 #define __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(field) \
17021 switch (_VersionToUse()) \
17023 case FINALEVERSION_2014: \
17024 return &_staffstyledef2014.field; \
17025 case FINALEVERSION_2012: \
17026 return &_staffstyledef2012.field; \
17028 return &_staffstyledef2010.field; \
17043 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
17044 EDTStaffStyle2010 _staffstyledef2010;
17046 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
17047 EDTStaffStyle2012 _staffstyledef2012;
17049 EDTStaffStyle2010 _staffstyledef2012;
17052 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2014
17053 EDTStaffStyle2014 _staffstyledef2014;
17055 EDTStaffStyle2010 _staffstyledef2014;
17059 const uonebyte* _GetInstUUIDPtr()
const
17061 if (_VersionToUse() >= FINALEVERSION_2014)
17062 return _staffstyledef2014.instUUID;
17063 if (_VersionToUse() >= FINALEVERSION_2012)
17064 return _staffstyledef2012.instUUID;
17069 const FLAG_16* _GetInstFlagPtr()
const
17071 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(instflag);
17075 const FLAG_16* _GetFlagPtr()
const
17077 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(flag);
17081 const FLAG_16* _GetAltFlagPtr()
const
17083 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(altFlag);
17087 const FLAG_16* _GetAltFlag2Ptr()
const
17089 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(altFlag2);
17093 const twobyte* _GetTranspositionPtr()
const
17095 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(transposition);
17099 const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlagsPtr()
const
17101 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(moreFlags);
17105 const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlags2Ptr()
const
17107 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2014)
return NULL;
17108 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_25
17109 return (
const FLAG_16*) &_staffstyledef2014.hideKeySigsShowAccis;
17111 return &_staffstyledef2014.moreFlags2;
17116 const FLAG_16* _GetMoreFlags3Ptr()
const
17118 if (_VersionToUse() < FINALEVERSION_2014)
return NULL;
17119 #if FXT_VERSION < FINALEVERSION_25
17120 return (
const FLAG_16*) &_staffstyledef2014.redisplayLayerAccis;
17122 return &_staffstyledef2014.moreFlags3;
17127 const FLAG_16* _GetMask1FlagPtr()
const
17129 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(mask1);
17133 const FLAG_16* _GetMask2FlagPtr()
const
17135 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(mask2);
17139 const FLAG_16* _GetMask3FlagPtr()
const
17141 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(mask3);
17145 const FLAG_16* _GetSFFlagPtr()
const
17147 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(sfflag);
17151 const twobyte* _GetAbbrvNamePtr()
const
17153 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(abbrvName);
17157 const twobyte* _GetFullNamePtr()
const
17159 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(fullName);
17163 const twobyte* _GetClefsPtr()
const
17165 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(clefs);
17169 const Efix32* _GetVertTabNumOffPtr()
const
17171 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(vertTabNumOff);
17175 const CMPER* _GetFretInstIDPtr()
const
17177 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(fretInstID);
17181 const Evpu16* _GetBottomBarlineOffsetPtr()
const
17183 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(botBarlineOffset);
17187 const Evpu16* _GetTopBarlineOffsetPtr()
const
17189 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(topBarlineOffset);
17193 const utwobyte* _GetCapoLowFretPtr()
const
17195 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(capoLowFret);
17199 const FLAG_16* _GetBotLinesPtr()
const
17201 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(botLines);
17205 virtual const FLAG_16* _GetTopLinesPtr()
const
17207 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(topLines);
17211 virtual const Efix32* _GetLineSpacePtr()
const
17213 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(lineSpace);
17217 virtual const twobyte* _GetDwWRestPtr()
const
17219 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(dw_wRest);
17223 virtual const twobyte* _GetStemReversalPtr()
const
17225 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(stemReversal);
17229 virtual const twobyte* _GetRepeatDotsOffPtr()
const
17231 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(repeatDotsOff);
17235 virtual const twobyte* _GetHOtherRestPtr()
const
17237 __STAFFSTYLEDEF_RETURN_FIELD_PTR(h_otherRest);
17242 FLAG_16 GetMask1()
const {
return *_GetMask1FlagPtr(); }
17245 FLAG_16 GetMask2()
const {
return *_GetMask2FlagPtr(); }
17248 FLAG_16 GetMask3()
const {
return *_GetMask3FlagPtr(); }
17256 for (
int i = 1; i <= 20; i++)
17258 if (
Load(i))
return true;
17270 for (
int i = 1; i <= 20; i++)
17272 if (
Load(itemno + i))
return true;
17279 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
17281 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_EDTStaffStyle2010; }
17284 switch (_VersionToUse())
17286 case FINALEVERSION_2014:
17287 return sizeof(EDTStaffStyle2014);
17288 case FINALEVERSION_2012:
17289 return sizeof(EDTStaffStyle2012);
17291 return sizeof(EDTStaffStyle2010);
17296 switch (_VersionToUse())
17298 case FINALEVERSION_2014:
17299 return (
void*) &_staffstyledef2014;
17300 case FINALEVERSION_2012:
17301 return (
void*) &_staffstyledef2012;
17303 return (
void*) &_staffstyledef2010;
17306 virtual EVERSION
EnigmaVersion() {
return _VersionToUse(); }
17326 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
17333 void* _GetStaffStyle() {
return Allocate(); }
17336 virtual bool Load(twobyte itemno);
17448 bool GetUseShowStaffLines()
const;
17642 bool GetUseShowNoteShapes()
const;
17651 bool GetUseNoKeySigShowAccidentals()
const;
17660 bool GetUseRedisplayOtherLayerAccidentals()
const;
17690 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*) _GetMask2FlagPtr(), SFMASK2_NEGKEY, state);
17700 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask1FlagPtr(), SFMASK1_NEGMNUMB, state);
17710 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask2FlagPtr(), SFMASK2_NEGTIME, state);
17720 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask2FlagPtr(), SFMASK2_NEGCLEF, state);
17730 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask3FlagPtr(), SFMASK3_HIDE_CHORDS, state);
17740 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask2FlagPtr(), SFMASK2_SHOWDOTS, state);
17750 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask3FlagPtr(), SFMASK3_HIDE_FRETBOARDS, state);
17760 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask3FlagPtr(), SFMASK3_HIDE_LYRICS, state);
17770 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask2FlagPtr(), SFMASK2_HIDE_RPT_BARS, state);
17780 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask2FlagPtr(), SFMASK2_SHOWRESTS, state);
17790 void SetUseShowStaffLines(
bool state);
17799 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask1FlagPtr(), SFMASK1_NEGNAME, state);
17809 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask3FlagPtr(), SFMASK3_SHOWNAME_PARTS, state);
17819 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask3FlagPtr(), SFMASK3_SHOWSTEMS, state);
17829 Set16BitFlag((FLAG_16*)_GetMask2FlagPtr(), SFMASK2_SHOWTIES, state);
17996 void SetUseShowNoteShapes(
bool state);
18005 void SetUseNoKeySigShowAccidentals(
bool state);
18014 void SetUseRedisplayOtherLayerAccidentals(
bool state);
18026 bool IsInstrumentChange();
18041 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
18045 DebugOutBool(
"Is 2012 Instrument Change: ", IsInstrumentChange());
18063 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18064 EDTStaffStyleAssign _staffstyleassign;
18067 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18069 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_EDTStaffStyleAssign; }
18070 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTStaffStyleAssign); }
18071 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_staffstyleassign; }
18079 memcpy(&_staffstyleassign, ((
FCStaffStyleAssign*)pSource)->_GetStaffStyleAssign(),
sizeof(_staffstyleassign));
18089 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCStaffStyleAssign"; }
18092 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18099 void* _GetStaffStyleAssign() {
return Allocate(); }
18105 memset(&_staffstyleassign, 0,
sizeof(_staffstyleassign));
18108 _staffstyleassign.range.end.edu = 0x7fffffff;
18194 if (!pRegion)
return false;
18196 if (GetStartMeasure() > pRegion->
GetEndMeasure())
return false;
18210 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
18237 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18238 EDTMultimeasureRest _mmrest;
18242 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18244 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_MultimeasureRest; }
18245 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTMultimeasureRest); }
18246 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_mmrest; }
18269 virtual bool SaveNew() {
return false; }
18272 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCMultiMeasureRest"; }
18275 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18282 void* _GetMMRest() {
return Allocate(); }
18292 memset(&_mmrest, 0,
sizeof(_mmrest));
18334 return GetBitFlag(_mmrest.flag, MMREST_USE_SYMBOLS);
18345 return _mmrest.symbolMeasures;
18402 void SetWidth(twobyte value) { _mmrest.measureWidth = value; }
18450 Set16BitFlag(&_mmrest.flag, MMREST_USE_SYMBOLS, value);
18461 _mmrest.symbolMeasures = value;
18495 if (measure < GetStartMeasure())
return false;
18496 if (measure > GetEndMeasure())
return false;
18506 if (!GetUseSymbols())
return true;
18507 if (GetUseSymbolsLessThan() >= CalcMeasureSpan())
return true;
18511 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_PREFS
18522 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
18532 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
18543 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18544 EDTMultiStaffInstGroup _multistaffinstgroup;
18548 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18550 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return otx_MultiStaffInstGroup; }
18551 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTMultiStaffInstGroup); }
18552 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_multistaffinstgroup; }
18562 memcpy(&_multistaffinstgroup, ((
FCMultiStaffInstrument*)pSource)->_GetMultiStaffInstGroup(),
sizeof(_multistaffinstgroup));
18576 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCMultiStaffInstrument"; }
18579 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18586 void* _GetMultiStaffInstGroup() {
return Allocate(); }
18596 memset(&_multistaffinstgroup, 0,
sizeof(_multistaffinstgroup));
18606 if (staffno == 0)
return false;
18607 if (staffno == GetFirstStaff())
return true;
18608 if (staffno == GetSecondStaff())
return true;
18609 if (staffno == GetThirdStaff())
return true;
18637 return _multistaffinstgroup.staffGroupID;
18667 _multistaffinstgroup.staffGroupID = value;
18679 CMPER returnvalue = 0;
18680 twobyte lowestslot = 10000;
18681 twobyte slottest = FX_InstToSlot(GetFirstStaff(), 0);
18684 lowestslot = slottest;
18685 returnvalue = GetFirstStaff();
18687 slottest = FX_InstToSlot(GetSecondStaff(), 0);
18688 if ((slottest) && (slottest < lowestslot))
18690 lowestslot = slottest;
18691 returnvalue = GetSecondStaff();
18693 slottest = FX_InstToSlot(GetThirdStaff(), 0);
18694 if ((slottest) && (slottest < lowestslot))
18696 returnvalue = GetThirdStaff();
18698 return returnvalue;
18709 CMPER returnvalue = 0;
18710 twobyte highestslot = -10000;
18711 twobyte slottest = FX_InstToSlot(GetFirstStaff(), 0);
18714 highestslot = slottest;
18715 returnvalue = GetFirstStaff();
18717 slottest = FX_InstToSlot(GetSecondStaff(), 0);
18718 if ((slottest) && (slottest > highestslot))
18720 highestslot = slottest;
18721 returnvalue = GetSecondStaff();
18723 slottest = FX_InstToSlot(GetThirdStaff(), 0);
18724 if ((slottest) && (slottest > highestslot))
18726 returnvalue = GetThirdStaff();
18728 return returnvalue;
18732 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
18743 #endif // #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
18755 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18756 EDTAllotment _allotment;
18760 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18762 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_Allotment; }
18763 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTAllotment); }
18764 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_allotment; }
18774 memcpy(&_allotment, ((
FCAllotment*)pSource)->_GetAllotment(),
sizeof(_allotment));
18784 CMPER trycmper = 0;
18785 while (!
Load(trycmper))
18787 if (trycmper > 8192)
return false;
18796 while (!
Load(trycmper))
18798 if (trycmper > 8192)
return false;
18810 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18817 void* _GetAllotment() {
return Allocate(); }
18823 memset(&_allotment, 0,
sizeof(_allotment));
18831 _allotment.allotment = width;
18838 return _allotment.allotment;
18842 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
18862 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18865 EDTTGraphic _graphic;
18867 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_PageGraphic; }
18868 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTTGraphic); }
18869 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_graphic; }
18871 virtual EVERSION
EnigmaVersion() {
return FINALEVERSION_2010; }
18879 memcpy(&_graphic, ((
FCPageGraphic*)pSource)->_GetGraphic(),
sizeof(_graphic));
18888 if (
Load(0, 0))
return true;
18900 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
18907 void* _GetGraphic() {
return &_graphic; }
18918 GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_LEFT = 0,
18920 GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_RIGHT = 1,
18922 GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_CENTER = 2
18932 GRAPHICVERTALIGN_TOP = 0,
18934 GRAPHICVERTALIGN_BOTTOM = 1,
18936 GRAPHICVERTALIGN_CENTER = 2
18947 memset(&_graphic, 0,
sizeof(_graphic));
18956 return (_graphic.graphicCmper == 0);
18965 return _graphic.start;
18974 return _graphic.end;
18983 return _graphic.left;
18992 return _graphic.bottom;
19001 return _graphic.width;
19010 return _graphic.height;
19019 return _graphic.origWidth;
19028 return _graphic.origHeight;
19078 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19079 GRAPHIC_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN
19085 if (
GetBitFlag(_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT))
return GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_LEFT;
19086 if (
GetBitFlag(_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT))
return GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_RIGHT;
19087 return GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_CENTER;
19096 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19097 GRAPHIC_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN
19103 if (
GetBitFlag(_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT))
return GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_LEFT;
19104 if (
GetBitFlag(_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT))
return GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_RIGHT;
19105 return GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_CENTER;
19113 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19114 GRAPHIC_VERTICAL_ALIGN
19120 if (
GetBitFlag(_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_TOP))
return GRAPHICVERTALIGN_TOP;
19121 if (
GetBitFlag(_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_BOTTOM))
return GRAPHICVERTALIGN_BOTTOM;
19122 return GRAPHICVERTALIGN_CENTER;
19133 _graphic.start = pageno;
19142 _graphic.end = pageno;
19154 _graphic.left = pos;
19155 if (!GetIndependentRightPage()) SetHorizontalPosRightPage(pos);
19167 _graphic.bottom = pos;
19168 if (!GetIndependentRightPage()) SetVerticalPosRightPage(pos);
19177 _graphic.width = width;
19186 _graphic.height = height;
19195 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.displayFlags, GRAPHIC_DISPLAY_HIDDEN, !state);
19211 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_MARGINS, !state);
19212 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_PAPER, state);
19221 if (GetIndependentRightPage() == state)
return;
19224 _graphic.rightPgAlignFlags = _graphic.alignFlags;
19226 _graphic.rightPgAlignFlags = 0;
19235 _graphic.rightPgLeft = value;
19244 _graphic.rightPgBottom = value;
19264 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19274 case GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_LEFT:
19275 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT,
true);
19276 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT,
false);
19277 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERH,
false);
19279 case GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_RIGHT:
19280 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT,
false);
19281 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT,
true);
19282 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERH,
false);
19285 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT,
false);
19286 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT,
false);
19287 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERH,
true);
19290 if (!GetIndependentRightPage()) SetHorizontalAlignmentRightPage(alignment);
19300 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19309 case GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_LEFT:
19310 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT,
true);
19311 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT,
false);
19312 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERH,
false);
19314 case GRAPHICHORIZALIGN_RIGHT:
19315 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT,
false);
19316 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT,
true);
19317 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERH,
false);
19320 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_LEFT,
false);
19321 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_RIGHT,
false);
19322 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERH,
true);
19333 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19345 case GRAPHICVERTALIGN_TOP:
19346 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_TOP,
true);
19347 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_BOTTOM,
false);
19348 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERV,
false);
19349 if (GetIndependentRightPage())
19351 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_TOP,
true);
19352 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_BOTTOM,
false);
19353 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERV,
false);
19356 case GRAPHICVERTALIGN_BOTTOM:
19357 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_TOP,
false);
19358 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_BOTTOM,
true);
19359 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERV,
false);
19360 if (GetIndependentRightPage())
19362 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_TOP,
false);
19363 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_BOTTOM,
true);
19364 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERV,
false);
19368 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_TOP,
false);
19369 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_BOTTOM,
false);
19370 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.alignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERV,
true);
19371 if (GetIndependentRightPage())
19373 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_TOP,
false);
19374 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_BOTTOM,
false);
19375 Set16BitFlag(&_graphic.rightPgAlignFlags, GRAPHIC_ALIGN_CENTERV,
true);
19399 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
19401 EDTTextRepeatStyle2005 _repeatdef;
19404 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_TextRepeatStyle; }
19405 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTTextRepeatStyle2005); }
19406 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_repeatdef; }
19414 memcpy(&_repeatdef, ((
FCTextRepeatDef*)pSource)->_GetRepeatDef(),
sizeof(_repeatdef));
19423 if (!returnval)
return false;
19427 FCString* pString = CreateTextString();
19428 bool stringexists = !pString->
IsEmpty();
19430 return stringexists;
19440 bool _SaveTextAs(
FCString* pString, CMPER itemno);
19444 bool _DeleteText();
19448 bool _DeleteEnclosure();
19460 TEXTREPJUST_LEFT = TEXT_REPEAT_LEFTJUST,
19463 TEXTREPJUST_RIGHT = TEXT_REPEAT_RITEJUST,
19466 TEXTREPJUST_CENTER = TEXT_REPEAT_CENTERED,
19469 TEXTREPJUST_FULL = TEXT_REPEAT_FULLJUST
19479 REPEATREPLACE_TIMESPLAYED = 0,
19485 REPEATREPLACE_TARGETMEASURE
19492 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
19499 void* _GetRepeatDef() {
return &_repeatdef; }
19523 _DeleteEnclosure();
19538 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19553 bool SaveTextString(
FCString *pString);
19584 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19607 if (!pInfo)
return;
19610 pInfo->
SetSize(_repeatdef.size);
19619 if (!pInfo)
return;
19622 _repeatdef.size = pInfo->
GetSize();
19632 return GetBitFlag(_repeatdef.flag, TEXT_REPEAT_USETHISFONT);
19642 return Set16BitFlag(&_repeatdef.flag, TEXT_REPEAT_USETHISFONT, state);
19651 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19652 TEXT_REPEAT_JUSTIFICATION
19656 GetJustification()
const;
19664 void SetJustification(
19665 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19666 TEXT_REPEAT_JUSTIFICATION
19677 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19678 REPEAT_REPLACE_MODE
19682 GetReplaceMode()
const;
19690 void SetReplaceMode(
19691 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19692 REPEAT_REPLACE_MODE
19700 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
19726 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
19727 EDTTextRepeat2005 _textrepeat;
19730 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
19732 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_TextRepeat2005; }
19733 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTTextRepeat2005); }
19734 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_textrepeat; }
19742 memcpy(&_textrepeat, ((
FCTextRepeat*)pSource)->_GetTextRepeat(),
sizeof(_textrepeat));
19754 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
19761 void* _GetTextRepeat() {
return &_textrepeat; }
19796 REPTARGET_UNDEFINED = 0,
19799 REPTARGET_DEFID = 3,
19802 REPTARGET_MEASURENUM = 1,
19806 REPTARGET_BACKWARDS = 2,
19809 REPTARGET_NEVERSKIPENDING = 5,
19813 REPTARGET_FORWARDS = 8,
19816 REPTARGET_NEXTENDING = 9
19830 REPACTION_NEVERJUMP = 0,
19833 REPACTION_ALWAYSJUMP = 1,
19836 REPACTION_JUMPONPASS = 2,
19839 REPACTION_PLAYSECTION = 3,
19842 REPACTION_STOPONPASS = 4
19851 memset(&_textrepeat, 0,
sizeof(_textrepeat));
19872 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19891 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
19905 twobyte
GetID()
const {
return _textrepeat.repnum; }
19916 void SetID(twobyte
id) { _textrepeat.repnum = id; }
19995 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
20000 GetShowMode()
const;
20009 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
20031 if (list < 0)
return;
20032 _textrepeat.staffList = list;
20033 Set16BitFlag(&_textrepeat.flag, TXTRPT_TOPSTAFFONLY,
false);
20050 _textrepeat.actuate = totalpasses;
20087 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
20092 GetTargetTrigger()
const;
20104 void SetTargetTrigger(
20105 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
20122 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
20138 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
20147 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
20151 DebugOutHex(
"FCTextRepeat:flag: ", _textrepeat.flag);
20164 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
20166 EDTExecutableShapeDef _executableshapedef;
20169 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_ExecutableShapeDef; }
20170 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTExecutableShapeDef); }
20171 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_executableshapedef; }
20179 memcpy(&_executableshapedef, ((
FCExecutableShapeDef*)pSource)->_GetExecutableShapeDef(),
sizeof(_executableshapedef));
20201 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCExecutableShapeDef"; }
20204 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
20211 void* _GetExecutableShapeDef() {
return &_executableshapedef; }
20224 void SetShapeID(twobyte shapeID) { _executableshapedef.shapeID = shapeID; }
20226 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
20250 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
20253 EDTChordSuffix _chordsuffixold;
20254 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
20255 EDTChordSuffix2012 _chordsuffix2012;
20259 bool _Use2012Version()
const;
20261 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_ChordSuffix; }
20264 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
20265 if (_Use2012Version())
return sizeof(EDTChordSuffix2012);
20267 return sizeof(EDTChordSuffix);
20271 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
20272 if (_Use2012Version())
return (
void*) &_chordsuffix2012;
20274 return (
void*) &_chordsuffixold;
20278 if (_Use2012Version())
return FINALEVERSION_2012;
20279 return FINALEVERSION_2010;
20291 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCChordSuffixElement"; }
20294 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
20301 void* _GetDataPtr()
20303 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
20304 if (_Use2012Version())
return &_chordsuffix2012;
20306 return &_chordsuffixold;
20331 eUniChar32 GetSymbol()
const;
20337 void SetSymbol(eUniChar32 symbol);
20343 bool GetNumberRepresentation()
const;
20349 void SetNumberRepresentation(
bool state);
20355 bool GetPrefixFlat()
const;
20361 void SetPrefixFlat(
bool state);
20367 bool GetPrefixSharp()
const;
20373 void SetPrefixSharp(
bool state);
20379 bool GetPrefixPlus()
const;
20385 void SetPrefixPlus(
bool state);
20391 bool GetPrefixMinus()
const;
20397 void SetPrefixMinus(
bool state);
20423 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
20432 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
20434 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
20438 const EXTAG __ot_FRETSTYLE = MAKEEXTAG(MAKETAG(edMultiInciOther,13),
'f',
't');
20440 const int __MAX_FRET_NAME_LEN = 47;
20441 const int __MAX_FRET_NUM_TEXT_LEN = 23;
20443 #include "pragma_align_begin.h"
20444 struct __FCFretStyle
20448 tbool showLastFret;
20450 tbool fingNumWhite;
20456 eShape fingStrShapeID;
20458 eShape openStrShapeID;
20460 eShape muteStrShapeID;
20463 eShape barreShapeID;
20465 eShape customShapeID;
20467 utwobyte defNumFrets;
20472 twobyte stringGapHi;
20473 twobyte stringGapLo;
20479 twobyte stringWidthHi;
20480 twobyte stringWidthLo;
20482 twobyte fretWidthHi;
20483 twobyte fretWidthLo;
20485 twobyte nutWidthHi;
20487 twobyte nutWidthLo;
20489 twobyte vertTextOffHi;
20490 twobyte vertTextOffLo;
20492 twobyte horzTextOffHi;
20493 twobyte horzTextOffLo;
20495 twobyte horzHandleOffHi;
20497 twobyte horzHandleOffLo;
20499 twobyte vertHandleOffHi;
20500 twobyte vertHandleOffLo;
20502 twobyte whiteoutHi;
20503 twobyte whiteoutLo;
20507 EFONTID fretNumFontID;
20509 PsPoint16 fretNumFontSize;
20510 FLAG_16 fretNumFontEfx;
20512 EFONTID fingNumFontID;
20513 PsPoint16 fingNumFontSize;
20514 FLAG_16 fingNumFontEfx;
20517 twobyte horzFingNumOffHi;
20519 twobyte horzFingNumOffLo;
20521 twobyte vertFingNumOffHi;
20522 twobyte vertFingNumOffLo;
20527 ECHAR name[__MAX_FRET_NAME_LEN + 1];
20529 ECHAR fretNumText[__MAX_FRET_NUM_TEXT_LEN + 1];
20534 #include "pragma_align_end.h"
20550 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
20552 __FCFretStyle _fretstyledef;
20555 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return __ot_FRETSTYLE; }
20556 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(__FCFretStyle); }
20557 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*)&_fretstyledef; }
20558 virtual EVERSION
EnigmaVersion() {
return FINALEVERSION_2010; }
20566 memcpy(&_fretstyledef, ((
FCFretboardStyleDef*)pSource)->_GetFretStyleDef(),
sizeof(_fretstyledef));
20588 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCFretboardStyleDef"; }
20591 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
20598 void* _GetFretStyleDef() {
return &_fretstyledef; }
20608 memset(&_fretstyledef, 0,
sizeof(_fretstyledef));
20625 if (!pString)
return;
20633 Efix32
GetStringSpacing()
const {
return MAKELONG(_fretstyledef.stringGapLo, _fretstyledef.stringGapHi); }
20639 Efix32
GetStringThickness()
const {
return MAKELONG(_fretstyledef.stringWidthLo, _fretstyledef.stringWidthHi); }
20645 Efix32
GetFretSpacing()
const {
return MAKELONG(_fretstyledef.fretGapLo, _fretstyledef.fretGapHi); }
20651 Efix32
GetFretThickness()
const {
return MAKELONG(_fretstyledef.fretWidthLo, _fretstyledef.fretWidthHi); }
20657 Efix32
GetNutThickness()
const {
return MAKELONG(_fretstyledef.nutWidthLo, _fretstyledef.nutWidthHi); }
20699 if (!pString)
return;
20700 pString->
SetCString(_fretstyledef.fretNumText);
20747 return _fretstyledef.fingStrShapeID;
20756 return _fretstyledef.openStrShapeID;
20765 return _fretstyledef.muteStrShapeID;
20774 return _fretstyledef.barreShapeID;
20783 return _fretstyledef.customShapeID;
20794 if (!pFontInfo)
return;
20795 pFontInfo->
SetNameByID(_fretstyledef.fingNumFontID);
20796 pFontInfo->
SetSize(_fretstyledef.fingNumFontSize);
20808 if (!pFontInfo)
return;
20809 pFontInfo->
SetNameByID(_fretstyledef.fretNumFontID);
20810 pFontInfo->
SetSize(_fretstyledef.fretNumFontSize);
20828 if (!pString)
return;
20829 memset(&_fretstyledef.name, 0, __MAX_FRET_NAME_LEN + 1);
20830 strncpy(_fretstyledef.name, pString->
GetCString(), __MAX_FRET_NAME_LEN);
20839 _fretstyledef.stringGapLo = LOWORD(value);
20840 _fretstyledef.stringGapHi = HIWORD(value);
20849 _fretstyledef.stringWidthLo = LOWORD(value);
20850 _fretstyledef.stringWidthHi = HIWORD(value);
20859 _fretstyledef.fretGapLo = LOWORD(value);
20860 _fretstyledef.fretGapHi = HIWORD(value);
20869 _fretstyledef.fretWidthLo = LOWORD(value);
20870 _fretstyledef.fretWidthHi = HIWORD(value);
20879 _fretstyledef.nutWidthLo = LOWORD(value);
20880 _fretstyledef.nutWidthHi = HIWORD(value);
20889 _fretstyledef.horzFingNumOffLo = LOWORD(value);
20890 _fretstyledef.horzFingNumOffHi = HIWORD(value);
20899 _fretstyledef.vertFingNumOffLo = LOWORD(value);
20900 _fretstyledef.vertFingNumOffHi = HIWORD(value);
20909 _fretstyledef.whiteoutLo = LOWORD(value);
20910 _fretstyledef.whiteoutHi = HIWORD(value);
20919 _fretstyledef.horzHandleOffLo = LOWORD(value);
20920 _fretstyledef.horzHandleOffHi = HIWORD(value);
20929 _fretstyledef.vertHandleOffLo = LOWORD(value);
20930 _fretstyledef.vertHandleOffHi = HIWORD(value);
20943 if (!pString)
return;
20944 memset(&_fretstyledef.fretNumText, 0, __MAX_FRET_NUM_TEXT_LEN + 1);
20945 strncpy(_fretstyledef.fretNumText, pString->
GetCString(), __MAX_FRET_NUM_TEXT_LEN);
20954 _fretstyledef.horzTextOffLo = LOWORD(value);
20955 _fretstyledef.horzTextOffHi = HIWORD(value);
20964 _fretstyledef.vertTextOffLo = LOWORD(value);
20965 _fretstyledef.vertTextOffHi = HIWORD(value);
21000 _fretstyledef.fingStrShapeID = value;
21009 _fretstyledef.openStrShapeID = value;
21018 _fretstyledef.muteStrShapeID = value;
21027 _fretstyledef.barreShapeID = value;
21036 _fretstyledef.customShapeID = value;
21047 if (!pFontInfo)
return;
21048 _fretstyledef.fingNumFontID = pFontInfo->
GetNameByID();
21049 _fretstyledef.fingNumFontSize = pFontInfo->
GetSize();
21061 if (!pFontInfo)
return;
21062 _fretstyledef.fretNumFontID = pFontInfo->
GetNameByID();
21063 _fretstyledef.fretNumFontSize = pFontInfo->
GetSize();
21067 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
21079 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
21084 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
21087 EDTFretGroup2012 _fretgroup;
21090 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return otx_FretGroup; }
21091 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTFretGroup2012); }
21092 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_fretgroup; }
21093 virtual EVERSION
EnigmaVersion() {
return FINALEVERSION_2012; }
21109 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCFretboardGroupDef"; }
21112 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
21119 void* _GetDataPtr() {
return &_fretgroup; }
21134 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
21160 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
21164 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_EndingRepeat; }
21166 void _AllocateMemory(
int size);
21181 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
21186 EDTEndingRepeat2005* _TypeCast()
const {
return (EDTEndingRepeat2005*)
_datablock; }
21196 _AllocateMemory(
sizeof(EDTEndingRepeat2005));
21227 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EndRepeat_JMPIGNORE);
21236 return _TypeCast()->nextend;
21245 return GetBitFlag(_TypeCast()->flag, EndRepeat_INDIVPLAC);
21254 return _TypeCast()->line2;
21263 return _TypeCast()->pos;
21272 return _TypeCast()->line;
21281 return _TypeCast()->pos2;
21290 return _TypeCast()->endline;
21299 return _TypeCast()->textpos;
21308 return _TypeCast()->textline;
21317 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21322 GetShowMode()
const;
21338 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21345 switch (_TypeCast()->flag & EndRepeat_ACTION_BITS)
21367 if (list < 0)
return;
21368 _TypeCast()->staffList = list;
21369 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, EndRepeat_TOPSTAFFONLY,
false);
21378 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, EndRepeat_JMPIGNORE, state);
21388 _TypeCast()->nextend = measure;
21397 Set16BitFlag(&_TypeCast()->flag, EndRepeat_INDIVPLAC, state);
21406 _TypeCast()->line2 = position;
21415 _TypeCast()->pos = position;
21424 _TypeCast()->line = position;
21433 _TypeCast()->pos2 = position;
21442 _TypeCast()->endline = position;
21451 _TypeCast()->textpos = position;
21460 _TypeCast()->textline = position;
21471 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21489 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21504 bool SaveTextString(
FCString* pString);
21514 bool GetPassNumbers(
FCNumbers* pNumbers);
21527 bool SetPassNumbers(
FCNumbers* pNumbers);
21537 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21548 _TypeCast()->flag &= ~EndRepeat_ACTION_BITS;
21549 _TypeCast()->flag |= 0x10;
21552 _TypeCast()->flag &= ~EndRepeat_ACTION_BITS;
21553 _TypeCast()->flag |= 0x20;
21556 _TypeCast()->flag &= ~EndRepeat_ACTION_BITS;
21557 _TypeCast()->flag |= 0x50;
21560 _TypeCast()->flag &= ~EndRepeat_ACTION_BITS;
21586 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21607 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21626 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
21630 EDTBackwardRepeat2005 _backwardrepeat;
21633 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_BackwardRepeat; }
21634 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTBackwardRepeat2005); }
21635 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_backwardrepeat; }
21643 memcpy(&_backwardrepeat, ((
FCBackwardRepeat*)pSource)->_GetBackwardRepeat(),
sizeof(_backwardrepeat));
21655 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
21662 void* _GetBackwardRepeat() {
return &_backwardrepeat; }
21671 memset(&_backwardrepeat, 0,
sizeof(_backwardrepeat));
21683 return _backwardrepeat.target;
21692 return GetBitFlag(_backwardrepeat.flag, BackRepeat_INDIVPLAC);
21702 return _backwardrepeat.actuate;
21711 return _backwardrepeat.line2;
21720 return _backwardrepeat.line1;
21729 return _backwardrepeat.pos1;
21738 return _backwardrepeat.pos2;
21747 return _backwardrepeat.staffList;
21756 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21775 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21785 Set16BitFlag(&_backwardrepeat.flag, BackRepeat_TOPSTAFFONLY,
true);
21786 _backwardrepeat.staffList = 0;
21789 Set16BitFlag(&_backwardrepeat.flag, BackRepeat_TOPSTAFFONLY,
false);
21790 if (!_backwardrepeat.staffList) _backwardrepeat.staffList = 1;
21793 Set16BitFlag(&_backwardrepeat.flag, BackRepeat_TOPSTAFFONLY,
false);
21794 _backwardrepeat.staffList = 0;
21806 _backwardrepeat.target = measure;
21815 return Set16BitFlag(&_backwardrepeat.flag, BackRepeat_INDIVPLAC, state);
21825 _backwardrepeat.actuate = passes;
21837 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21844 switch (_backwardrepeat.flag & BackRepeat_ACTION_BITS)
21863 return GetBitFlag(_backwardrepeat.flag, BackRepeat_CLRonCHANGE);
21872 _backwardrepeat.line2 = position;
21881 _backwardrepeat.line1 = position;
21890 _backwardrepeat.pos1 = position;
21899 _backwardrepeat.pos2 = position;
21908 _backwardrepeat.staffList = stafflistid;
21920 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21931 _backwardrepeat.flag &= ~BackRepeat_ACTION_BITS;
21932 _backwardrepeat.flag |= 0x10;
21935 _backwardrepeat.flag &= ~BackRepeat_ACTION_BITS;
21936 _backwardrepeat.flag |= 0x20;
21939 _backwardrepeat.flag &= ~BackRepeat_ACTION_BITS;
21955 Set16BitFlag(&_backwardrepeat.flag, BackRepeat_CLRonCHANGE, state);
21966 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
21973 switch (_backwardrepeat.flag & 0xc00)
21985 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
21986 DebugOutHex(
"Undefined flag state for FCBackwardRepeat:GetAction: ", _backwardrepeat.flag);
22000 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
22046 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
22062 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22066 EDTBeatChartElement _beatchartelement;
22069 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_BeatChartElement; }
22070 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTBeatChartElement); }
22071 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_beatchartelement; }
22079 memcpy(&_beatchartelement, ((
FCBeatChartElement*)pSource)->_GetBeatChartElement(),
sizeof(_beatchartelement));
22088 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCBeatChartElement"; }
22091 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22098 void* _GetBeatChartElement() {
return &_beatchartelement; }
22108 memset(&_beatchartelement, 0,
sizeof(_beatchartelement));
22149 if (!GetInitElement())
return 0;
22150 return _beatchartelement.posi;
22167 if (!GetInitElement())
return 0;
22168 return _beatchartelement.minpos;
22190 if (GetInitElement())
return 0;
22191 return _beatchartelement.nextposi;
22210 if (GetInitElement())
return 0;
22211 return (GetNextHorizontalPosition() - GetHorizontalPosition());
22234 if (GetInitElement())
return;
22235 _beatchartelement.nextposi = width + _beatchartelement.posi;
22247 if (GetInitElement())
return;
22248 _beatchartelement.posi = position;
22261 if (GetInitElement())
return;
22262 _beatchartelement.nextposi = value;
22274 if (!GetInitElement())
return;
22275 _beatchartelement.posi = span;
22287 if (!GetInitElement())
return;
22288 _beatchartelement.minpos = width;
22314 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
22319 DebugOutDigit(
"Horizontal Position: ", GetHorizontalPosition());
22321 DebugOutDigit(
"Next horizontal position:", GetNextHorizontalPosition());
22337 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22344 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_Tempo; }
22345 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTTempo); }
22346 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_tempo; }
22354 memcpy(&_tempo, ((
FCTempoElement*)pSource)->_GetTempoElement(),
sizeof(_tempo));
22366 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22373 void* _GetTempoElement() {
return &_tempo; }
22382 memset(&_tempo, 0,
sizeof(_tempo));
22383 _tempo.unit = 1000;
22415 _tempo.flag = value ? TIMEDIAL_ABSOLUTE : TIMEDIAL_RELATIVE;
22444 float result = _tempo.ratio * _tempo.unit;
22450 fourbyte fb = (fourbyte) (result * 100);
22458 float result = GetRatio();
22473 _tempo.unit = 1000;
22478 _tempo.ratio = (fourbyte) value;
22489 SetAbsolute(
false);
22490 SetRatio((fourbyte) (value * 10));
22496 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_TINYXML
22506 PERC_NOTE_TYPE _notetype;
22515 PERCNOTETYPE_BASSDRUM = 13,
22516 PERCNOTETYPE_BELLTREE = 70,
22517 PERCNOTETYPE_BONGO_HIGH = 32,
22518 PERCNOTETYPE_BONGO_LOW = 33,
22519 PERCNOTETYPE_CONGA = 36,
22520 PERCNOTETYPE_COWBELL = 6,
22521 PERCNOTETYPE_CASTANETS = 362,
22522 PERCNOTETYPE_CYMBAL_CHINA = 17,
22523 PERCNOTETYPE_CYMBAL_CRASH = 4,
22524 PERCNOTETYPE_CYMBAL_RIDE = 18,
22525 PERCNOTETYPE_CYMBAL_SIZZLE = 121,
22526 PERCNOTETYPE_CYMBAL_SPLASH = 21,
22527 PERCNOTETYPE_CLAVES = 35,
22528 PERCNOTETYPE_GONG_SMALL = 137,
22529 PERCNOTETYPE_GONG_MEDIUM = 136,
22530 PERCNOTETYPE_GONG_LARGE = 135,
22531 PERCNOTETYPE_HIHAT_CLOSED = 15,
22532 PERCNOTETYPE_HIHAT_FOOT = 16,
22533 PERCNOTETYPE_HIHAT_OPEN = 14,
22534 PERCNOTETYPE_KICKDRUM = 2,
22535 PERCNOTETYPE_RHYTHMCUES = 235,
22536 PERCNOTETYPE_ROTOTOM_MID = 321,
22537 PERCNOTETYPE_SIDEDRUM = 279,
22538 PERCNOTETYPE_SNAREDRUM = 1,
22539 PERCNOTETYPE_TAMBOURINE = 7,
22540 PERCNOTETYPE_TAMTAM = 149,
22541 PERCNOTETYPE_TOM_HIGH = 24,
22542 PERCNOTETYPE_TOM_HIGHMID = 25,
22543 PERCNOTETYPE_TOM_LOW = 27,
22544 PERCNOTETYPE_TRIANGLE_MUTE = 8,
22545 PERCNOTETYPE_TRIANGLE_OPEN = 9,
22546 PERCNOTETYPE_VIBRASLAP = 12,
22547 PERCNOTETYPE_WINDCHIMES = 460,
22548 PERCNOTETYPE_WOODBLOCK_HIGH = 10
22554 _midikey = midikey;
22555 _notetype = notetype;
22580 twobyte returnvalue = _notetype & 0xf000;
22581 returnvalue /= 0x1000;
22582 return returnvalue;
22606 twobyte _percussionid;
22616 _percussionid = percussionid;
22622 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCPercussionMapNotes"; }
22638 for (
int i = 0; i < GetCount(); i++)
22654 for (
int i = 0; i < GetCount(); i++)
22657 if (pItem->
GetMidiNote() == midinote)
return pItem;
22675 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCPercussionMapNotesLookup"; }
22708 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCPercussionLayoutNotesLookup"; }
22748 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22750 EDTInstDefinition _instrumentdef;
22753 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return ot_InstDefinition; }
22754 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(EDTInstDefinition); }
22755 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_instrumentdef; }
22763 memcpy(&_instrumentdef, ((
FCInstrumentDef*)pSource)->_GetInstrumentDef(),
sizeof(_instrumentdef));
22775 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22782 void* _GetInstrumentDef() {
return &_instrumentdef; }
22808 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
22835 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_TINYXML
22851 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
22862 bool GetPercussionMapLocation(
void* pFileSpecLocation,
FCString* pMapName, EVERSION finpathspecversion);
22864 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
22874 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22876 #include "pragma_align_begin.h"
22877 struct __EDTLayerPlayData
22879 ePlaybackRoute playbackRouteNum;
22880 twobyte velControlLevel;
22881 FLAG_16 velControlSaveFlags;
22884 #include "pragma_align_end.h"
22886 #include "pragma_align_begin.h"
22887 struct __EDTPlayData2006
22889 __EDTLayerPlayData chordPlayData;
22890 __EDTLayerPlayData MIDIExpressionsPlayData;
22891 __EDTLayerPlayData layerPlayData[4];
22893 #include "pragma_align_end.h"
22895 const EXTAG __ot_PlayData2006 = MAKEEXTAG(edOther4Inci,
'P',
'L');
22898 const FLAG_16 __PLAY_LAYER_TRACK = 0x0001;
22899 const FLAG_16 __SOLO_LAYER_TRACK = 0x0002;
22915 __EDTLayerPlayData* _pLayerData;
22920 _pLayerData = pData;
22931 return _pLayerData->playbackRouteNum + 1;
22940 return GetBitFlag(_pLayerData->playFlags, __PLAY_LAYER_TRACK);
22949 return GetBitFlag(_pLayerData->playFlags, __SOLO_LAYER_TRACK);
22962 _pLayerData->playbackRouteNum = value - 1;
22971 return Set16BitFlag(&_pLayerData->playFlags, __PLAY_LAYER_TRACK, state);
22980 return Set16BitFlag(&_pLayerData->playFlags, __SOLO_LAYER_TRACK, state);
22994 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
22996 __EDTPlayData2006 _playbackdata;
23003 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return __ot_PlayData2006; }
23004 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(__EDTPlayData2006); }
23005 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_playbackdata; }
23022 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCInstrumentPlaybackData"; }
23025 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23032 void* _GetPlaybackData() {
return &_playbackdata; }
23040 _pChordLayer = NULL;
23041 _pExpressionLayer = NULL;
23042 for (
int i = 0; i < 4; i++) _pNoteLayers[i] = NULL;
23048 delete _pChordLayer;
23049 delete _pExpressionLayer;
23050 for (
int i = 0; i < 4; i++)
delete _pNoteLayers[i];
23068 if (_pChordLayer)
return _pChordLayer;
23070 return _pChordLayer;
23088 if (_pExpressionLayer)
return _pExpressionLayer;
23090 return _pExpressionLayer;
23110 if ((layernumber < 1) || (layernumber > 4))
return NULL;
23113 if (_pNoteLayers[layernumber])
return _pNoteLayers[layernumber];
23114 _pNoteLayers[layernumber] =
new FCLayerPlaybackData(&_playbackdata.layerPlayData[layernumber]);
23115 return _pNoteLayers[layernumber];
23118 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
23139 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23141 EDTPercussionNoteDef2010 _percussionnotedef2010;
23142 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_2012
23143 EDTPercussionNoteDef2012 _percussionnotedef2012;
23150 EVERSION _VersionToUse()
const;
23153 virtual EXTAG
Tag();
23174 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCPercussionLayoutNote"; }
23177 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23184 void* _GetPercussionNoteDef();
23200 PERC_NOTE_TYPE GetRawNoteType()
const;
23207 PERC_NOTE_TYPE GetNoteType()
const;
23217 twobyte GetOrderID()
const;
23226 twobyte GetStaffPosition()
const;
23232 fourbyte GetClosedNotehead()
const;
23238 fourbyte GetHalfNotehead()
const;
23244 fourbyte GetWholeNotehead()
const;
23250 fourbyte GetDoubleWholeNotehead()
const;
23258 void SetNoteType(PERC_NOTE_TYPE value);
23268 void SetOrderID(twobyte value);
23278 void SetStaffPosition(twobyte value);
23284 void SetClosedNotehead(fourbyte value);
23290 void SetHalfNotehead(fourbyte value);
23296 void SetWholeNotehead(fourbyte value);
23302 void SetDoubleWholeNotehead(fourbyte value);
23304 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_TINYXML
23325 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
23337 const EXTAG __ot_CategoryStaffListScore = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'C',
's');
23338 const EXTAG __ot_CategoryStaffListParts = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'C',
'p');
23339 const EXTAG __ot_CategoryStaffListScoreOverride = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'c',
23341 const EXTAG __ot_CategoryStaffListPartsOverride = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'C',
23345 const EXTAG __ot_StaffAssignStaffListScore = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'S',
's');
23346 const EXTAG __ot_StaffAssignStaffListParts = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
's',
'p');
23347 const EXTAG __ot_StaffAssignStaffListScoreOverride = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'S',
23349 const EXTAG __ot_StaffAssignStaffListPartsOverride = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
's',
23365 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23366 EDTStaffList* _TypeCast()
const {
return (EDTStaffList*)
_datablock; }
23369 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23394 SLMODE_CATEGORY_SCORE,
23395 SLMODE_CATEGORY_PARTS,
23396 SLMODE_CATEGORY_FORCESCORE,
23397 SLMODE_CATEGORY_FORCEPARTS,
23399 SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_SCORE,
23400 SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_PARTS,
23401 SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_FORCESCORE,
23402 SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_FORCEPARTS
23417 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23424 void* _GetStaffListElement() {
return _datablock; }
23448 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
23464 case SLMODE_FORCESCORE:
23467 case SLMODE_FORCEPARTS:
23471 case SLMODE_CATEGORY_SCORE:
23474 case SLMODE_CATEGORY_PARTS:
23477 case SLMODE_CATEGORY_FORCESCORE:
23480 case SLMODE_CATEGORY_FORCEPARTS:
23484 case SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_SCORE:
23487 case SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_PARTS:
23490 case SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_FORCESCORE:
23493 case SLMODE_ASSIGNMENT_FORCEPARTS:
23499 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
23507 virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno);
23513 virtual bool Save();
23529 int maxcount =
_loadedsize /
sizeof(EDTStaffList);
23531 while (maxcount > 0)
23533 if (_TypeCast()[maxcount - 1].staff == 0)
23549 int maxcount =
_loadedsize /
sizeof(EDTStaffList);
23550 int staffcount = 0;
23551 for (
int i = 0; i < maxcount; i++)
23553 if (_TypeCast()[i].staff > 0) staffcount++;
23569 if (index < 0)
return 0;
23570 int maxcount =
_loadedsize /
sizeof(EDTStaffList);
23571 int staffcount = 0;
23572 for (
int i = 0; i < maxcount; i++)
23574 if (_TypeCast()[i].staff > 0)
23576 if (staffcount == index)
return _TypeCast()[index].staff;
23589 if (stafflistelement == 0)
return false;
23590 int maxcount =
_loadedsize /
sizeof(EDTStaffList);
23591 for (
int i = 0; i < maxcount; i++)
23593 if (_TypeCast()[i].staff == stafflistelement)
return true;
23604 return IsElementAvailable(SLD_TOPSTAFF);
23613 return IsElementAvailable(SLD_BOTTOMSTAFF);
23624 return IsElementAvailable(staffnumber);
23639 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
23650 bool SaveNameString(
FCString* pString);
23656 bool AddElement(twobyte elementnumber);
23670 if (staffnumber < 1)
return false;
23671 return AddElement(staffnumber);
23683 return AddElement(SLD_TOPSTAFF);
23695 return AddElement(SLD_BOTTOMSTAFF);
23702 bool RemoveElement(twobyte element);
23712 return RemoveElement(SLD_TOPSTAFF);
23723 return RemoveElement(SLD_BOTTOMSTAFF);
23734 if (staffnumber < 1)
return false;
23735 return RemoveElement(staffnumber);
23749 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23750 EDTFretInstrument _fretinstrumentold;
23752 FIN25_3_CODE( EDTFretInstrument25_3 _fretinstrument25_3; )
23756 bool _Use25_3Version()
const;
23759 const twobyte* _GetNoOfFretsPtr()
const
23761 FIN25_3_CODE(
if (_Use25_3Version())
return &_fretinstrument25_3.noOfFrets; )
23762 return &_fretinstrumentold.noOfFrets;
23766 const twobyte* _GetNoOfStringsPtr()
const
23768 FIN25_3_CODE(
if (_Use25_3Version())
return &_fretinstrument25_3.noOfStrings; )
23769 return &_fretinstrumentold.noOfStrings;
23773 const eClef* _GetSpeedyClefPtr()
const
23775 FIN25_3_CODE(
if (_Use25_3Version())
return &_fretinstrument25_3.speedyClef; )
23776 return &_fretinstrumentold.speedyClef;
23780 const utwobyte* _GetDiatonicStepsLoPtr()
const
23782 FIN25_3_CODE(
if (_Use25_3Version())
return &_fretinstrument25_3.diatonicStepsLo; )
23783 return &_fretinstrumentold.diatonicStepsLo;
23787 const utwobyte* _GetDiatonicStepsHiPtr()
const
23789 FIN25_3_CODE(
if (_Use25_3Version())
return &_fretinstrument25_3.diatonicStepsHi; )
23790 return &_fretinstrumentold.diatonicStepsHi;
23795 const void* _GetNamePtr()
const
23797 FIN25_3_CODE(
if (_Use25_3Version())
return &_fretinstrument25_3.name; )
23798 return &_fretinstrumentold.name;
23803 const void* _GetStringTuningPtr(
int stringno)
const
23805 FIN25_3_CODE(
if (_Use25_3Version())
return &_fretinstrument25_3.stringTuning[stringno - 1]; )
23806 return &_fretinstrumentold.stringTuning[stringno - 1];
23811 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23813 virtual EXTAG
Tag();
23816 virtual EVERSION
EnigmaVersion() {
return _Use25_3Version() ? FINALEVERSION_25_3 : FINALEVERSION_2010; }
23827 memcpy(_GetFretInstrumentDef(), ((
FCFretInstrumentDef*)pSource)->_GetFretInstrumentDef(), size);
23836 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCFretInstrumentDef"; }
23849 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
23856 void* _GetFretInstrumentDef() {
return Allocate(); }
23866 if (_Use25_3Version())
23868 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_25_3
23869 memset(&_fretinstrument25_3, 0,
sizeof(_fretinstrument25_3));
23876 memset(&_fretinstrumentold, 0,
sizeof(_fretinstrumentold));
23888 return *_GetNoOfFretsPtr();
23897 *(twobyte*)_GetNoOfFretsPtr() = count;
23906 return *_GetNoOfStringsPtr();
23917 if (count < 1)
return;
23918 if (count > 24)
return;
23919 *(twobyte*)_GetNoOfStringsPtr() = count;
23928 return *_GetSpeedyClefPtr();
23937 *(eClef*)_GetSpeedyClefPtr() = clef;
23952 if (!pString)
return false;
23953 if (_Use25_3Version())
23961 pString->
SetCString((ECHAR*) _GetNamePtr());
23979 if (!pString)
return false;
23980 if (pString->
GetLength() > 47)
return false;
23981 if (_Use25_3Version())
23989 strcpy((ECHAR*) _GetNamePtr(), pString->
GetCString());
24006 if (stringnumber < 1)
return 0;
24007 if (stringnumber > GetStringCount())
return 0;
24008 if (stringnumber > 24)
return 0;
24012 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_25_3
24013 if (_Use25_3Version())
24015 return ((EDTStringData*)_GetStringTuningPtr(stringnumber))->pitch;
24018 return *(twobyte*)_GetStringTuningPtr(stringnumber);
24034 if (stringnumber < 1)
return false;
24035 if (stringnumber > GetStringCount())
return false;
24036 if (stringnumber > 24)
return false;
24038 if (_Use25_3Version())
24040 #if FXT_VERSION >= FINALEVERSION_25_3
24041 ((EDTStringData*)_GetStringTuningPtr(stringnumber))->pitch = midinumber;
24046 *(twobyte*)_GetStringTuningPtr(stringnumber) = midinumber;
24057 return (MAKELONG(*_GetDiatonicStepsLoPtr(), *_GetDiatonicStepsHiPtr()) != 0);
24066 if (!IsDiatonic())
return 0;
24067 ufourbyte fb = MAKELONG(*_GetDiatonicStepsLoPtr(), *_GetDiatonicStepsHiPtr());
24068 int totalcount = 0;
24071 if (fb & 0x01) totalcount ++;
24086 if (!pNumbers)
return false;
24088 ufourbyte fb = MAKELONG(*_GetDiatonicStepsLoPtr(), *_GetDiatonicStepsHiPtr());
24112 if (!pNumbers)
return false;
24114 for (
int i = pNumbers->
GetCount() - 1; i >= 0; i--)
24117 if (pNumber->
GetInt() < 1)
return false;
24118 if (pNumber->
GetInt() > 5)
return false;
24121 for (
int bitcount = 0; bitcount < pNumber->
GetInt() - 1; bitcount++)
24126 *(utwobyte*)_GetDiatonicStepsLoPtr() = LOWORD(fb);
24127 *(utwobyte*)_GetDiatonicStepsHiPtr() = HIWORD(fb);
24132 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
24136 DebugOutHex(
"Diatonic bit set: ", MAKELONG(*_GetDiatonicStepsLoPtr(), *_GetDiatonicStepsHiPtr()));
24142 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24143 #include "pragma_align_begin.h"
24144 struct __EDTMidClef
24148 twobyte vertadjust;
24150 twobyte horizadjust;
24153 #include "pragma_align_end.h"
24155 const EXTAG __ot_MidClef = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'C',
'E');
24172 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24173 __EDTMidClef _midclefdata;
24177 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24179 virtual EXTAG
Tag() {
return __ot_MidClef; }
24180 virtual int DataSizeLoad() {
return sizeof(__EDTMidClef); }
24181 virtual void*
Allocate() {
return (
void*) &_midclefdata; }
24185 memcpy(&_midclefdata, ((
FCCellClefChange*)pSource)->_GetCellClefChange(),
sizeof(_midclefdata));
24197 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24204 void* _GetCellClefChange() {
return Allocate(); }
24213 memset(&_midclefdata, 0,
sizeof(_midclefdata));
24214 _midclefdata.resize = 75;
24257 twobyte GetClefShow()
const;
24315 void SetClefShow(twobyte showstate);
24361 _position = position;
24383 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24385 const EXTAG __ot_MetatoolExpression = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'&',
'd');
24386 const EXTAG __ot_MetatoolArticulation = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'&',
'a');
24387 const EXTAG __ot_MetatoolRepeat = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'&',
'r');
24388 const EXTAG __ot_MetatoolClef = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'&',
'f');
24389 const EXTAG __ot_MetatoolTuplet = MAKEEXTAG(edOther3Inci,
'&',
'u');
24390 const EXTAG __ot_MetatoolStaffStyle = MAKEEXTAG(edOther,
'&',
's');
24392 #include "pragma_align_begin.h"
24393 struct __EDTMetatool
24402 #include "pragma_align_end.h"
24407 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
24430 MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN = 0,
24433 MTOOLMODE_EXPRESSION = 1,
24436 MTOOLMODE_ARTICULATION = 2,
24439 MTOOLMODE_REPEAT = 3,
24442 MTOOLMODE_CLEF = 4,
24444 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
24447 MTOOLMODE_TUPLET = 5,
24451 MTOOLMODE_STAFFSTYLE = 6
24454 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24455 METATOOL_MODES _mode;
24457 __EDTMetatool _metatool;
24458 EDTTuplet2005 _tupletmetatool;
24462 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24464 virtual EXTAG
Tag()
24468 case MTOOLMODE_EXPRESSION:
24469 return __ot_MetatoolExpression;
24470 case MTOOLMODE_ARTICULATION:
24471 return __ot_MetatoolArticulation;
24472 case MTOOLMODE_REPEAT:
24473 return __ot_MetatoolRepeat;
24474 case MTOOLMODE_CLEF:
24475 return __ot_MetatoolClef;
24476 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
24477 case MTOOLMODE_TUPLET:
24478 return __ot_MetatoolTuplet;
24480 case MTOOLMODE_STAFFSTYLE:
24481 return __ot_MetatoolStaffStyle;
24482 case MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN:
24491 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
24492 case MTOOLMODE_TUPLET:
24493 return sizeof(_tupletmetatool);
24495 case MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN:
24498 return sizeof(__EDTMetatool);
24505 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
24506 case MTOOLMODE_TUPLET:
24507 return (
void*) &_tupletmetatool;
24509 case MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN:
24512 return (
void*) &_metatool;
24524 if (_mode == MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN)
return;
24534 virtual const char*
ClassName() {
return "FCMetatoolAssignment"; }
24537 #ifndef DOXYGEN_SHOULD_IGNORE_THIS
24544 void* _GetMetatool() {
return Allocate(); }
24553 _mode = MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN;
24555 memset(&_metatool, 0,
sizeof(_metatool));
24556 memset(&_tupletmetatool, 0,
sizeof(_tupletmetatool));
24569 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
24576 if (_mode != MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN)
return;
24588 #ifndef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
24617 case MTOOLMODE_EXPRESSION:
24618 case MTOOLMODE_ARTICULATION:
24619 case MTOOLMODE_REPEAT:
24620 case MTOOLMODE_CLEF:
24621 case MTOOLMODE_STAFFSTYLE:
24622 return _metatool.item1;
24634 twobyte GetKeystroke()
const;
24646 if (_mode != MTOOLMODE_EXPRESSION)
return false;
24647 return (_metatool.item2 == 0);
24660 if (!pDef)
return false;
24661 if (_mode != MTOOLMODE_ARTICULATION)
return false;
24676 if (!pDef)
return false;
24677 if (_mode != MTOOLMODE_EXPRESSION)
return false;
24679 _metatool.item2 = 1;
24693 if (!pDef)
return false;
24694 if (_mode != MTOOLMODE_EXPRESSION)
return false;
24696 _metatool.item2 = 0;
24710 if (!pDef)
return false;
24711 if (_mode != MTOOLMODE_REPEAT)
return false;
24726 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
24735 bool AssignTuplet(
FCTuplet* pTuplet);
24748 if (!pStaffStyle)
return false;
24749 if (_mode != MTOOLMODE_STAFFSTYLE)
return false;
24750 _metatool.item1 = pStaffStyle->
GetItemNo();
24762 if (_mode == MTOOLMODE_UNKNOWN)
return false;
24763 if ((keystrokeslot >=
'A' && keystrokeslot <=
'Z') || (keystrokeslot >=
'0' && keystrokeslot <=
'9'))
24775 virtual bool SaveAs(CMPER cmper) {
return false; }
24796 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_LUAFRIENDLY
24801 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_DEBUG
24807 #ifdef PDK_FRAMEWORK_ENTRIES
24808 case MTOOLMODE_TUPLET:
static const char * FFUUID_VIHUELASPAIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8247
Definition: ff_other.h:4203
static const char * FFUUID_OCTAVIN
Definition: ff_other.h:7810
void SetPlaybackPass(twobyte value)
Definition: ff_other.h:13987
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:6845
Definition: ff_other.h:13692
static const char * FFUUID_SLIDEWHISTLE_PERCCLEF
Definition: ff_other.h:8932
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:2343
bool GetShowFretboards() const
Returns true if fretboards should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9441
virtual CMPER GetItemNo() const
Returns the item number. This typically points to items such as a page number, a measure number...
Definition: ff_other.h:305
void SetBreakMMRest(bool state)
Sets the "Break multi-measure rest" setting for a specific measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4396
void SetWordWrap(bool state)
Sets if the text should word wrap automatically.
Definition: ff_other.h:15442
__FCBase * GetItemAt(int index)
Returns the object at the index position. Index is 0-based.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:12797
void GetFretNumberFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Copies the fret number font information to a FCFontInfo object.
Definition: ff_other.h:20806
bool GetFixedSize() const
Returns the "fixed size" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:3159
bool GetIncludeInNumbering() const
Gets the state of the "Include in numbering" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:5010
FCFontInfo * CreateMultiMeasureFontInfo(bool parts)
Creates a FCFontInfo object with the font information about the multimeasure rest measure numbers...
Definition: ff_other.h:6584
The class for a note definition in a percussion layout.
Definition: ff_other.h:23136
FCString * CreateName()
Creates a string object with the category name.
Definition: ff_other.h:12997
static const char * FFUUID_SOUSAPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7932
void SetAltNotationLayer(int value)
Sets the 1-based layer that is used for the alternate notation.
Definition: ff_other.h:10285
void SetUseSymbols(bool value)
Sets if the "Use symbols for rests less than" is used.
Definition: ff_other.h:18448
ECompositeTimeUpper * _GetFirstRecordPtr()
For internal use only.
Definition: ff_other.h:396
const char * GetCString() const
Returns a C-string version of the string.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1159
bool GetBreakMMRest() const
Gets the "Break Multi-measure rest" option from the category definition. For many categories...
Definition: ff_other.h:12931
bool GetTransposeUseClef() const
Returns the "Set to clef" state in the transposition dialog.
Definition: ff_other.h:9337
BARLINE_STYLES
Settings used for FCMeasure::SetBarline(), FCMeasure::SetLeftBarline(), FCMeasure::GetBarline() and F...
Definition: ff_other.h:4185
virtual EXTAG Tag()
The Enigma tag for the derived class.
Definition: ff_other.h:16531
void SetFirstMeasure(eMeas measure)
Sets the first measure to start the system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3615
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_base.h:918
FCMultiStaffInstrument()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:18594
static const char * FFUUID_BASSOON
Definition: ff_other.h:7594
static const char * FFUUID_DONDO
Definition: ff_other.h:8561
bool GetDurationIsPercent() const
Returns the "Values are percentages" for "Duration" playback change.
Definition: ff_other.h:11889
static const char * FFUUID_CHING
Definition: ff_other.h:8841
bool SetFontInfo(int index, FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Sets the font info to a "setfont" tag.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32457
void SetUseSymbolsLessThan(twobyte value)
Sets the number of measures for the "Use symbols for rests less than" option.
Definition: ff_other.h:18459
int GetGroupElementBeatDuration(int groupindex, int subindex)
Returns the beat duration for a group element.
Definition: ff_other.h:1019
void SetGraceNoteIndex(twobyte index)
Sets the grace note index, for when expression are connected to grace notes.
Definition: ff_other.h:16996
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:15752
static const char * FFUUID_KHAENMOUTHORGAN
Definition: ff_other.h:7896
bool GetOverrideStaffList() const
Gets the value for if staff lists are used for this category.
Definition: ff_other.h:12940
virtual bool DeleteData()
Deletes the associated data from Finale's database. Be careful when deleting multiple objects...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:808
bool RemoveTopStaff()
Removes a "Top Staff" from the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23710
static void DebugOutString(const char *pszPrefixText, const char *thestring)
Static method that outputs a line for debugging purposes (C string version). The text appears with th...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:375
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:16297
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:6989
static const char * FFUUID_TSUZUMI
Definition: ff_other.h:8686
int AddGroup(int elementcount)
Adds a group to the end of the top composite time sig.
Definition: ff_other.h:654
static const char * FFUUID_OCARINA
Definition: ff_other.h:7620
Class for document-independent font information.
Definition: ff_base.h:1024
eUniChar32 GetAboveSymbolChar() const
Returns the character for the "above" symbol. On Finale 2012 and above, this supports the Unicode ran...
Definition: ff_other.h:11703
static const char * FFUUID_PELOGPANERUSGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8416
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOCLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7586
The class for a measure number region.
Definition: ff_other.h:5254
Evpu16 CalcWidth()
Calculates and returns the width of the beat chart element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22208
virtual bool DeepSaveAs(CMPER itemno)
Reimplemented method that makes a copy of the text string before resaving.
Definition: ff_other.h:13799
void SetBreakMMRest(bool state)
Sets the flag for if the category should break multimeasure rests.
Definition: ff_other.h:13376
static const char * FFUUID_CHACHABELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8825
static const char * FFUUID_MANDOCELLO
Definition: ff_other.h:8170
Evpu16 GetVerticalOffset1() const
Returns the 1st vertical offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16394
static const char * FFUUID_SHAKERS
Definition: ff_other.h:8765
static const char * FFUUID_JARANAJAROCHO
Definition: ff_other.h:8140
void SetShowScoreStaffNames(bool value)
Sets if score staff names should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9879
void SetTargetMeasure(eMeas measure)
Returns the target measure number. The value is dependent on GetTargetTrigger(), which is set with Se...
Definition: ff_other.h:21386
Definition: ff_other.h:13698
void SetID(twobyte id)
Sets the definition ID for the shape or text expresion.
Definition: ff_other.h:16829
void MergeWithPreviousGroup(int groupindex)
Merges the beat group with the previous beat group, by removing the "start group flag" from the group...
Definition: ff_other.h:692
void SetBottomBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the vertical bottom position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21879
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:374
void SetShowBarlines(bool value)
Sets if barlines should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9860
void SetWidth(twobyte value)
Sets the width of the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18402
static const char * FFUUID_IGIL
Definition: ff_other.h:7435
static const char * FFUUID_VEENA
Definition: ff_other.h:8241
static const char * FFUUID_SUBCONTRABASSTUBA
Definition: ff_other.h:7990
Evpu16 GetHeight() const
Returns the graphic rectangle's height, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:19008
static const char * FFUUID_KHOL
Definition: ff_other.h:8603
void SetResize(twobyte value)
Sets the staff system's resize value (in percent).
Definition: ff_other.h:3700
virtual bool LoadNext()
Overridden version of LoadNext, to work with FCFretInstrumentDefs::LoadAll()
Definition: ff_other.h:23843
static const char * FFUUID_CHENDA
Definition: ff_other.h:8541
static const char * FFUUID_BAGLAMA
Definition: ff_other.h:8054
void SetVerticalOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical adjustment for the mid-clef change.
Definition: ff_other.h:24306
static const char * FFUUID_FLAGEOLET
Definition: ff_other.h:7720
int GetInt() const
Returns the integer value version of the number.
Definition: ff_base.h:3883
bool GetUseShowTextRepeats() const
Returns true if the text repeat display setting should be used for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17556
TEXT_ASSIGNMENT
Constants for how text blocks are displayed.
Definition: ff_other.h:15745
bool GetAlwaysPlaceOutsideStaff() const
Returns the state of the "Always place outside staff" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11932
static const char * FFUUID_ELECTRICBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:8026
Class for a shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14483
Definition: ff_other.h:4200
static const char * FFUUID_MARIMBASINGLESTAFF
Definition: ff_other.h:8347
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18211
void SetMainSymbolChar(eUniChar32 symbol)
Sets the character for the main symbol. On Finale 2012 and above, this supports the Unicode range...
Definition: ff_other.h:12250
static const char * FFUUID_LAUNEDDAS
Definition: ff_other.h:7804
static const char * FFUUID_SANXIAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8212
static const char * FFUUID_ELECTRICGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8014
static const char * FFUUID_CROTALES
Definition: ff_other.h:8335
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:6888
twobyte GetShapeID() const
Return the layout shape ID for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15240
static const char * FFUUID_TUBA
Definition: ff_other.h:7928
void SetLeftMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the left margin value, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3684
static const char * FFUUID_BOLON
Definition: ff_other.h:8068
static const char * FFUUID_BARITONEVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7533
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:2344
bool GetAddToMenu() const
Returns if the staff style definition should be added to the staff style menu, or not...
Definition: ff_other.h:17364
Definition: ff_other.h:4243
virtual bool HasStaffValue()
Overridden version, since this class supports staff returns.
Definition: ff_other.h:16601
bool GetUseSymbols() const
Returns true if the "Use symbols for rests less than" is used.
Definition: ff_other.h:18332
FCCategoryDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:12903
static const char * FFUUID_TIMBALEBELL
Definition: ff_other.h:8954
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:3574
FCStaffStyleDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:17343
bool IsDefaultMiscellaneous()
Returns true if the category is the standard (pre-defined/Finale-created) category "Miscellaneous"...
Definition: ff_other.h:13222
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_DULCIMER_DAAUNISON
Definition: ff_other.h:8303
Simple class for the representation of x, y coordinates.
Definition: ff_base.h:3906
static const char * FFUUID_SNARELINE
Definition: ff_other.h:8503
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:16529
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRABASSOON
Definition: ff_other.h:7596
static const char * FFUUID_ALGAITA
Definition: ff_other.h:7824
static const char * FFUUID_TENORBANJO
Definition: ff_other.h:8020
Definition: ff_other.h:2876
static const char * FFUUID_UKULELE
Definition: ff_other.h:8044
Definition: ff_other.h:2864
void SetVerticalFingeringOffset(Efix32 value)
Sets the vertical offset for fingering numbers, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20897
static const char * FFUUID_TEBYOSHI
Definition: ff_other.h:8942
static const char * FFUUID_WINDCHIMES
Definition: ff_other.h:8701
Evpu16 GetLeftMargin() const
Returns the left margin value, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3813
static const char * FFUUID_BARYTON
Definition: ff_other.h:7405
static const char * FFUUID_OBOEDACACCIA
Definition: ff_other.h:7854
CMPER GetFullNameID()
Returns the text block ID for the full name. Usually not needed, use CreateFullNameString or CreateTr...
Definition: ff_other.h:9664
void SetAbbreviate(bool state)
Sets if the time signature should be abbreviated (to cut and common time).
Definition: ff_timesig.h:124
void GetFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Gets the font info for the text repeat.
Definition: ff_other.h:19605
void SetHorizontalAlignmentPoint(FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_ALIGNMENT value)
Sets the "Horizontal Alignment Point" setting in the shape expression definition. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:14903
void SetFrameEdgeRef(bool state)
Sets if the frame edge of the text block is used as the positioning reference.
Definition: ff_other.h:16205
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddNull()
Adds a Null instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1698
void SetNoPrint(bool state)
Sets the "No Print" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:14812
Definition: ff_other.h:1240
void SetTextFlag(bool state)
Sets the flag that marks if a measure contains any measure-attached text blocks.
Definition: ff_other.h:4427
static const char * FFUUID_ROTOTOMS
Definition: ff_other.h:8499
Definition: ff_other.h:5437
static const char * FFUUID_MURCHANG
Definition: ff_other.h:8468
twobyte GetExecutableShapeID()
Returns the executable shape ID.
Definition: ff_other.h:14624
void SetCategoryID(twobyte ID)
Sets the category ID for the expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14085
void SetMeasurePos(twobyte value)
Sets the measure position (in EDUs) where the clef is placed in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:24288
GRAPHIC_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN GetHorizontalAlignmentRightPage() const
Returns the horizontal alignment for a right-side page graphic.
Definition: ff_other.h:19101
virtual int DataSizeSave()
Returns the data size for the data structure that should be saved or created.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:813
bool GetFlatBeams() const
Returns the "Flat beams" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:9398
void Init_RLineTo(int x, int y)
Creates a st_rlineto shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1615
void SetCompositeBottom(bool value)
Sets the composite "mark" of the bottom part of the time signature.
Definition: ff_timesig.h:114
void SetPlaybackTempo(TimeEdu32 eduduration, int tempo)
Sets the playback tempo style for the expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14137
void SetCompositeTop(bool value)
Sets the composite "mark" of the top part of the time signature.
Definition: ff_timesig.h:111
void SetShape(ENCLOSURESHAPE shape)
Sets the shape for the enclosure.
Definition: ff_other.h:2942
Evpu16 GetVerticalPos() const
Returns the graphic rectangle's bottom position, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:18990
static const char * FFUUID_SAXONETTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7682
void SetVerticalOffset(twobyte value)
Returns the vertical offset adjustment value.
Definition: ff_other.h:7066
void SetResetOnRepeat(bool state)
Sets the "Reset on Repeat" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:20077
bool GetUseShowFretboards() const
Returns true if the fretboard display is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17418
bool GetUseFullName() const
Returns true if the full staff name should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17570
twobyte GetDoubleWholeRestPosition() const
Returns the vertical position for the double whole rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup...
Definition: ff_other.h:9253
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8263
void ClearAll()
Destroys all the objects in the collection and empties the collection.
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:130
void SetAlignment(FLAG_16 alignment)
Sets the default alignment for the staff text.
Definition: ff_other.h:7087
bool GetUseTimeSigForDisplay() const
Returns if the measure should use another time sig for display.
Definition: ff_other.h:4974
void SetRightBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the horizontal right-side position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21888
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:22773
Efix32 GetVerticalFretOffset() const
For tablature notation: returns the vertical offset for fret numbers.
Definition: ff_other.h:9688
void SetUseShowPartStaffNames(bool state)
Sets if staff name display in parts should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17807
Class to encapsulate enclosures (available for example in expressions and measure numbers...
Definition: ff_other.h:2743
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:15753
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddSetFont(FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Adds a SetFont instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:2023
static const char * FFUUID_QUADTOMS
Definition: ff_other.h:8495
void SetTopMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the top page margin as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3436
twobyte GetEndMeasure() const
Returns the end measure for the region.
Definition: ff_region.h:408
GRAPHIC_VERTICAL_ALIGN GetVerticalAlignment() const
Returns the vertical alignment for the graphic.
Definition: ff_other.h:19118
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:20292
static const char * FFUUID_ZHONGHU
Definition: ff_other.h:7479
FCTextRepeat::REPSHOWMODES GetShowMode() const
Returns on which staves the backward repeat should be shown.
Definition: ff_other.h:21761
bool GetUseDefaultClef() const
Returns true if the default clef setting should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17518
bool GetLineSpacingIsPercent() const
Returns if the line spacing value should be percent or points.
Definition: ff_other.h:15357
void SetHorizontalHandleOffset(Efix32 value)
Sets the horizontal handle offset, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20917
bool GetUseNotationStyle() const
Returns true if the notation style should be used for the staff style definition. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:17497
void SetAltShowOtherSmartShapes(bool state)
Sets if smart shapes should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10342
static const char * FFUUID_ZURNA
Definition: ff_other.h:7894
bool GetBackwardRepeat() const
Returns true if the backward repeat should be displayed for the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4844
EXTAG GetCustomTag()
Returns the custom Enigma tag, if any.
Definition: ff_base.h:815
virtual bool SaveAllForItem(CMPER cmper)
Overridden SaveAllForItem method that repacks the composite top time sig according to the cmper...
Definition: ff_other.h:797
twobyte GetCapoPosition() const
For tablature notation: returns the capo position.
Definition: ff_other.h:9670
static const char * FFUUID_VENU
Definition: ff_other.h:7772
static const char * FFUUID_TINAJA
Definition: ff_other.h:8956
void SetVerticalTextPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the vertical position of the repeat text.
Definition: ff_other.h:21458
static const char * FFUUID_ALPHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7950
static const char * FFUUID_BOOMWHACKERS
Definition: ff_other.h:8365
bool InstrumentMatchesUUID(const char *pszUUID)
Returns true if the UUID string matches the instrument UUID for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10832
static const char * FFUUID_DANTYBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8098
void SetRightMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the right system margin value, in EVPUs. This is usually a negative value, since it's the distan...
Definition: ff_other.h:3693
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITARSTEMS
Definition: ff_other.h:8267
bool GetUseFlatBeams() const
Returns true if the flat beams state should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17490
FCFontInfo * CreateMultipleFontInfo(bool parts)
Creates a FCFontInfo object with the font information about the "multiple" measure numbers...
Definition: ff_other.h:6547
static const char * FFUUID_BANJOLELE
Definition: ff_other.h:8060
bool GetKeyless() const
Returns the keyless time signature mode for the measure. Only works on Finale 2014 and above...
Definition: ff_other.h:4754
void SetShowPartTimeSignatures(bool value)
Sets if the time signature should be displayed for the staff in parts. This does nothing on Finale ve...
Definition: ff_other.h:9834
Definition: ff_other.h:19836
TimeEdu32 GetStartMeasurePos() const
Returns the start measure EDU position of the assigned staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18131
bool GetIgnoreKeySig() const
Returns true if "Ignore Key Signature" is set for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9047
static const char * FFUUID_CHINESEGONGS
Definition: ff_other.h:8837
static const char * FFUUID_CASTANETS
Definition: ff_other.h:8739
Class that stores one record of a fretboard chord definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:21082
Definition: ff_other.h:13743
bool IncludesTopStaff()
Returns true if the "Top Staff" is included in the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23602
ALTERNATE_STAFF
Alternate staff notation styles for FCStaff::GetAltNotationStyle() and FCStaff::SetAltNotationStyle()...
Definition: ff_other.h:8995
void SetUseIndependentTimeSig(bool state)
Sets if independent time signatures should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17945
void SetUseStaffResize(bool state)
Sets the flag that marks if any of the staves on the system use individual staff resizing.
Definition: ff_other.h:3737
void SetMeasurePos(TimeEdu32 value)
Sets the expression position in EDUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:16970
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLADAGAMBA
Definition: ff_other.h:7471
twobyte GetRehearsalMarkOffset() const
Returns the rehearsal mark offset.
Definition: ff_other.h:16695
static const char * FFUUID_TEMPLEBLOCKS
Definition: ff_other.h:8769
Evpu16 GetTopBarlineOffset() const
Returns the top barline offset, in EVPUs. This parameter controls how far the barlines extends upward...
Definition: ff_other.h:9718
static const char * FFUUID_KODAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8605
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddStartGroup(FCPoint *pOrigin, FCPoint *pBoundLeftTop, FCPoint *pBoundRightBottom, int xtransform=1000, int ytransform=1000, int rotation=0)
Adds a StartGroup instruction. All instructions in the group will transform according to the group...
Definition: ff_other.h:1749
twobyte GetVerticalEntryOffset() const
Returns the vertical "Additional Entry Offset" in the text expression definition. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:14019
virtual bool LoadFirst()=0
Loads the very first element in the database, if any.
void SetPlaybackController(twobyte controllernumber, twobyte value)
Sets the playback to a specific MIDI CC controller.
Definition: ff_other.h:14124
static const char * FFUUID_KENONGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8789
Definition: ff_other.h:19839
static const char * FFUUID_CLARINETA
Definition: ff_other.h:7582
bool GetUseTransposition() const
Returns true if the transposition settings should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17535
static const char * FFUUID_HANG_TCLEF
Definition: ff_other.h:8386
static const char * FFUUID_REQUINTOGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8200
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddStartObject(FCPoint *pOrigin, FCPoint *pBoundLeftTop, FCPoint *pBoundRightBottom, int xtransform=1000, int ytransform=1000, int rotation=0)
Adds a StartObject instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1722
int GetCount() const
Returns the number of parameter elements in the instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1291
static const char * FFUUID_BONES
Definition: ff_other.h:8817
VERT_ALIGNMENT
The vertical alignment points available to categories and expressions.
Definition: ff_other.h:12799
Definition: ff_other.h:2873
bool GetRepeatBracketFlag() const
Returns true if repeat brackets display for the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4857
bool GetNumberFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Gets the font info for the number font.
Definition: ff_other.h:13115
FLAG_16 GetJustification() const
Returns the default justification for the staff text.
Definition: ff_other.h:7030
static const char * FFUUID_GEHU
Definition: ff_other.h:7427
static const char * FFUUID_GOTTUVADHYAM
Definition: ff_other.h:8120
Class for page-assigned graphics. Currently, this class can only be used to edit existing page graphi...
Definition: ff_other.h:18859
twobyte GetTopRepeatDotPosition() const
Returns the top repeat dot position for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialo...
Definition: ff_other.h:9295
bool SaveWithType(SHAPEDEF_TYPES shapedeftype)
Saves an existing shape definition with the Save() method, but also saves the type of shape with the ...
Definition: ff_other.h:2512
static const char * FFUUID_BASSMARIMBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8345
void Init_CurveTo(int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int endpt_x, int endpt_y)
Creates a st_curveto shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1497
static const char * FFUUID_ZARB
Definition: ff_other.h:8692
fourbyte GetDataCount() const
Returns the number of elements in the data array.
Definition: ff_other.h:2540
static const char * FFUUID_TUBAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7702
bool GetRoundedCorners() const
Returns if rounded corners should be used (on Finale 25.4 and later) for the enclosure.
Definition: ff_other.h:3183
FCFontInfo * CreateStartFontInfo(bool parts)
Creates a FCFontInfo object with the font information about the start measure numbers.
Definition: ff_other.h:6510
Class for attaching an tuplet to an entry.
Definition: ff_entrydetails.h:1647
void SetName(FCString *pString)
Sets the name of the category.
Definition: ff_other.h:13324
int GetHorizontalMargin() const
Returns the horizontal margin (which is half the width value in the enclosure dialog box)...
Definition: ff_other.h:3138
static const char * FFUUID_BENDIR
Definition: ff_other.h:8531
int GetStaffCount() const
Returns the number of staves that are part of the staff list. Top/bottom staff settings are not inclu...
Definition: ff_other.h:23546
static const char * FFUUID_KALAAU
Definition: ff_other.h:8898
A collection of __FCCompositeTimeSigTopElement records.
Definition: ff_other.h:495
static const char * FFUUID_GLASSMARIMBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8378
static void DebugOut(const char *pszLine)
Static method to output a line of text for debugging purposes.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:465
Int100 GetHorizontalStretch() const
Returns the calculated horizontal stretch of the system contents, in 1/100 of a percent.
Definition: ff_other.h:3886
void * _datablock
Pointer to the object's data block, the meaning is implementation-specific for each derived subclass...
Definition: ff_base.h:640
bool GetUseThisFont() const
Returns the "Use This Font" setting. Only active if the '#' should be replaced by the target text...
Definition: ff_other.h:19630
void SetName(FCString *pString)
Sets the style name, by using a FCString object.
Definition: ff_other.h:20826
static const char * FFUUID_BASSTROMBONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7920
void _SetTextBlockID(CMPER textblockid)
Sets the connected block ID for the text. For use with FCTextBlock.
Definition: ff_other.h:15989
bool IsOverlapping(FCMusicRegion *pRegion)
Returns true if the supplied FCMusicRegion object is within staff style region.
Definition: ff_other.h:18192
Definition: ff_other.h:13734
Evpu16 GetFlippedHandleVerticalOffset() const
Gets the vertical offset to handle for the flipped symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:11999
static const char * FFUUID_MANDORE
Definition: ff_other.h:8176
void SetUseShowKeySignatures(bool state)
Sets if "Display Key Sig" should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17688
static const char * FFUUID_KUTIYAPI
Definition: ff_other.h:8162
bool GetShowLyrics() const
Returns true if lyrics should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9344
Definition: ff_other.h:13776
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:23415
bool GetUseIgnoreKeySig() const
Returns true if the "Ignore Key Signature" state should be used for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17605
Class for freezing a system at a specific measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:13506
ECompositeTimeUpper * _GetSecondRecordPtr()
For internal use only.
Definition: ff_other.h:399
static const char * FFUUID_SANGBAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8655
TEXTBLOCKJUSTIFY
Constants for text justification.
Definition: ff_other.h:15175
bool GetTranspose() const
Returns the transposition status of the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10612
static const char * FFUUID_DIHU
Definition: ff_other.h:7417
Definition: ff_other.h:13746
void SetAltNotationDisplayOtherLayerNotes(bool state)
Sets if the non-alternate layers should be displayed or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:10091
void MakeStandard5LineStaff()
Fills the necessary values in the Staff Setup dialog to make a standard 5-line staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10655
static const char * FFUUID_AIRHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:8731
static const char * FFUUID_PORTUGUESEGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8196
virtual eStaff GetStaff() const
Virtual method for returning the staff number.
Definition: ff_other.h:138
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:20588
void SetLeftBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the horizontal left-side position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21897
void SetFullSpan(Evpu16 span)
Sets the full span for the beat chart.
Definition: ff_other.h:22272
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMGANGOKUI
Definition: ff_other.h:8859
twobyte GetTotalPasses() const
Returns the number of passes for the text repeat assignment.
Definition: ff_other.h:20041
void SetUseShowFretboards(bool state)
Sets if fretboard display should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17748
void SetThirdStaff(CMPER value)
Sets the staff number of the third staff in the instrument group.
Definition: ff_other.h:18659
void SetUseShowClefs(bool state)
Sets if the clef should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17718
void SetShowTies(bool state)
Sets if ties should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10085
void SetFlatBeams(bool state)
Sets the "Flat beams" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:10114
int GetVerticalMargin() const
Returns the vertical margin (which is half the height value in the enclosure dialog box)...
Definition: ff_other.h:3149
void SetRepeatBracketFlag(bool state)
Sets if there are repeat brackets displayed for the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4456
static const char * FFUUID_TRIANGLE
Definition: ff_other.h:8711
void SetStaffListID(twobyte list)
Sets the staff list ID to be used.
Definition: ff_other.h:20029
void SetRoundedCorners(bool state)
Sets if the text frame should use rounded corners.
Definition: ff_other.h:15465
void SetIndividualPositioning(bool state)
Returns true if the bracket has individual positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:21813
Definition: ff_other.h:13731
void SetTarget(int value)
Sets the target measure or ID for the text repeat. This value is dependent on the GetTargetTrigger() ...
Definition: ff_other.h:19956
static const char * FFUUID_KANTILGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8414
static const char * FFUUID_SYNTHPAD
Definition: ff_other.h:7504
void SetCenterHorizontally(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Center horizontally" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12423
bool GetShowLastFret() const
Returns if the last fret should be shown when drawing the fretboards, or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:20725
virtual bool LoadFirst()
Overridden version of LoadFirst, to work with FCFretInstrumentDefs::LoadAll()
Definition: ff_other.h:23840
void SetVerticalRightBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the vertical position of the repeat bracket's right side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21440
void SetTargetTrigger(FCTextRepeat::REPTARGETTRIGGERS value)
Set the target trigger for the backward repeat. This method should also be combined with a SetTargetM...
Definition: ff_other.h:21919
static const char * FFUUID_NOSEFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7746
static const char * FFUUID_PERCUSSIONGENERAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8697
void SetClefIndex(twobyte value)
Sets the clef index.
Definition: ff_other.h:24276
Definition: ff_other.h:4209
bool GetFrameReference() const
Returns if the text block should be positioned by the frame layout or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:15346
void SetTopDuration(twobyte value)
Sets the Top Note Value for "Duration" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:12502
bool GetUseShowKeySignatures() const
Returns true if the "Display Key Signature" is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17376
void GetName(FCString *pString)
Copies the style name to a FCString object.
Definition: ff_other.h:20623
twobyte GetStaffListID() const
Returns the staff list ID to be used for the text repeat assignment.
Definition: ff_other.h:21219
static const char * FFUUID_CORNAMUSE
Definition: ff_other.h:7792
CMPER GetTextBlockID() const
Returns the connected block ID for the text. For use with FCTextBlock.
Definition: ff_other.h:15980
void SetTopRepeatDotPosition(twobyte position)
Sets the top repeat dot position for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialog b...
Definition: ff_other.h:10010
static const char * FFUUID_CHINATEMPLEBLOCKS
Definition: ff_other.h:8833
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:35
void SetUseShowStems(bool state)
Sets if stem display should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17817
Class for a multi-measure rest instance.
Definition: ff_other.h:18234
void SetHorizontalAlignment(TEXT_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN alignment)
Sets the horizontal alignment for left-side (or all) pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:16027
twobyte GetLineSpacing() const
Returns the line spacing value for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15318
Class for a category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:12571
void SetGroupElementBeats(int groupindex, int subindex, twobyte value)
Sets the beat number for a group element.
Definition: ff_other.h:769
static const char * FFUUID_TAPHON
Definition: ff_other.h:8673
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:375
void SetLineSpacing(twobyte linespacing)
Sets the line spacing value for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15325
static const char * FFUUID_YANGQIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8255
void SetHorizontalTextPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the horizontal position of the repeat text.
Definition: ff_other.h:21449
void SetID(twobyte catID)
Sets the internal category ID.
Definition: ff_other.h:13394
static const char * FFUUID_BASSHARMONICA
Definition: ff_other.h:7634
bool GetFixedPercent() const
Returns the state of the "Fixed Percent" checkbox in the graphic attributes dialog box...
Definition: ff_other.h:19070
virtual bool DeepDeleteData()
Reimplementation to delete block and raw text as well.
Definition: ff_other.h:16213
static const char * FFUUID_REBEC
Definition: ff_other.h:7457
static const char * FFUUID_DVOJNICEDRONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7718
void SetSpeedyClef(eClef clef)
Sets the clef number to be used in Speedy Edit.
Definition: ff_other.h:23935
void SetVerticalBaselineOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical "Additional Baseline Offset" value in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13405
void GetName(FCString *pString)
Gets the name of the category and copies it to an existing string object.
Definition: ff_other.h:12977
static const char * FFUUID_SLIDETRUMPET
Definition: ff_other.h:7976
TimeEdu32 GetEndMeasurePos() const
Returns the end measure EDU position of the assigned staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18143
void SetBeats(twobyte value)
Sets the number of beats, or the composite top ID.
Definition: ff_timesig.h:95
static const char * FFUUID_AFOXE
Definition: ff_other.h:8799
int AddGroup()
Adds a group to the end of the top composite time sig.
Definition: ff_other.h:1037
void SetCString(const char *pszBuffer, int maxchars=-1)
Sets the string, using a C-string version of the string.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1030
void Init_Bracket(int brackettype)
Creates a bracket shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1624
void SetAltShowArticulations(bool state)
Sets if articulations should be diplayed on the alternate layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10300
bool GetTextFlag() const
Gets the flag that marks if a measure contains any measure-attached text blocks.
Definition: ff_other.h:4833
The base class for FCStaff (and its subclass FCCurrentStaffSpec), as well FCStaffStyleDef.
Definition: ff_other.h:7133
void AppendInteger(int value)
Appends an integer value (decimal) to the string.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1659
FCPageText()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:15769
Evpu16 GetMainHandleVerticalOffset() const
Gets the vertical offset to handle for the main symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:11985
static const char * FFUUID_BOMBO
Definition: ff_other.h:8535
void SetMode(ENCLOSUREMODES enclosuremode)
Set the enclosure sizing option.
Definition: ff_other.h:3059
virtual bool IsIdentical(__FCBase *pTestObject)
Returns true if the shape def instructions are identical.
Definition: ff_other.h:1305
float CalcValue()
Returns the actual value for the tempo. The returned value might be absolute or relative, based on the GetAbsolute return value.
Definition: ff_other.h:22440
bool GetUseIndependentKeySig() const
Returns true if independent key signatures should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17584
void SetShape(bool isshape)
Marks the expression as a shape or a text expression.
Definition: ff_other.h:16928
int GetLineInset() const
Returns the inset between text and border (in EFIXes) for the frame's border.
Definition: ff_other.h:15571
void SetSkipOnIgnore(bool state)
Returns the "Skip ending if ignoring repeats" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:21376
Definition: ff_other.h:1228
static const char * FFUUID_NIGERIANLOGDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8629
static const char * FFUUID_COUNTERTENORVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7547
Class for staff (or staff style) name positioning data.
Definition: ff_other.h:6956
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:3575
static const char * FFUUID_DANBAU
Definition: ff_other.h:8090
bool IncludesBottomStaff()
Returns true if the "Bottom Staff" is included in the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23611
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:21178
static const char * FFUUID_VALIHA
Definition: ff_other.h:8239
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRAALTOFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7648
static const char * FFUUID_FRETLESSBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:8028
void SetShapeEndAdjust(twobyte value)
Sets the right-side adjustment for MM shapes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18425
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:21653
void SetWholeRestPosition(twobyte position)
Sets the vertical position for the whole rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialog b...
Definition: ff_other.h:9951
FCString * CreateTextString()
Gets a pointer to the text string, as a string object.
Definition: ff_other.h:15784
const char * GetInstrumentUUID() const
Returns the assigned instrument UUID for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9734
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:11221
Definition: ff_other.h:4197
static const char * FFUUID_DVOJNICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7716
static const char * FFUUID_OBOE
Definition: ff_other.h:7574
void SetID(eKey newkey)
Sets the key signature ID.
Definition: ff_keysig.h:76
eMeas GetTargetMeasure() const
Returns the target measure number.
Definition: ff_other.h:21234
Collection class for FCTempoElements class objects for one measure. The tempo elements should be stor...
Definition: ff_othercollection.h:1518
Definition: ff_other.h:19802
Efix32 GetVerticalHandleOffset() const
Returns the vertical handle offset, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20687
static const char * FFUUID_CLARINETBFLAT
Definition: ff_other.h:7580
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRALTOVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7545
static const char * FFUUID_GUITJODOUBLENECK
Definition: ff_other.h:8128
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANOGLOCKENSPIEL
Definition: ff_other.h:8339
Evpu16 GetVerticalTopBracketPosition() const
Returns the top vertical position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21252
void SetDurationIsPercent(bool value)
Sets the "Values are percentages" for the "Duration" playback change.
Definition: ff_other.h:12522
FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION GetHorizontalJustification() const
Returns the "Horizontal Justification" setting in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14651
static const char * FFUUID_BIFORA
Definition: ff_other.h:7826
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:21652
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:22675
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRABASSTROMBONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7948
void SetResize(int value)
Sets the resize for the specific staff, in percent. Setting the value to 100 will clear any resize da...
Definition: ff_other.h:6822
Class for an individual note in a percussion map, read from Finale's XML file.
Definition: ff_other.h:22503
Evpu16 GetHeight() const
Returns the fixed height of the frame.
Definition: ff_other.h:15624
static const char * FFUUID_BARITONETC
Definition: ff_other.h:7926
float GetY() const
Returns the y position.
Definition: ff_base.h:3943
twobyte GetMeasure() const
Sets the measure that the separate placement should be matched to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16372
bool IsDefaultExpressiveText()
Returns true if the category is the standard (pre-defined/Finale-created) category "Expressive Text"...
Definition: ff_other.h:13266
bool ContainsMeasure(eMeas measurenumber)
Returns true if the measure number is on the system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3961
void SetBreakWordExtension(bool state)
Sets the "Break Word Extension" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:4609
Class for a page-connected text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15674
twobyte GetNextSysMeasure() const
Returns the start measure for the subsequent system after the system's frozen measures.
Definition: ff_other.h:13582
static const char * FFUUID_GUITAR8VB
Definition: ff_other.h:8008
static const char * FFUUID_HATHELI
Definition: ff_other.h:8880
void SetEndMeasurePosRight()
Sets the the end measure pos to the right-most edge of the staff style assignment's end measure...
Definition: ff_other.h:18186
void SetLeftBarlineShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the left barline shape ID (for use with the FCShapeDef class), for custom left barlines...
Definition: ff_other.h:4690
twobyte GetWidth()
Returns the allotment reference width (int EVPUs).
Definition: ff_other.h:18836
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:21110
static const char * FFUUID_MADAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8611
void SetVerticalFretNumberOffset(Efix32 value)
Sets the vertical text offset for fret number text, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20962
static const char * FFUUID_SARONDEMONGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8424
static const char * FFUUID_DOUBLEFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7714
twobyte GetRawTextID() const
Returns the text ID for the raw text.
Definition: ff_other.h:15218
Definition: ff_other.h:13701
int GetInstructionSize(int index)
Returns how many data blocks an instruction contains. (This is a fixed number based on the instructio...
Definition: ff_other.h:2600
static const char * FFUUID_CHIMES
Definition: ff_other.h:8333
void _SetMemory(EDTPathInst *pPathInstruction, void *pPathData, int offset)
For internal use only.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32067
static const char * FFUUID_VOCALPERCUSSION
Definition: ff_other.h:7563
static const char * FFUUID_GAOHU
Definition: ff_other.h:7425
static const char * FFUUID_GUITARRAQUINTAHUAPANGUERA
Definition: ff_other.h:8122
bool GetOnScreenOnly() const
Returns true if the main symbol should not print.
Definition: ff_other.h:11664
static const char * FFUUID_KAZOO
Definition: ff_other.h:7559
static const char * FFUUID_DANTRANH
Definition: ff_other.h:8096
static const char * FFUUID_HECKELCLARINA
Definition: ff_other.h:7798
eMeas GetEndMeasure() const
Returns the end measure number of the assigned staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18137
void SetUseShowBarlines(bool state)
Sets if the barline display setting should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17917
Definition: ff_other.h:13728
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:22865
Class for a text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15039
twobyte GetHorizontalPos() const
Returns the horizontal position for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15924
static const char * FFUUID_KHLUI
Definition: ff_other.h:7734
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:23414
void SetHideMeasureNumbers(bool value)
Sets if the rehearsal mark text expression hides the measure numbers or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:13890
TEXT_VERTICAL_ALIGN
Vertical alignment constants for text blocks.
Definition: ff_other.h:15731
bool CalcProtected()
Returns true if the shape is marked as "protected" by Finale and shouldn't be deleted. (Is this really correct???)
Definition: ff_other.h:2366
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:6689
twobyte GetPercent() const
Returns the resize percentage of the page.
Definition: ff_other.h:3378
static const char * FFUUID_AJAENG
Definition: ff_other.h:7401
static const char * FFUUID_DILLIKAVAL
Definition: ff_other.h:7710
bool RemoveBottomStaff()
Removes a "Bottom Staff" from the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23721
Evpu16 GetWidth() const
Returns the graphic rectangle's width, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:18999
FCMultiMeasureRest()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:18290
twobyte GetHorizontalOffset() const
Gets the "Additional Horizontal Offset" in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13075
bool GetOpaque() const
Returns the "opaque" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:3169
The class for an articulation definition. On Finale 2012 and above, this class supports the Unicode c...
Definition: ff_other.h:11535
bool GetDrawFingeringWhite() const
Returns if the fingering numbers should be drawn in white.
Definition: ff_other.h:20739
void SetOpaque(bool state)
Sets the "opaque" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:3025
static const char * FFUUID_DIZI
Definition: ff_other.h:7708
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddFillSolid()
Adds a FillSolid instruction, which fills the path.
Definition: ff_other.h:1814
static const char * FFUUID_TAR_PLUCKED
Definition: ff_other.h:8229
static const char * FFUUID_KAVAL
Definition: ff_other.h:7732
bool GetAltRhythmStemsUp() const
Returns if stems should be freezes up in rhythmic notation (for altered layers). This setting is only...
Definition: ff_other.h:9579
bool GetPlay() const
Returns the "Play" state of the layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:22938
static const char * FFUUID_WHAMOLA
Definition: ff_other.h:8251
bool GetAltShowOtherArticulations() const
Returns if articulations should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9554
FCPercussionLayoutNotesLookup()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:22711
bool GetCopyMainSymbol() const
Returns the state of the "Copy the Main Symbol" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11844
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:5513
void SetVerticalBaselineOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical "Additional Baseline Offset" in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14980
static const char * FFUUID_BOUZOUKI
Definition: ff_other.h:8072
bool GetHoldMargins() const
Returns the status of the Hold Margins setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:3392
void SetGroupElementBeatDuration(int groupindex, int subindex, twobyte value)
Sets the beat duration for a group element.
Definition: ff_other.h:1090
static const char * FFUUID_KETUKGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8791
bool SetStringTuning(int stringnumber, twobyte midinumber)
Sets the MIDI number for a specific open string's tuning.
Definition: ff_other.h:24032
static const char * FFUUID_LOWIRISHWHISTLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7628
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOMETALLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8394
static const char * FFUUID_MARIMBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8343
virtual ~FCCompositeTimeSigTop()
The destructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:626
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRILLO
Definition: ff_other.h:7688
bool GetUseBreakBarlines() const
Returns true if the "Break barlines between staves" setting should be used for the staff style defini...
Definition: ff_other.h:17542
bool GetIndependentRightPage() const
Returns true if the right-side page positioning is used.
Definition: ff_other.h:19051
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddDrawCharsString(FCString *pString)
Adds a string as a series of DrawChar instructions from a FCString object. This method supports 16-bi...
Definition: ff_other.h:2077
void SetNutThickness(Efix32 value)
Sets the nut thickness, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20877
Definition: ff_other.h:1252
static const char * FFUUID_SAROD
Definition: ff_other.h:8214
MNJUSTIFICATIONS
The measure number justification values.
Definition: ff_other.h:5500
void SetStaffGroupID(twobyte value)
Sets the "staff group" ID for the staff, which is used for expressions that are one unity in a staff ...
Definition: ff_other.h:16943
static const char * FFUUID_OUD
Definition: ff_other.h:8192
void SetHorizontalOffset2(Evpu16 value)
Sets the 2nd horizontal offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16462
void Clear()
Creates an empty string.
Definition: ff_base.h:1831
int GetGroupCount()
Calculates and returns the number of top time sig groups.
Definition: ff_other.h:979
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:6736
void SetPercussionLibrary(CMPER cmper)
Set the percussion library that's used. This is loaded by the percussion layout, (the FCPercussionLay...
Definition: ff_other.h:6924
static const char * FFUUID_INYAHURA
Definition: ff_other.h:8591
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:23175
static const char * FFUUID_ARRAYMBIRA
Definition: ff_other.h:8436
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:24195
void SetUseIndependentKeySig(bool state)
Sets if independent key signatures should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17938
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_VIHUELA
Definition: ff_other.h:8323
Base class for "other" data with incis of the __FCInciOther class (where it's common to collect all i...
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:606
void SetVerticalPosRightPage(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical position for the text block for right-side pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:16158
bool GetAttackIsPercent() const
Returns the "Values are percentages" state for the "Attack" playback change.
Definition: ff_other.h:11869
FCPercussionMapNote * FindMidiNote(twobyte midinote)
Finds and returns a MIDI note in the collection.
Definition: ff_other.h:22652
static const char * FFUUID_POCKETTRUMPET
Definition: ff_other.h:7972
void SetBelowUsesMain(bool state)
Sets the state of the "When Placed Below a Note, Use the" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12347
void SetVisible(bool state)
Sets the visibility state of the graphic.
Definition: ff_other.h:19193
void SetStaffListID(twobyte list)
Sets the staff list ID to be used.
Definition: ff_other.h:21365
static const char * FFUUID_PIRI
Definition: ff_other.h:7858
void SetFretCount(twobyte count)
Sets the number of frets for the instrument definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:23895
void SetHorizontalPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the position of the beat chart element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22245
static const char * FFUUID_TALKBOX
Definition: ff_other.h:7561
bool GetAllowHorizontalSplit() const
Gets the state of the "Allow Horizontal Split Points" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:4935
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRABASSSECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7395
static const char * FFUUID_HOCCHIKU
Definition: ff_other.h:7726
bool GetUseAbbreviatedName() const
Returns true if the abbreviated staff name should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17577
static const char * FFUUID_KULINTANG
Definition: ff_other.h:8454
void SetShowMeasureNumbers(bool value)
Sets if measure numbers should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9787
void SetStaffListID(twobyte stafflistid)
Sets the staff list ID.
Definition: ff_other.h:21906
static const char * FFUUID_PICCOLOCLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7680
static const char * FFUUID_MUSICALSAW
Definition: ff_other.h:8398
void SetUseShowLyrics(bool state)
Sets if lyrics display should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17758
void SetDoubleWholeRestPosition(twobyte position)
Sets the vertical position for the double whole rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" d...
Definition: ff_other.h:9965
void SetRoundedCornerRadius(Efix32 radius)
Sets the corner radius (in EFIXes) for rounded corners on Finale 25.4 and above.
Definition: ff_other.h:3050
void SetWidth(twobyte width)
Sets the allotment reference width (int EVPUs).
Definition: ff_other.h:18829
Definition: ff_other.h:2895
static const char * FFUUID_MIJWIZ
Definition: ff_other.h:7808
static const char * FFUUID_FLEXATONE_PERC
Definition: ff_other.h:8862
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_SITAR_KHAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8319
static const char * FFUUID_GHATAM
Definition: ff_other.h:8868
void SetTextRepeatFlag(bool state)
Sets the stat that marks if there are text repeats in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4467
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMKPANLOGO3COMBO
Definition: ff_other.h:8575
Evpu16 GetHorizontalOffset1() const
Returns the 1st horizontal offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16383
SHAPEDEF_TYPES GetType() const
Returns the shape definition type.
Definition: ff_other.h:2457
Definition: ff_other.h:1258
void SetSpaceAbove(twobyte space)
Sets the space to the previous system, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3650
static const char * FFUUID_DOBRO
Definition: ff_other.h:8102
void Set16BitFlag(FLAG_16 *flag, FLAG_16 flagbits, bool state)
Sets a 16 bit flag in the data block.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:573
static const char * FFUUID_STRINGENSEMBLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7397
bool AddTopStaff()
Adds a "Top Staff" to the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23681
static const char * FFUUID_TIMPLE
Definition: ff_other.h:8233
void SetBottomMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the bottom margin value, referenced from the staff baseline of the bottom staff, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3674
void SetUseAbbreviatedPosition(bool state)
Sets if the abbreviated name positioning should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17973
static const char * FFUUID_KRINSLITDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8910
static const char * FFUUID_BASSDRUMS_5LINE
Definition: ff_other.h:8505
static const char * FFUUID_KHIM
Definition: ff_other.h:8154
Evpu16 GetHorizontalPos() const
Returns the graphic rectangle's left-side position, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:18981
static const char * FFUUID_HANDBELLS_TCLEF
Definition: ff_other.h:8382
void SetID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the shape ID (of the FCShapeDef class).
Definition: ff_other.h:14769
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddStroke()
Adds a Stroke instruction (which draws a path).
Definition: ff_other.h:1938
Definition: ff_other.h:4261
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_SITAR_SHANKAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8317
void SetAlwaysPlaceOutsideStaff(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Always place outside staff" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12417
void SetStringCount(twobyte count)
Sets the number of strings for the instrument definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:23915
bool IsShapeUsed()
Returns true if a shape is used for the articulation definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:12030
bool GetUseStafflineAdjustments() const
Returns true if the staffline adjustments settings should be used for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17528
TEXT_VERTICAL_ALIGN GetVerticalAlignment() const
Returns the vertical alignment for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15859
The class for an instrument definition item (in the instrument list/Score Manager).
Definition: ff_other.h:22745
void SetUseIgnoreKeySig(bool state)
Sets if the "Ignore Key Signature" state should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17959
twobyte GetStemReversalPosition() const
Returns the stem reversal position offset for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup"...
Definition: ff_other.h:9268
Definition: ff_other.h:1204
static const char * FFUUID_ELECTRICPIANO
Definition: ff_other.h:7500
void SetHorizontalAlignmentPoint(HORIZ_ALIGNMENT value)
Sets the "Horizontal Alignment Point" value in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13465
twobyte GetBarreShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID of the "barre" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20772
twobyte GetID() const
Returns the shape ID (of the FCShapeDef class).
Definition: ff_other.h:14634
ARTPOSITIONING_SIDES
The auto positioning modes for articulations. Used by FCArticulationDef::GetAutoPosSide() and FCArtic...
Definition: ff_other.h:11621
void SetHorizontalAlignmentRightPage(TEXT_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN alignment)
Sets the horizontal alignment for right-side pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:16047
void SetTransposeSimplifyKey(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Simplify Key Sig" in the transposition dialog box.
Definition: ff_other.h:10102
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BASSGUITAR_5
Definition: ff_other.h:8297
bool GetShowBorders() const
Returns if the borders should display for the txt block, or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:15598
FCPercussionLayoutNote()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:23190
Definition: ff_other.h:16293
void SetTopBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the vertical position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21870
void SetLineSpacingIsPercent(bool state)
Sets if the line spacing value should be percent or points.
Definition: ff_other.h:15431
void SetTotalPasses(twobyte passes)
Sets the number of passes for the playback. This is used as value for "Jump on Pass" as well...
Definition: ff_other.h:21823
static const char * FFUUID_ANGKLUNG
Definition: ff_other.h:8434
static const char * FFUUID_UDAKU
Definition: ff_other.h:8690
static const char * FFUUID_DABAKAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8545
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:403
bool AddStaff(twobyte staffnumber)
Adds a staff number to the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23668
void SetUseDefaultClef(bool state)
Sets if the default clef setting should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17872
REHEARSALMARK_STYLES
The rehearsal number mark types available to text expressions.
Definition: ff_other.h:13640
void SetHideKeySigShowAccis(bool state)
Sets the "Hide key signature and show all accidentals" key signature state for the measure...
Definition: ff_other.h:4369
static const char * FFUUID_TIMPANI
Definition: ff_other.h:8327
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20227
twobyte GetFlippedSymbolShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID for the flipped symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:11761
static const char * FFUUID_AHOKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8807
void SetUseShowTies(bool state)
Sets if the display of ties should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17827
static const char * FFUUID_BARITONESAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7606
static const char * FFUUID_CARILLON
Definition: ff_other.h:8369
bool GetPlayback() const
Gets the playback change state bit for the articulation definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:11862
Definition: ff_other.h:5449
void SetUseDisplayEmptyRests(bool state)
Sets if "Display Rests in empty measures" state should be part of the staff style or not...
Definition: ff_other.h:17858
static const char * FFUUID_CHOIRAAHS
Definition: ff_other.h:7551
void SetAutoUpdateTarget(bool state)
Sets the "Auto-update target" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:19968
void SetHorizontalOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the "Additional Horizontal Offset" in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13454
Evpu16 GetMinimumPosition() const
Returns the minimum position for the element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22176
bool SetName(FCString *pString)
Sets the name of the fretted instrument definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:23977
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddDrawChar(eUniChar16 character)
Adds a DrawChar instruction.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32130
void Make1LineShortBarlineStaff()
Fills the necessary values in the Staff Setup dialog to make a 1-line staff with short-length barline...
Definition: ff_other.h:10699
virtual bool HasStaffValue()
Overridden method (returning true) since this class contains a staff value.
Definition: ff_other.h:16364
static const char * FFUUID_CHOAZHOUGUZHENG
Definition: ff_other.h:8082
static const char * FFUUID_BOMBARDE
Definition: ff_other.h:7828
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:957
bool Load(twobyte number)
Loads the text with the indicated text number.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:3865
void SetHideCautionary(bool state)
Sets the "Hide cautionary key/clefs/time sigs" setting for the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4484
FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_ALIGNMENT GetHorizontalAlignmentPoint() const
Returns the "Horizontal Alignment Point" setting in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14681
int GetGroupElementCount(int index)
Returns the number of items in the composite time sig group.
Definition: ff_other.h:708
static const char * FFUUID_SISTRE
Definition: ff_other.h:8928
Evpu16 GetHorizontalPosRightPage() const
Returns the horizontal positioning for right-side pages (if used).
Definition: ff_other.h:19057
static const char * FFUUID_YAZHENG
Definition: ff_other.h:8257
PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID
Constants for the GetClassID method.
Definition: ff_base.h:60
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:14460
static const char * FFUUID_GUANZI
Definition: ff_other.h:7840
int GetLength() const
Returns the length of the string.
Definition: ff_base.h:2344
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:16528
static const char * FFUUID_ARGHUL
Definition: ff_other.h:7784
void SetHorizontalTextOffset(int value)
Sets the horizontal offset for the text (relative to the left frame side).
Definition: ff_other.h:15508
void Init_Slur(int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int endpt_x, int endpt_y)
Creates a st_slur shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1510
Helper class for FCShapeDef.
Definition: ff_other.h:1170
void SetAltShowOtherArticulations(bool state)
Sets if articulations should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:10330
eStaff GetStaff() const
Returns the 1-based staff number for this slot.
Definition: ff_other.h:6801
static const char * FFUUID_PENNYWHISTLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7622
FCFretInstrumentDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:23863
void SetOpenStringShapeID(twobyte value)
Sets the shape ID of the "open string" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:21007
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddSlur(int ctrlpt_height=72)
Adds a standard Slur instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1925
ENCLOSUREMODES
The enclosure sizing options.
Definition: ff_other.h:2892
static const char * FFUUID_DIDGERIDOO
Definition: ff_other.h:7954
virtual eMeas GetMeasure() const
Returns the 1-based measure number that the expression is assigned to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16609
twobyte GetPlaybackTempoDuration()
For tempo expressions, returns the metronome duration (in EDUs) for the defined playback tempo...
Definition: ff_other.h:13963
static const char * FFUUID_THAVIL
Definition: ff_other.h:8680
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:22772
void SetSystemBreak(bool state)
Sets the measure to force a system break.
Definition: ff_other.h:4475
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:13541
void SetShowTimeSignatures(bool value)
Sets if the time signature should be displayed for the staff in both score and parts.
Definition: ff_other.h:9804
bool GetAltNotationDisplayOtherLayerNotes() const
Returns true if notes in the non-alternate layers should be displayed.
Definition: ff_other.h:9375
bool GetDiatonicInfo(FCNumbers *pNumbers)
Fills a number collection with all the defined diatonic steps.
Definition: ff_other.h:24084
Class for text repeat assignments to a measure. The assignment is connected with a FCTextRepeatDef de...
Definition: ff_other.h:19723
static const char * FFUUID_KUBING
Definition: ff_other.h:8452
static const char * FFUUID_DANGAO
Definition: ff_other.h:7415
static const char * FFUUID_BULGARIANTAMBURA
Definition: ff_other.h:8074
static const char * FFUUID_CLAVINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7502
A collection of __FCCompositeTimeSigBottomElement records.
Definition: ff_other.h:830
STAFFNOTATION_STYLE GetNotationStyle() const
Returns the notation style for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9452
void SetVerticalFretOffset(Efix32 value)
For tablature notation: sets the vertical offset for fret numbers.
Definition: ff_other.h:10463
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18523
static const char * FFUUID_GYIL
Definition: ff_other.h:8450
static const char * FFUUID_FIFE
Definition: ff_other.h:7660
Definition: ff_other.h:1243
static const char * FFUUID_CRWTH
Definition: ff_other.h:7411
void SetShowLyrics(bool value)
Sets if lyrics should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10061
void SetUseThisFont(bool state)
Returns the "Use This Font" setting. Only active if the '#' should be replaced by the target text...
Definition: ff_other.h:19640
static const char * FFUUID_STEELDRUMS_BCLEF
Definition: ff_other.h:8404
static const char * FFUUID_BAGPIPES
Definition: ff_other.h:7642
static const char * FFUUID_GUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8006
The class for a backward repeat definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:21623
static const char * FFUUID_VIBRAPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8351
void SetRelativeValue(float value)
Sets the tempo to an actual relative value in percent.
Definition: ff_other.h:22487
static const char * FFUUID_CHIPPLI
Definition: ff_other.h:8843
void SetBelowSymbolChar(eUniChar32 symbol)
Sets the character for the "below" symbol. On Finale 2012 and above, this supports the Unicode range...
Definition: ff_other.h:12235
static const char * FFUUID_CIMBALOM
Definition: ff_other.h:8084
void SetUseEnclosure(bool value)
Sets if the text expression uses an enclosure or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:13910
FCNumber * GetItemAt(int index)
Overridden GetItemAt method.
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:342
Collection class for FCMeasure class objects.
Definition: ff_othercollection.h:189
bool GetHoldMargins() const
Returns the "Hold Margins" flag for the staff system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3866
void SetFlippedSymbolShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the shape ID for the flipped symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:12303
virtual void CloneMemoryFrom(__FCBaseData *pSource)
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:753
static const char * FFUUID_REBAB
Definition: ff_other.h:7455
static const char * FFUUID_PIANONONAME
Definition: ff_other.h:7486
Definition: ff_other.h:1249
static const char * FFUUID_AUTOHARP
Definition: ff_other.h:8040
static const char * FFUUID_TROUBADORHARP
Definition: ff_other.h:8004
static const char * FFUUID_DAMROO
Definition: ff_other.h:8549
Definition: ff_other.h:1210
void SetItemNo(CMPER cmper)
Sets the item number. Use with extreme care! This is mostly intended for situations when creating new...
Definition: ff_other.h:314
bool IsPlaybackTempo() const
Returns true if the expression is defined for tempo playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:14318
twobyte GetPlaybackTempoValue()
For tempo expressions, returns the playback tempo value.
Definition: ff_other.h:13949
int GetMidiNote() const
Returns the midi note value.
Definition: ff_other.h:22589
void SetStaffListID(twobyte ID)
Sets the staff list ID for the expression.
Definition: ff_other.h:16936
void SetAltShowOtherNotes(bool state)
Sets if notes should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10324
static const char * FFUUID_STROHVIOLIN
Definition: ff_other.h:7463
The class for a fretboard style definition, which reflects the content the "Fretboard Style" dialog b...
Definition: ff_other.h:20547
bool GetShowNoteShapes() const
Returns if the staff should display note colors.
Definition: ff_other.h:9201
void SetRawText(twobyte theid, ETAG tag=LO_UTWOBYTE(tx_TextBlock))
Sets the raw text ID and tag for the raw text. This can be used prior to SaveNewRawTextString to set ...
Definition: ff_other.h:15285
Evpu16 GetNextHorizontalPosition() const
Returns the next position in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:22188
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_DULCIMER_DAD
Definition: ff_other.h:8305
static const char * FFUUID_HORNPIPE
Definition: ff_other.h:7678
Evpu32 GetHeight() const
Returns the page height.
Definition: ff_other.h:3335
void SetShowAugmentationDots(bool value)
Sets if augmentation dots should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9898
static const char * FFUUID_SABAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8649
static void DebugOutDigit(const char *pszPrefixText, int i)
Static method that outputs a line for debugging purposes. The text appears with the extra digit (in d...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:274
static const char * FFUUID_DOLLU
Definition: ff_other.h:8559
bool GetUseShowTies() const
Returns true if the display of ties is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17476
void SetFirstPage(ePage page)
Sets the page number for the starting page. If a text block page only should appear on one page...
Definition: ff_other.h:16101
static const char * FFUUID_DATANGULIONDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8553
bool IsSingleStaffAssigned()
Returns true if the expression is assigned to a single staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:16793
twobyte GetVerticalPos() const
Returns the vertical offset position in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:16732
bool GetUseIndependentFont() const
Returns true if the independent notehead font state should be used for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17483
static const char * FFUUID_JINGLEBELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8707
void SetLastPage(ePage page)
Sets the page number for the last page. If a text block page only should appear on one page...
Definition: ff_other.h:16113
void SetAltRhythmStemsUp(bool state)
Sets if stems should be freezes up in rhythmic notation (for altered layers). This setting is only us...
Definition: ff_other.h:10355
FCCompositeTimeSigBottom()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:960
static const char * FFUUID_KNOTWEEDFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7736
SEPARATEPLACEMENT_MODES
Modes for which placement type to load.
Definition: ff_other.h:16281
void SetTargetMeasure(eMeas measure)
Sets the playback destination measure for the backward repeat.
Definition: ff_other.h:21804
twobyte GetShapeEndAdjust() const
Returns the right-side adjustment for multimeasure shapes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18353
bool GetShowScoreTimeSignatures() const
Returns true if the time signature should be displayed for the staff in the score.
Definition: ff_other.h:9103
static const char * FFUUID_BORDONUA
Definition: ff_other.h:8070
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANINOSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7684
FCPage()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:3283
FCLayerPlaybackData(__EDTLayerPlayData *pData)
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:22918
fourbyte GetInstructionsCount() const
Returns the total number of elements in the instructions array.
Definition: ff_other.h:2562
static const char * FFUUID_GIYINGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8412
static const char * FFUUID_BASSBAROTONEVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7549
void SetMeasure(twobyte meas)
Sets the measure that the separate placement should be matched to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16430
static const char * FFUUID_PALENDAG
Definition: ff_other.h:7748
bool GetUseShowBarlines() const
Returns true if the barline display setting should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17563
static const char * FFUUID_MANGBETU
Definition: ff_other.h:8178
__FCStaffBase::ALTERNATE_STAFF GetAltNotationStyle()
Returns the alternate notation style for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9507
static const char * FFUUID_PIPA
Definition: ff_other.h:8194
static const char * FFUUID_WASHTUBBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:8249
int GetFirstPage() const
Returns the start page for the graphics.
Definition: ff_other.h:18963
bool GetShowOnlyFirstMeasureClef() const
For tablature notation: returns if the clef should show only on the first measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:9413
Definition: ff_other.h:16290
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_UKULELE
Definition: ff_other.h:8321
static const char * FFUUID_CLAVICHORD
Definition: ff_other.h:7522
static const char * FFUUID_PICCOLOOBOE
Definition: ff_other.h:7666
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:23023
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:18577
void SetRehearsalMarkStyle(REHEARSALMARK_STYLES value)
Sets the rehearsal mark numbering style.
Definition: ff_other.h:14047
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:11424
static const char * FFUUID_GEMSHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7724
Base class for the "Other" (ot_*) Enigma structures that don't use the inci parameter.
Definition: ff_other.h:212
const char * GetName() const
The name string for the note type. This is usually empty for standard percussion note types...
Definition: ff_other.h:22593
twobyte GetAltNotationLayer() const
Returns the 1-based layer that is used for the alternate notation.
Definition: ff_other.h:9516
virtual bool LoadFirst()
Loads the very first element in the database, if any.
Definition: ff_other.h:21125
static const char * FFUUID_KANTELE
Definition: ff_other.h:8150
void SetBottomMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the bottom page margin, as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3444
Class that stores one "inci" of a staff list (for a system or for the global list of staves)...
Definition: ff_other.h:6706
bool GetUseShowTimeSignatures() const
Returns true if the time signature setting is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17390
The class for raw text objects. All other text classes are based on this class, but it can also be us...
Definition: ff_text.h:16
Class for a text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13603
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_TENORBANJO
Definition: ff_other.h:8283
void SetTopAttack(twobyte value)
Sets the Top Note Value for "Attack" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:12385
int GetItemInci() const
Returns the inci (subrecord) value in the data ID for a loaded record.
Definition: ff_other.h:117
twobyte GetStaffListID() const
(Only works on Finale 2014b and above.) Returns the staff list ID for the category def...
Definition: ff_other.h:12965
static const char * FFUUID_FUJARA
Definition: ff_other.h:7722
Helper class for FCInstrumentPlaybackData, providing the playback data for the Chord Layer...
Definition: ff_other.h:22913
static const char * FFUUID_PIBGORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7812
static const char * FFUUID_TAMBOURINE
Definition: ff_other.h:8709
static const char * FFUUID_KUHLOHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7970
twobyte GetShapeStartAdjust() const
Returns the left-side adjustment for multimeasure shapes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18360
static const char * FFUUID_BRAKEDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8733
FCInstrumentDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:22790
void SetVerticalAlignmentPoint(FCCategoryDef::VERT_ALIGNMENT value)
Sets the vertical alignment point for the expression definition positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:14964
void SetBottomRepeatDotPosition(twobyte position)
Sets the bottom repeat dot position for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialo...
Definition: ff_other.h:10024
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:20201
static const char * FFUUID_BATA
Definition: ff_other.h:8529
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:21135
CMPER GetFirstStaff() const
Returns the staff number of the first staff in the instrument group.
Definition: ff_other.h:18617
int GetLineWidth() const
Returns the line width of the frame's border.
Definition: ff_other.h:15562
void SetTransposeClefIndex(twobyte clefindex)
Sets the clef state in the transposition dialog. This value is valid only of GetTransposeUseClef retu...
Definition: ff_other.h:10388
FCEnclosure()
The construtor.
Definition: ff_other.h:2908
CMPER GetThirdStaff() const
Returns the staff number of the third staff in the instrument group.
Definition: ff_other.h:18629
static const char * FFUUID_BALALAIKA
Definition: ff_other.h:8056
bool GetUseAltNotationStyle() const
Returns true if the alternate notation style should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17626
Definition: ff_other.h:1255
static const char * FFUUID_BASSVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7535
Class that handles separate placement for repeats.
Definition: ff_other.h:16251
Definition: ff_other.h:13707
const EDataID * _GetDataID()
Intended ONLY for the _CloneFrom implementation.
Definition: ff_base.h:793
static const char * FFUUID_FIDDLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7423
static const char * FFUUID_GANDINGAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8864
void SetID(twobyte id)
Use with care! Sets the definition ID for the text repeat.
Definition: ff_other.h:19916
bool IsDefaultRehearsalMarks()
Returns true if the category is the standard (pre-defined/Finale-created) category "Rehearsal Marks"...
Definition: ff_other.h:13288
static const char * FFUUID_KAMANCHA
Definition: ff_other.h:7437
void SetUseShowChords(bool state)
Sets if chords should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17728
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BASSGUITAR_6
Definition: ff_other.h:8299
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:5512
FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION GetHorizontalJustification() const
Returns the "Horizontal Justification" setting in the text expression definition. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:14193
FCEndingRepeat()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:21194
static const char * FFUUID_HARMONIUM
Definition: ff_other.h:7514
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:15025
bool GetFontInfo(int index, FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Gets the font info from a "setfont" tag.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32423
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GAMBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8307
virtual twobyte GetStaff() const
Returns the 1-based staff number that the expression is assigned to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16598
static const char * FFUUID_SAXHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7974
static const char * FFUUID_HORNF
Definition: ff_other.h:7916
static const char * FFUUID_FLUGELHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7912
virtual bool Reload()
Overridden version of Reload(), to support complex (mixed) data types.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4175
void SetVisible(bool visible)
Sets if the text block should be visible or not (in the score/part that's currently in focus - works ...
Definition: ff_other.h:16168
static const char * FFUUID_CONCERTINA
Definition: ff_other.h:7636
float GetX() const
Returns the x position.
Definition: ff_base.h:3937
static const char * FFUUID_TAMBURA
Definition: ff_other.h:8226
void SetHorizontalOffset(int offset)
Sets the horizontal offset.
Definition: ff_other.h:2973
Definition: ff_other.h:13722
bool GetAltShowOtherNotes() const
Returns if notes should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9548
void SetVisible(bool state)
Sets the display state of the expression (relative to the active part).
Definition: ff_other.h:16958
void SetClefAfterBarline(bool state)
Sets if the clef should appear to the right of the barline. Only affects the first clefs in the cell...
Definition: ff_other.h:24331
static const char * FFUUID_CIMBASSO
Definition: ff_other.h:7978
Definition: ff_other.h:19806
static const char * FFUUID_REEDCONTRABASS
Definition: ff_other.h:7864
static const char * FFUUID_BIWA
Definition: ff_other.h:8066
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANINORECORDER
Definition: ff_other.h:7610
void ParseEnigmaFont(const EEnigmaFont *pEnigmaFont)
Transfers the info from a Finale-internal font structure to the FCFontInfo object.
Definition: ff_base.h:1250
static const char * FFUUID_MEZZOSOPRANOVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7543
static const char * FFUUID_TIBETANBELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8480
static const char * FFUUID_BARBAT
Definition: ff_other.h:8062
void SetExpandSingleWord(bool state)
Sets the "expand single word" state, which effects the full justification modes.
Definition: ff_other.h:15452
bool GetHideMeasureNumbers() const
Returns true if the rehearsal mark text expression hides the measure numbers.
Definition: ff_other.h:13880
Class for tablature instruments definitions.
Definition: ff_other.h:23746
static const char * FFUUID_TUMBAK
Definition: ff_other.h:8684
bool GetUseShowStems() const
Returns true if the stem display is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17469
void SetRightMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the right page margin, as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3428
static const char * FFUUID_BEATBOX
Definition: ff_other.h:7557
bool GetUserCreated() const
Returns true if the category was user created.
Definition: ff_other.h:13212
void SetStringThickness(Efix32 value)
Sets the string thickness, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20847
void SetHeight(Evpu16 height)
Sets the fixed height of the frame.
Definition: ff_other.h:15552
static const char * FFUUID_DAIBYOSI
Definition: ff_other.h:8547
void SetJumpIfIgnore(bool state)
Sets the "Jump if ignoring repeats" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:20064
static const char * FFUUID_DESCANTRECORDER
Definition: ff_other.h:7618
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOTROMBONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7944
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:18898
void SetHorizontalRightBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the horizontal position of the repeat bracket's right side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21431
static const char * FFUUID_KAEKEEKE
Definition: ff_other.h:8894
static const char * FFUUID_EKTARA2
Definition: ff_other.h:8118
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:23022
Definition: ff_other.h:13680
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:12781
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20424
FCLayerPlaybackData * GetNoteLayerData(int layernumber)
Returns the MIDI expression playback layer object (of the FCLayerPlaybackData class).
Definition: ff_other.h:23108
static const char * FFUUID_ARABIANFRAMEDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8523
eMeas GetNextSysMeasure() const
Returns the starting measure number for the next system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3764
Evpu16 GetHorizontalLeftBracketPosition() const
Returns the horizontal position of the bracket's left side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21261
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:18089
twobyte GetVerticalBaselineOffset() const
Returns the vertical "Additional Baseline Offset" in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14012
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLINOPICCOLO
Definition: ff_other.h:7473
static const char * FFUUID_TAEPYEONGSO
Definition: ff_other.h:7886
bool IsStaffIncluded(twobyte staffnumber)
Returns true if the staff number is with the region.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:14607
static const char * FFUUID_MELLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7914
FCPercussionMapNotesLookup()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:22678
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:1683
twobyte GetStaffListID() const
Returns the staff list ID for the expression.
Definition: ff_other.h:16680
static const char * FFUUID_TRUMPETD
Definition: ff_other.h:7908
static const char * FFUUID_KOKYU
Definition: ff_other.h:7439
void SetHorizontalPos(twobyte value)
Sets the horizontal position offset, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:16982
static const char * FFUUID_BOTTLEBLOW
Definition: ff_other.h:7662
Efix32 GetFretThickness() const
Returns the fret thickness, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20651
static const char * FFUUID_SPOONS
Definition: ff_other.h:8767
static const char * FFUUID_HAEGEUM
Definition: ff_other.h:7429
CMPER GetSecondStaff() const
Returns the staff number of the second staff in the instrument group.
Definition: ff_other.h:18623
int GetGroupElementCount(int groupindex)
Returns the number of items in the composite time sig group.
Definition: ff_other.h:996
bool GetRotate() const
Returns if the fret should be rotated or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:20733
static const char * FFUUID_COWBELL
Definition: ff_other.h:8747
static const char * FFUUID_CLASSICALGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8012
twobyte GetStaffListID() const
Returns the staff list ID to be used for the text repeat assignment.
Definition: ff_other.h:20022
bool GetFretLetters() const
For tablature notation: returns if fret letters should be used.
Definition: ff_other.h:9422
int GetStaff(int index)
Gets a staff number for a reference index.
Definition: ff_other.h:23567
TEXT_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN
Horizontal alignment constants for text blocks.
Definition: ff_other.h:15717
twobyte GetTransposeClefIndex() const
Returns the clef state in the transposition dialog. This value is valid only of GetTransposeUseClef r...
Definition: ff_other.h:9595
static const char * FFUUID_CHANCHIKI
Definition: ff_other.h:8829
twobyte GetHalfRestPosition() const
Returns the vertical position for the half rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialog...
Definition: ff_other.h:9208
static const char * FFUUID_VIOL
Definition: ff_other.h:7469
REPSHOWMODES
Constants for use with FCTextRepeat::GetShowMode() and FCTextRepeat::SetShowMode().
Definition: ff_other.h:19770
Simple collection class for FCNumber class objects.
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:329
void SetFingeringWhiteout(Efix32 value)
Sets the whiteout for fingering numbers, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20907
void SetVerticalTextOffset(int value)
Sets the vertical offset for the text (relative to the left frame side).
Definition: ff_other.h:15517
void SetClefPercent(twobyte value)
Set the clef resizing, in percent.
Definition: ff_other.h:24294
void SetHorizontalJustification(FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION value)
Sets the "Horizontal Justification" in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14209
void SetOnScreenOnly(bool state)
Sets the flag if the articulation definition should be displayed on the screen only.
Definition: ff_other.h:12149
static const char * FFUUID_AGOGOBLOCK
Definition: ff_other.h:8801
virtual bool DeleteData()
DeleteData() is currently not supported.
Definition: ff_other.h:23516
static const char * FFUUID_HOSHO
Definition: ff_other.h:8882
Definition: ff_other.h:13713
static const char * FFUUID_UNKNOWN
Definition: ff_other.h:7372
void SetHoldMargins(bool state)
Sets the Hold Margins setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:3469
static const char * FFUUID_ALTORECORDER
Definition: ff_other.h:7612
static const char * FFUUID_XAPHOON
Definition: ff_other.h:7694
twobyte GetShapeID()
Returns the shape ID that is connected to the executable shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20220
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITAR_DROPD
Definition: ff_other.h:8275
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:24133
twobyte GetHorizontalOffset() const
Returns the horizontal adjustment for the mid-clef change.
Definition: ff_other.h:24244
bool GetMainSymbolIsShape() const
Returns true if the main symbol is a shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:12014
void SetCapoPosition(twobyte value)
For tablature notation: sets the capo position.
Definition: ff_other.h:10452
ETAG GetTag() const
Returns the instruction tag as a constant.
Definition: ff_other.h:1299
void SetBottomBarlineOffset(Evpu16 distance)
Sets the bottom barline offset, in EVPUs. This parameter controls how far the barlines extends downwa...
Definition: ff_other.h:10486
bool GetShowTuplets() const
For tablature notation: returns if tuplets should show or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:9404
ENCLOSUREMODES GetMode() const
Returns the enclosure sizing option.
Definition: ff_other.h:3211
void SetUseBreakBarlines(bool state)
Sets if the "Break barlines between staves" setting should be part of the staff style or not...
Definition: ff_other.h:17896
void SetShowKeySignatures(bool value)
Sets if the key signature should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9794
void InstructionDebugDump(int instructionindex)
Special "DebugDump" to get the elements within an instruction.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32537
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:19752
static const char * FFUUID_POWWOWDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8643
Definition: ff_other.h:1213
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:13479
void SetSize(twobyte fontsize)
Sets the font size as an integer value.
Definition: ff_base.h:1306
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMKPANLOGO2MEDIUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8573
static const char * FFUUID_GOME
Definition: ff_other.h:8872
static const char * FFUUID_RYUTEKI
Definition: ff_other.h:7752
eUniChar16 GetCharacterAt(int index)
Returns the character at the index position.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1771
twobyte GetSpaceBeforeMusic() const
Gets the extra space before the music, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3771
bool GetAltShowOtherExpressions() const
Returns if expressions should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9572
void SetIndividualPositioning(bool state)
Sets if the repeat bracket has individual staff positioning enabled or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:21395
GRAPHIC_VERTICAL_ALIGN
Vertical alignment constants for graphic.
Definition: ff_other.h:18929
static const char * FFUUID_TELEVI
Definition: ff_other.h:8944
void Make0LineFullBarlineStaff()
Fills the necessary values in the Staff Setup dialog to make a staff without staff lines with full-le...
Definition: ff_other.h:10721
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BANJO_PLECTRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8293
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:616
int GetElementCount()
Returns the number of array elements for all the top time sig digits.
Definition: ff_other.h:757
static const char * FFUUID_DHOLAK
Definition: ff_other.h:8557
void SetShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the shape ID (for use in the FCShapeDef class) for the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18440
static const char * FFUUID_TASHA
Definition: ff_other.h:8678
void SetUseShowMeasureNumbers(bool state)
Sets if measure numbers should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17698
void SetLineWidth(int value)
Sets the line width (in EFIXes) of the frame's border.
Definition: ff_other.h:15488
static const char * FFUUID_TENOROVERTONEFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7768
virtual bool IsIdentical(__FCBase *pObject)
Overridden method to provide comparison of category definitions.
Definition: ff_other.h:12915
Evpu32 GetDistance() const
Returns the distance between this staff and the top staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:6794
twobyte GetFingeredShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID of the "fingered" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20745
void SetAllowVerticalDrag(bool state)
Sets the "Allow Vertical Drag" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:24324
void SetShowBorders(bool state)
Sets if the borders should display for the txt block, or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:15526
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:19490
void SetUnicodeString(const eUniChar16 *pChar, int maxchars=-1)
Sets the string by using a 16-bit Unicode buffer as input parameter.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1087
static const char * FFUUID_SHIVAWHISTLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7760
static const char * FFUUID_BIANZHONG
Definition: ff_other.h:8444
static const char * FFUUID_TEPONAXTLI
Definition: ff_other.h:8946
static const char * FFUUID_PICCOLO
Definition: ff_other.h:7568
bool GetUseShowMeasureNumbers() const
Returns true if the measure number is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17383
void SetAltShowLyrics(bool state)
Sets if lyrics should be diplayed on the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10306
bool GetContainsManualMeasureNumbers() const
Gets the state that marks if the measure contains manually adjusted measure numbers (or not)...
Definition: ff_other.h:4994
void SetScoreAssignment(bool value)
Sets if the expression is assigned to the score.
Definition: ff_other.h:16848
twobyte GetHorizontalPosRightPage() const
Returns the horizontal position for the text block on right-side pages (if used). ...
Definition: ff_other.h:15933
Definition: ff_other.h:13749
static const char * FFUUID_UILLEANNPIPES
Definition: ff_other.h:7644
static const char * FFUUID_DEF
Definition: ff_other.h:8851
FCTimeSignature * GetTimeSignatureForDisplay() const
Returns a pointer to the time signature object. If time signature for display shouldn't be used...
Definition: ff_other.h:5198
static const char * FFUUID_XUN
Definition: ff_other.h:7776
static const char * FFUUID_BAROQUETRUMPET
Definition: ff_other.h:7962
static const char * FFUUID_DULZAINA
Definition: ff_other.h:7836
static const char * FFUUID_TAMTE
Definition: ff_other.h:8667
static const char * FFUUID_BERIMBAU
Definition: ff_other.h:8813
static const char * FFUUID_AGUNGATAMLANG
Definition: ff_other.h:8805
void SetCopyable(bool value)
Sets if the staff style definition should be copyable or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17671
void Init_RMoveTo(int x, int y)
Creates a st_rmoveto shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1488
static const char * FFUUID_MEZZOSOPRANOSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7686
Evpu16 GetVerticalRightBracketPosition() const
Returns the vertical position of the bracket's right side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21288
static const char * FFUUID_CAJON
Definition: ff_other.h:8737
static const char * FFUUID_KOUDI
Definition: ff_other.h:7740
static const char * FFUUID_HNE
Definition: ff_other.h:7844
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:2842
virtual bool DeepDeleteData()
Deletes the data and all related data available in other data structures.
Definition: ff_other.h:285
static const char * FFUUID_BASSCLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7590
static const char * FFUUID_STRINGBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:8030
__FCOther()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:38
bool IsDefaultDynamics()
Returns true if the category is the standard (pre-defined/Finale-created) category "Dynamics"...
Definition: ff_other.h:13233
FCShapeDefInstruction * GetItemAt(int index)
Overridden version of GetItemAt().
Definition: ff_other.h:1689
static const char * FFUUID_SHAMISEN
Definition: ff_other.h:8224
static const char * FFUUID_NGONI
Definition: ff_other.h:8188
bool GetChordFlag() const
Returns true if chords are available anywhere in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:5150
static const char * FFUUID_HANDBELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8380
Definition: ff_other.h:13770
static const char * FFUUID_SHVI
Definition: ff_other.h:7762
static const char * FFUUID_HORNF_WWQUINTET
Definition: ff_other.h:7640
Evpu16 GetReferenceWidth() const
Returns the reference width for the beat chart.
Definition: ff_other.h:22165
void SetUseAltNotationStyle(bool state)
Sets if the alternate notation style should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17980
void SetCopyMainSymbol(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Copy the Main Symbol" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12353
static const char * FFUUID_GLASSHARMONICA
Definition: ff_other.h:8376
bool GetUseDisplayEmptyRests() const
Returns true if "Display Rests in empty measures" state should be used for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17504
static const char * FFUUID_JUG
Definition: ff_other.h:7664
static const char * FFUUID_SNAP
Definition: ff_other.h:8936
FCFretboardStyleDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:20606
twobyte GetBottomRepeatDotPosition() const
Returns the bottom repeat dot position for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" di...
Definition: ff_other.h:9311
static const char * FFUUID_LEIQIN
Definition: ff_other.h:7445
static const char * FFUUID_NAQARA
Definition: ff_other.h:8625
REPTARGETTRIGGERS
The modes used by FCTextRepeat::GetTargetTrigger() and FCTextRepeat::SetTargetTrigger().
Definition: ff_other.h:19792
twobyte GetClefPercent() const
Returns the clef resizing, in percent.
Definition: ff_other.h:24238
void SetVerticalLeftBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the vertical position of the repeat bracket's left side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21422
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITAR_G
Definition: ff_other.h:8277
static const char * FFUUID_LUOGONG
Definition: ff_other.h:8914
bool RebuildInstructions(FCShapeDefInstructions *pCollection)
Rebuilds the shape data from a collection (containing all the instructions for the shape)...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32258
twobyte GetVerticalPos() const
Returns the vertical position for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15942
static const char * FFUUID_CITTERN
Definition: ff_other.h:8086
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITAR_7STRING
Definition: ff_other.h:8279
bool GetCenterHorizontally() const
Returns the state of the "Center horizontally" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11939
bool GetHideKeySigShowAccis() const
Returns the "Hide key signature and show all accidentals" key signature state for the measure...
Definition: ff_other.h:4768
int GetVerticalOffset() const
Returns the vertical offset.
Definition: ff_other.h:3127
The class for one single beat chart element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22059
CMPER CalcTopStaff()
Returns the top staff in the group.
Definition: ff_other.h:18677
void SetCustomTag(EXTAG tag)
Sets the custom Enigma tag, for classes that support multiple Enigma tags.
Definition: ff_base.h:827
twobyte GetHorizontalOffset() const
Returns the "Additional Horizontal Offset" value in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14269
bool GetShowMeasureNumbers() const
Returns true if measure numbers should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9066
Base class for all "Other" (ot_*) Enigma structures.
Definition: ff_other.h:23
Evpu16 GetHorizontalPosition() const
Returns the position in the measure for the element (in EVPUs).
Definition: ff_other.h:22136
Definition: ff_other.h:13716
static const char * FFUUID_SAKARA
Definition: ff_other.h:8651
static const char * FFUUID_BAWU
Definition: ff_other.h:7786
bool GetTransposeChromatic() const
Returns the chromatic transposition status for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9329
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_LUTEITALIAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8309
twobyte GetStartMeasure() const
Returns the start measure of the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18303
twobyte GetPercussionID() const
Returns the percussion map ID for the loaded collection.
Definition: ff_other.h:22620
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:18897
static const char * FFUUID_BASSTUBA
Definition: ff_other.h:7930
static const char * FFUUID_JARANAHUASTECA
Definition: ff_other.h:8138
static const char * FFUUID_SERPENT
Definition: ff_other.h:7988
Efix32 GetPosition() const
Returns the position for a guide, if EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:24372
Efix32 GetHorizontalFingeringOffset() const
Returns the horizontal offset for fingering numbers, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20663
Definition: ff_other.h:19776
static const char * FFUUID_PICCOLOTRUMPETA
Definition: ff_other.h:7936
Class for a shape definition (as in Finale's Shape selection dialog).
Definition: ff_other.h:2109
void SetSmartShapeFlag(bool state)
Set to true if a smart shape runs somewhere through the measure. Use with extreme care! ...
Definition: ff_other.h:4726
The class for a guide in the document.
Definition: ff_other.h:24351
static const char * FFUUID_TOMBAK
Definition: ff_other.h:8682
void SetIndependentFont(bool state)
Sets if a independent notehead font should be used for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9904
static const char * FFUUID_IRISHBOUZOUKI
Definition: ff_other.h:8136
FCEnclosure * GetEnclosureStart(bool parts)
Gets the pointer to the start enclosure object. This object is a part of the measure number region an...
Definition: ff_other.h:6229
void SetVerticalHandleOffset(Efix32 value)
Sets the vertical handle offset, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20927
twobyte GetResize() const
Returns the resize value (in percent) for the system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3839
static const char * FFUUID_AULOCHROME
Definition: ff_other.h:7692
void MakeNormalNotation()
Transforms a staff to "normal" (not TAB and not percussion).
Definition: ff_other.h:10572
__FCCompositeTimeSigBottomElement()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:459
void SetUseAbbreviatedName(bool state)
Sets if the abbreviated staff name should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17931
Definition: ff_other.h:4194
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:16222
Definition: ff_other.h:16287
static const char * FFUUID_GEDUK
Definition: ff_other.h:8581
virtual void DebugDataDump()
Outputs a memory dump of the data block in the object for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_base.h:925
static const char * FFUUID_CRYSTALGLASSES
Definition: ff_other.h:8371
static const char * FFUUID_TROMPETACHINA
Definition: ff_other.h:7890
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANOXYLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8355
static const char * FFUUID_HYOUSHIGI
Definition: ff_other.h:8884
bool DeleteResizeData()
Deletes the staff resize data connected with the system/staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:6833
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOXYLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8357
static const char * FFUUID_CELESTA
Definition: ff_other.h:7494
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddSetDash(int dashlength, int spacebetween)
Adds a SetDash instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1953
TEXT_ASSIGNMENT GetPageAssignment() const
Returns the page assignment (all/odd/even).
Definition: ff_other.h:15889
void SetFirstPage(int pageno)
Sets the start page for the graphics.
Definition: ff_other.h:19131
FCInstrumentPlaybackData()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:23038
static const char * FFUUID_TIMBALES
Definition: ff_other.h:8517
void Init_LineWidth(int linewidth)
Creates a st_linewidth shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1526
static const char * FFUUID_CHAPMANSTICK
Definition: ff_other.h:8076
static const char * FFUUID_KENDANGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8599
void SetHoldMargins(bool state)
Sets the flag for "Hold Margins" for the staff system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3746
bool ExportAsSVGFile(FCString *pFileName, float scaling, const char *pszUnit)
Saves the shape as a SVG (Scalable Vector File) file. An existing file with the same full path will b...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32493
ECompositeTimeLower * _GetFirstRecordPtr()
For internal use only.
Definition: ff_other.h:467
static const char * FFUUID_SLENDROPANERUSGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8428
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BANJO_GMODAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8291
Definition: ff_other.h:1237
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:13540
void SetOverrideStaffList(bool state)
Gets the value for if staff lists are used for this category. Use with care!
Definition: ff_other.h:13385
CMPER GetBarlineShapeID() const
Returns the barline shape ID (for use with the FCShapeDef class), for custom barlines.
Definition: ff_other.h:5078
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddDrawChars(const char *pszString)
Adds a string as a series of DrawChar instructions. This method doesn't support Unicode.
Definition: ff_other.h:2054
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7602
void SetHorizontalOffset(twobyte value)
Returns the horizontal offset adjustment value.
Definition: ff_other.h:7060
static const char * FFUUID_TENORTROMBONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7946
int GetConnectedDurationPos() const
Returns the connected duration position for loaded data.
Definition: ff_other.h:11511
static const char * FFUUID_BANDURA
Definition: ff_other.h:8058
static const char * FFUUID_XYLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8353
void SetScaleWithEntry(bool state)
Sets if the expression should scale to entry.
Definition: ff_other.h:16964
static const char * FFUUID_GEOMUNGO
Definition: ff_other.h:8115
FCStaffStyleAssign()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:18103
int GetCount() const
Returns the number of elements of the collection.
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:86
Class for expression assignments to a measure/staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:16483
void SetFrameReference(bool state)
Sets if the text block should be positioned by the frame layout or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:15420
void SetUseFlatBeams(bool state)
Sets if the flat beams state should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17844
void SetVerticalPos(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical position offset, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:16990
void SetShowMode(FCTextRepeat::REPSHOWMODES mode)
Sets where the backward repeat should be shown.
Definition: ff_other.h:21774
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:22315
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddSolidLineStyle()
A shortcut method to add a SetDash(18, 0) instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1994
Definition: ff_other.h:1207
void SetPageEdgeRef(bool state)
Sets if positioning is referenced from the page edge, or from the margin.
Definition: ff_other.h:19209
static const char * FFUUID_ASHIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8525
void SetMainHandleHorizontalOffset(Evpu16 value)
Sets the horizontal offset to handle for the main symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:12470
void SetPosition(Efix32 value)
Sets the position for a guide, if EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:24380
static const char * FFUUID_TANGKU
Definition: ff_other.h:8671
Definition: ff_other.h:19830
static const char * FFUUID_SARONBARUNGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8422
void SetMeasurePos(TimeEdu32 edupos)
Sets the duration reference position for the element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22219
bool GetBitFlag(FLAG_32 flag, FLAG_32 flagbits) const
Gets a state from flag bits. Returns true if any bit in the mask is set.
Definition: ff_base.h:449
twobyte GetCategoryID() const
Returns the category ID for the expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13927
static const char * FFUUID_KULINTANGAKAYO
Definition: ff_other.h:8456
twobyte GetStaffGroupID() const
Returns the "staff group" ID for the staff, which is used for expressions that are one unity in a sta...
Definition: ff_other.h:16687
Evpu16 GetVerticalLeftBracketPosition() const
Returns the vertical position of the bracket's left side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21270
Definition: ff_other.h:16284
static const char * FFUUID_CORNET
Definition: ff_other.h:7910
Evpu16 GetLeftBracketPosition() const
Returns the horizontal left-side position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21736
void SetVerticalTopBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the top vertical position of the repeat bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21404
FCCategoryDef::VERT_ALIGNMENT GetVerticalAlignmentPoint() const
Returns the vertical alignment point for the expression definition positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:14002
Evpu16 GetSpaceBefore() const
Gets the extra space before the music in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4901
bool GetAvoidStaffLines() const
Returns the state of the "Avoid staff lines" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11925
bool GetScoreAssignment() const
Returns true if the expression is assigned to the score.
Definition: ff_other.h:16657
twobyte GetNameByID()
Gets the internal Enigma font ID. This value is document-specific.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:3297
HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION
The horizontal justification settings for the category.
Definition: ff_other.h:12887
bool GetVisible() const
Returns the display state of the expression (relative to the active part).
Definition: ff_other.h:16702
bool IsDefaultTempoMarks()
Returns true if the category is the standard (pre-defined/Finale-created) category "Tempo Marks"...
Definition: ff_other.h:13244
void SetPlaybackStart(EXPRESSION_PLAYBACK_STARTPOINTS value)
Sets the playback start point for the expression.
Definition: ff_other.h:16886
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18843
static const char * FFUUID_TABLAS
Definition: ff_other.h:8515
TimeEdu32 GetEndMeasurePos() const
Returns the end position of the region within the measure.
Definition: ff_region.h:485
FCString * CreateString()
Creates a string object with the loaded text. If the string doesn't exist (or if it's empty)...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:3949
Definition: ff_other.h:19796
static const char * FFUUID_CELLOSECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7389
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18733
void Init_StartGroup(int xorigin, int yorigin, int left, int top, int right, int bottom, int xtransform=1000, int ytransform=1000, int rotation=0)
Creates a st_startgroup shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1462
FCBeatChartElement()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:22106
FCFontInfo * CreateTextFontInfo()
Creates a FCFontInfo object from the text font.
Definition: ff_other.h:13194
static const char * FFUUID_SHAKUHACHI
Definition: ff_other.h:7754
static const char * FFUUID_HORNEFLAT
Definition: ff_other.h:7942
HORIZ_ALIGNMENT
The horizontal alignment points available to categories and expressions.
Definition: ff_other.h:12837
static const char * FFUUID_BASSMETALLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8396
static const char * FFUUID_DUFF
Definition: ff_other.h:8565
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANOSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7600
void SetString(FCString *pString)
Copies a string.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:2132
bool IsEmbedded()
Returns true if the graphic is embedded in the document.
Definition: ff_other.h:18954
FCKeySignature * GetKeySignature() const
Returns a pointer to the key signature object.
Definition: ff_other.h:5118
static const char * FFUUID_TENORDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8493
static const char * FFUUID_DAHU
Definition: ff_other.h:7413
Definition: ff_other.h:2867
void SetUseShowRests(bool state)
Sets if "Show Rests" should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17778
void SetShowNoteColors(bool state)
Sets if the staff should display note colors.
Definition: ff_other.h:9910
static const char * FFUUID_BANSURI
Definition: ff_other.h:7704
void SetHorizontalOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the horizontal adjustment for the mid-clef change.
Definition: ff_other.h:24300
static const char * FFUUID_SOPILA
Definition: ff_other.h:7876
bool GetUseExecutableShape() const
Returns true if an executable is used for the expression def.
Definition: ff_other.h:14585
Evpu16 GetWidth() const
Returns the fixed width of the frame.
Definition: ff_other.h:15611
Definition: ff_other.h:12896
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:3265
bool GetRedisplayOtherLayerAccidentals() const
Returns the "Redisplay accidentals in other layers within measures" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:9624
bool GetAltShowSmartShapes() const
Returns if smart shapes should be diplayed n the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9536
static const char * FFUUID_JOGIBAJA
Definition: ff_other.h:7846
virtual bool Reload()
Overridden Reload() method to support complex data types.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4115
void SetFretLetters(bool state)
For tablature notation: sets if sets letters should be used.
Definition: ff_other.h:10138
static const char * FFUUID_DARABUKA
Definition: ff_other.h:8551
static const char * FFUUID_GLOCKENSPIEL
Definition: ff_other.h:8337
static const char * FFUUID_BELL_LYRE
Definition: ff_other.h:8363
static const char * FFUUID_MORINKHUUR
Definition: ff_other.h:7449
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:198
static const char * FFUUID_TIBETANSINGINGBOWLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8482
static const char * FFUUID_TSYMBALY
Definition: ff_other.h:8237
static const char * FFUUID_OKEDODAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8635
static const char * FFUUID_BASSFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7650
static const char * FFUUID_BASSTRUMPET
Definition: ff_other.h:7964
CMPER GetAbbreviatedNameID()
Returns the text block ID for the abbreviated name. Usually not needed, use CreateAbbreviatedNameStri...
Definition: ff_other.h:9653
virtual void * Allocate()=0
REPACTIONS
Definition: ff_other.h:19827
static const char * FFUUID_BANJO
Definition: ff_other.h:8018
bool GetDisplayEmptyRests() const
Returns the "Display Rests in empty measures" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:9392
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:23836
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANOMETALLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8392
void SetMuteStringShapeID(twobyte value)
Sets the shape ID of the "mute string" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:21016
twobyte GetEndMeasure() const
Returns the end measure of the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18310
static const char * FFUUID_LARUAN
Definition: ff_other.h:7443
bool IsMeasureIncluded(twobyte measureno)
Returns true if the measure is within the measure number region.
Definition: ff_other.h:6636
void SetHorizontalJustification(HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION value)
Sets the "Horizontal Justification" in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13427
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:15653
The class for a staff system on a page.
Definition: ff_other.h:3548
void AppendFloat(float value)
Appends an floating-point value to the string.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1666
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddCurveToDetails(int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int endpt_x, int endpt_y)
Adds a CurveTo instruction with all parameters set.
Definition: ff_other.h:1910
void SetUseShowNoteColors(bool state)
Sets if note colors should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17987
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddRLineTo(int x, int y)
Adds a RLineTo instruction (=relative line to).
Definition: ff_other.h:1968
static const char * FFUUID_KABOSY
Definition: ff_other.h:8148
static const char * FFUUID_TAIKODRUMS
Definition: ff_other.h:8476
static const char * FFUUID_MANDOBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:8168
twobyte GetVerticalOffset() const
Returns the vertical offset adjustment value.
Definition: ff_other.h:7022
void SetShowScoreTimeSignatures(bool value)
Sets if the time signature should be displayed for the staff in the score.
Definition: ff_other.h:9818
FCFreezeSystem()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:13557
static const char * FFUUID_TRUMPETBFLAT
Definition: ff_other.h:7904
static const char * FFUUID_SARANGIDRONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7461
Evpu32 GetWidth() const
Returns the page width.
Definition: ff_other.h:3327
bool GetResizeVerticalSpace() const
Returns true if the "Resize Vertical Space" option is set.
Definition: ff_other.h:3847
void SetFlippedSymbolChar(eUniChar32 symbol)
Sets the character for the flipped symbol. On Finale 2012 and above, this supports the Unicode range...
Definition: ff_other.h:12316
bool GetBreakTablatureLines() const
For tablature notation: returns if tablature lines should break at fret numbers.
Definition: ff_other.h:9431
void SetPercussionMapID(twobyte mapID)
Set the percussion mapping ID for the virtual instrument.
Definition: ff_other.h:22833
void SetVelocityIsPercent(bool value)
Sets the "Values are percentages" for the "Velocity" playback change.
Definition: ff_other.h:12548
int GetHorizontalTextOffset() const
Returns the horizontal offset for the text (relative to the left frame side).
Definition: ff_other.h:15580
static const char * FFUUID_ACCORDION
Definition: ff_other.h:7496
static const char * FFUUID_MANDOLIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8032
bool GetShowKeySignatures() const
Returns true if the key signature should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9073
bool GetIndependentKeySig() const
Returns true if independent key sigs is set for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9060
FCString * CreateNameString()
Creates a string with the name of the instrument.
Definition: ff_other.h:22801
static const char * FFUUID_NYCKELHARPA
Definition: ff_other.h:7451
void SetWidth(Evpu16 width)
Sets the (relative) measure width.
Definition: ff_other.h:4492
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:18272
EXPRESSION_PLAYBACK_STARTPOINTS GetPlaybackStart() const
Returns the playback start point for the expression.
Definition: ff_other.h:16646
void SetHorizontalAlignmentRightPage(GRAPHIC_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN alignment)
Sets the horizontal alignment for right-side pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:19299
void SetDefaultVerticalPos(Evpu16 value)
Sets the default vertical position for the articulation definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:12448
Definition: ff_other.h:1222
static const char * FFUUID_AGUNG
Definition: ff_other.h:8803
NUMBERINGSTYLE
Numbering styles for measure numbers.
Definition: ff_other.h:5428
void SetStaff(twobyte staffno)
Sets the assigned staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:16918
void Init_SetFont(FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Creates a st_setfont shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1595
void SetShowClefs(bool value)
Sets if clefs should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9846
FLAG_16 GetAlignment() const
Returns the default alignment for the staff text.
Definition: ff_other.h:7038
void SetTopVelocity(twobyte value)
Sets the Top Note Value for "Velocity" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:12528
bool GetIndependentFont() const
Returns if a independent notehead font should be used for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9189
void SetVerticalPos(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical position for the text block. Smaller values go downward, higher values go upward...
Definition: ff_other.h:16148
void SetCopyMainSymbolHorizontally(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Horizontally/Vertically" setting that's used (when GetCopyMainSymbol is set)...
Definition: ff_other.h:12363
void SetShowTextRepeats(bool value)
Sets if endings and text repeats should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9867
static const char * FFUUID_BASSRECORDER
Definition: ff_other.h:7616
bool GetHideCautionary() const
Gets the state of the "Hide cautionary key/clefs/time sigs" setting for the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4877
static const char * FFUUID_SANZA
Definition: ff_other.h:8474
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:197
void SetBreakBarlines(bool state)
Sets the "Break barlines between staves" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:9885
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLINSECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7385
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BANJO_C
Definition: ff_other.h:8285
bool SetDiatonicInfo(FCNumbers *pNumbers)
Sets the diatonic steps info, based on the numbers of a FCNumbers collection.
Definition: ff_other.h:24110
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BANJO_D
Definition: ff_other.h:8287
Efix32 GetVerticalFingeringOffset() const
Returns the vertical offset for fingering numbers, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20669
Evpu16 GetOriginalHeight() const
Returns the original graphic rectangle's height (before stretching), in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:19026
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddRMoveTo(int x, int y)
Adds a RMoveTo instruction (=relative move to).
Definition: ff_other.h:2006
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:23326
Definition: ff_other.h:19816
FCTextRepeat::REPACTIONS GetAction() const
Returns the action type for the backward repeat. This controls what should happen when the text repea...
Definition: ff_other.h:21971
bool GetInitElement() const
Returns true if it's the first (init) element in the chart. The init element defines the full beat ch...
Definition: ff_other.h:22199
static const char * FFUUID_PANPIPES
Definition: ff_other.h:7658
void SetWidth(Evpu16 width)
Sets the width of the beat chart element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22232
static const char * FFUUID_VIELLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7467
bool GetIndividualPositioning() const
Returns if individual positioning on different staves should be allowed or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:19977
static const char * FFUUID_RIQ
Definition: ff_other.h:8924
Class for time signatures.
Definition: ff_timesig.h:25
bool GetShowScoreStaffNames() const
Returns true if score staff names should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9164
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7952
ECompositeTimeLower * _GetThirdRecordPtr()
For internal use only.
Definition: ff_other.h:473
bool GetExpandSingleWord() const
Returns the default "expand single word" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:7044
void SetUseShowTimeSignatures(bool state)
Sets if time signature should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17708
static const char * FFUUID_CLAPPER
Definition: ff_other.h:8743
static const char * FFUUID_KUDUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8607
static const char * FFUUID_KEMPYANGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8787
static const char * FFUUID_ARPEGGIONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7403
void SetExecutableShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the executable shape ID for the expression def.
Definition: ff_other.h:14782
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:17324
void SetRedisplayOtherLayerAccidentals(bool state)
Sets the "Redisplay accidentals in other layers within measures" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:10415
Definition: ff_other.h:2882
static const char * FFUUID_PANCLAPPERS
Definition: ff_other.h:8918
bool GetShowChords() const
Returns true if chords should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9138
static const char * FFUUID_LAMELLAPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8460
static const char * FFUUID_BARITONEBC
Definition: ff_other.h:7924
void SetAvoidStaffLines(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Avoid staff lines" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12429
static const char * FFUUID_INGOMA
Definition: ff_other.h:8589
void SetInstrumentDefID(ePlaybackRoute value)
Set the ID that maps to the FCInstrumentDef class.
Definition: ff_other.h:22958
The class for a text repeat definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:19396
void SetExecutableShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the executable shape ID for the expression def.
Definition: ff_other.h:13859
Definition: ff_other.h:19833
static const char * FFUUID_FANGXIANG
Definition: ff_other.h:8446
static const char * FFUUID_ACOUSTICGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8010
static const char * FFUUID_HARP
Definition: ff_other.h:8002
static const char * FFUUID_SLITDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8934
void SetInsideSlurs(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Inside slurs" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12435
static const char * FFUUID_WHIP
Definition: ff_other.h:8775
Class for staff style assignments to a staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:18060
bool GetShowClefs() const
Returns true if clefs should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9131
static const char * FFUUID_CLARINETEFLAT
Definition: ff_other.h:7584
static const char * FFUUID_NATIVELOGDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8627
static const char * FFUUID_AFRICANLOGDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8519
void GetFretNumberText(FCString *pString)
Copies the fret number text to a FCString object.
Definition: ff_other.h:20697
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:22363
bool SetTextFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Sets the font info for the text font.
Definition: ff_other.h:13130
static const char * FFUUID_BASSGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8024
bool GetAltShowLyrics() const
Returns if lyrics should be diplayed on the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9530
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:20589
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:4268
Definition: ff_other.h:13767
void SetFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Sets the font info for the text repeat.
Definition: ff_other.h:19617
int GetConnectedMeasure() const
Returns the connected measure for loaded data.
Definition: ff_other.h:11517
void SetAbsoluteValue(float value)
Sets the tempo to an actual absolute value.
Definition: ff_other.h:22470
void SetUseFullName(bool state)
Sets if the full staff name should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17924
void SetVerticalEntryOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical "Additional Entry Offset" in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14948
static const char * FFUUID_HIHATCYMBAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8719
static const char * FFUUID_KASHIKLAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8900
static const char * FFUUID_PAKHAVAJ
Definition: ff_other.h:8639
bool GetJumpIfIgnore() const
Returns the "Jump if ignoring repeats" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:20058
twobyte GetUseSymbolsLessThan() const
Returns the number of measures for the "Use symbols for rests less than" option.
Definition: ff_other.h:18343
static const char * FFUUID_TENORVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7531
static const char * FFUUID_DOUNDOUNBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8563
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddCurveTo(int ctrlpt_height=72)
Adds a standard CurveTo instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1878
ETAG GetInstructionTag(int index)
Returns the instruction tag at a certain index in the shape path.
Definition: ff_other.h:2590
static const char * FFUUID_NADASWARAM
Definition: ff_other.h:7852
void SetFixedSize(bool state)
Sets the "fixed size" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:3015
Evpu16 GetFullSpan() const
Returns the full span for the beat chart.
Definition: ff_other.h:22147
const char * GetTagAsString() const
Returns the instruction tag as a human-readable C-type string, such as "startobject", "null", etc.
Definition: ff_other.h:1323
Definition: ff_other.h:5458
Definition: ff_other.h:1216
void SetHorizontalFingeringOffset(Efix32 value)
Sets the horizontal offset for fingering numbers, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20887
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:18808
Class for allotment data (in the Document Options).
Definition: ff_other.h:18752
int GetResize() const
Returns the resize for the specific staff, in percent.
Definition: ff_other.h:6808
Definition: ff_other.h:19773
bool GetWordWrap() const
Returns true if the text should word wrap automatically.
Definition: ff_other.h:15368
static const char * FFUUID_IRISHFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7730
void SetSpaceAfter(Evpu16 space)
Sets the extra space after the music in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4527
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:15186
bool GetExpandVertically() const
Returns if the text block is set to "Expand Vertically" for a standard frame.
Definition: ff_other.h:15647
static const char * FFUUID_BANDONEON
Definition: ff_other.h:7638
bool GetAltShowArticulations() const
Returns if articulations should be diplayed on the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9524
eStaff GetStaff() const
Returns the staff number for a loaded staff style region.
Definition: ff_other.h:18179
static const char * FFUUID_TRES
Definition: ff_other.h:8235
static const char * FFUUID_VIENNAHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7958
twobyte GetVerticalEntryOffset() const
Returns the vertical "Additional Entry Offset" in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13035
bool IsIdenticalRecord(__FCOther *pCompare)
Compares an object to see if both objects point to the same data record.
Definition: ff_other.h:47
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITAR_DADGAD
Definition: ff_other.h:8271
Efix32 GetStringSpacing() const
Returns the string spacing, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20633
Definition: ff_other.h:13758
Utility class to provide a mechanism for loading blob data blocks consisting of more than 1 inci...
Definition: ff_other.h:155
static const char * FFUUID_HULUSI
Definition: ff_other.h:7898
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7529
static const char * FFUUID_RANATTHUMLEK
Definition: ff_other.h:8472
void SetStaff(eStaff staff)
Sets the staff that the separate placement should be matched to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16422
static const char * FFUUID_SHEKERE
Definition: ff_other.h:8926
FCString * CreateRawTextString()
Creates a string object for the connected raw text.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:8792
static const char * FFUUID_BULLROARER
Definition: ff_other.h:8821
void SetTransposeUseClef(bool state)
Sets the "Set to clef" state in the transposition dialog.
Definition: ff_other.h:10047
static const char * FFUUID_SYNTHLEAD
Definition: ff_other.h:7506
static const char * FFUUID_RUAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8202
static const char * FFUUID_LOGDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8513
static const char * FFUUID_CAXIXI
Definition: ff_other.h:8823
virtual bool DeepDeleteData()
Reimplementation to delete raw text as well.
Definition: ff_other.h:15305
SMARTMUSIC_MARKER_TYPES
The different types that can be returned by GetSmartMusicMarkerType.
Definition: ff_other.h:13665
void SetShapeStartAdjust(twobyte value)
Sets the left-side adjustment for MM shapes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18432
static const char * FFUUID_GONG
Definition: ff_other.h:8727
static const char * FFUUID_DOUBLECONTRABASSFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7654
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddLineWidth(int linewidth)
Adds a LineWidth instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1788
bool GetPartAssignment() const
Returns true if the expression is assigned to the parts.
Definition: ff_other.h:16667
static const char * FFUUID_MALLETS
Definition: ff_other.h:8329
static const char * FFUUID_CROMORNE
Definition: ff_other.h:7830
static const char * FFUUID_MARACAS
Definition: ff_other.h:8753
Definition: ff_other.h:13677
static const char * FFUUID_FLEXATONE_PITCHED
Definition: ff_other.h:8374
bool TruncateAt(int newlength)
Truncates the string at the indicated position.
Definition: ff_base.h:2865
static const char * FFUUID_SHEPHERDSPIPE
Definition: ff_other.h:7756
void SetBottomAttack(twobyte value)
Sets the Bottom Note Value for "Attack" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:12395
twobyte GetVerticalBaselineOffset() const
Returns the vertical "Additional Baseline Offset" in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13028
static const char * FFUUID_RATTLE
Definition: ff_other.h:8761
The class that reference a cell (one measure on one staff) in the musical "grid". ...
Definition: ff_cell.h:17
static const char * FFUUID_HAMMEREDDULCIMER
Definition: ff_other.h:8036
Definition: ff_other.h:13773
static const char * FFUUID_CHIMTA
Definition: ff_other.h:8831
static const char * FFUUID_BASICINDIANPERCUSSION
Definition: ff_other.h:8811
void SetWidth(Evpu16 width)
Sets the fixed width of the frame.
Definition: ff_other.h:15539
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:6737
int GetGroupCount()
Calculates and returns the number of top time sig groups.
Definition: ff_other.h:638
Contains a clef change inside a cell. This is an item member in a FCCellClefChanges collection (creat...
Definition: ff_other.h:24169
twobyte GetWholeRestPosition() const
Returns the vertical position for the whole rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialo...
Definition: ff_other.h:9238
static const char * FFUUID_OKAWA
Definition: ff_other.h:8633
bool GetShowTextRepeats() const
Returns true if endings and text repeats should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9152
FCPercussionMapNote * GetItemAt(int index)
Overridden GetItemAt method.
Definition: ff_other.h:22628
Definition: ff_other.h:13764
void SetStemReversalPosition(twobyte position)
Sets the stem reversal position offset for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" di...
Definition: ff_other.h:9979
static const char * FFUUID_VICHITRAVEENA
Definition: ff_other.h:8243
static const char * FFUUID_MOHANVEENA
Definition: ff_other.h:8182
An internal inci holder for composite time signature top elements.
Definition: ff_other.h:345
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:331
static const char * FFUUID_TINWHISTLEBFLAT
Definition: ff_other.h:7630
Efix32 GetVerticalFretNumberOffset() const
Returns the vertical text offset for fret number text, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20713
void SetLastPage(int pageno)
Sets the end page for the graphics.
Definition: ff_other.h:19140
Evpu16 GetHorizontalOffset2() const
Returns the 2nd horizontal offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16404
bool GetAttachToTopNote() const
Returns the state of the "Attach to top note" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11951
void GetFingeringFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Copies the fingering font information to a FCFontInfo object.
Definition: ff_other.h:20792
static const char * FFUUID_SPLASHCYMBAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8723
bool GetUsePositioning() const
Returns if the positioning is activated for the staff (or staff style).
Definition: ff_other.h:7050
twobyte GetFirstPage() const
Returns the page number for the first page.
Definition: ff_other.h:15817
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:12551
void SetVerticalEntryOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical "Additional Entry Offset" in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14176
bool GetUseShowRests() const
Returns true if the "Show Rests" is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17439
void SetSpaceAfterMusic(twobyte space)
Sets the extra space after the music, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3642
void SetShowStems(bool value)
Sets if stems should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10079
static const char * FFUUID_TALKINGDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8661
bool IsSmartMusicMarker() const
Returns true if the text expression's playback style is defined as a SmartMusic marker.
Definition: ff_other.h:14328
bool GetNoPrint() const
Returns the "No Print" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:14604
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:19751
static const char * FFUUID_BASSXYLOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8359
static const char * FFUUID_LIKEMBE
Definition: ff_other.h:8462
static const char * FFUUID_ORGAN
Definition: ff_other.h:7490
Base class for the Finale Framework classes.
Definition: ff_base.h:47
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:6889
CMPER CalcBottomStaff()
Returns the bottom staff in the group.
Definition: ff_other.h:18707
An object that contains one staff list section (out of 4). Before data is loaded/saved, the SetMode() method must be called.
Definition: ff_other.h:23363
static const char * FFUUID_BONGODRUMS
Definition: ff_other.h:8509
static const char * FFUUID_MAROVANY
Definition: ff_other.h:8180
eStaffGroup GetGroupID() const
Returns the staff group ID.
Definition: ff_other.h:18635
static const char * FFUUID_ODAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8631
static const char * FFUUID_GUBAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8874
void SetDisplayEmptyRests(bool state)
Sets the "Display Rests in empty measures" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:10108
virtual bool SaveAll()
Saves all data in the collection.
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:506
twobyte GetVirtualChannel() const
Returns the virtual channel number for the instrument.
Definition: ff_other.h:22817
Helper class for FCShapeDef.
Definition: ff_other.h:1680
static const char * FFUUID_VUVUZELA
Definition: ff_other.h:7998
twobyte GetMainSymbolShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID for the main symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:11744
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddRectangle(int width, int height)
Adds an Rectangle instruction (draws a circle).
Definition: ff_other.h:1857
static const char * FFUUID_SNAREDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8487
TEXT_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN GetHorizontalAlignment() const
Returns the horizontal alignment for the text block on left-side (or all) pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:15844
static const char * FFUUID_TENORCRUMHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7820
twobyte GetHorizontalOffset() const
Returns the "Additional Horizontal Offset" value in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14710
void SetStaffListID(twobyte value)
(Only works on Finale 2014b and above.) Sets the staff list ID for the category def.
Definition: ff_other.h:13181
static const char * FFUUID_THEORBO
Definition: ff_other.h:8231
static const char * FFUUID_BO
Definition: ff_other.h:8815
void SetVerticalAlignment(TEXT_VERTICAL_ALIGN alignment)
Sets the vertical alignment for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:16064
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITAR_D
Definition: ff_other.h:8269
void SetFixedPercent(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Fixed Percent" checkbox in the graphic attributes dialog box.
Definition: ff_other.h:19252
int GetItemCmper() const
Returns the cmper (main record) value for a loaded record.
Definition: ff_other.h:105
static const char * FFUUID_TAMA
Definition: ff_other.h:8663
bool GetUseShowChords() const
Returns true if the chords is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17404
static const char * FFUUID_NEY
Definition: ff_other.h:7742
twobyte GetDefaultClef() const
Returns the start/default clef.
Definition: ff_other.h:9601
Evpu16 GetTopBracketPosition() const
Returns the vertical top position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21709
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:2841
void SetJustification(FLAG_16 justification)
Sets the default justification for the staff text.
Definition: ff_other.h:7074
static const char * FFUUID_CHIMETREE
Definition: ff_other.h:8703
static const char * FFUUID_CUATRO
Definition: ff_other.h:8088
static const char * FFUUID_BIANQING
Definition: ff_other.h:8442
virtual void Deallocate()
Definition: ff_base.h:670
void SetShowRepeats(bool value)
Sets if repeats should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9873
static const char * FFUUID_RHAITA
Definition: ff_other.h:7866
twobyte GetPlaybackPass() const
Definition: ff_other.h:13976
void SetLayerAssignment(twobyte layer)
Sets the layer that the expression is assigned to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16837
SHAPEDEF_TYPES
The shape definition types, to be used with FCShapeDef::SaveNewWithType(), etc.
Definition: ff_other.h:2114
virtual bool LoadNext()
Different approach for loading next for shapes.
Definition: ff_other.h:2393
Class for attaching an articulation definition to an entry.
Definition: ff_entrydetails.h:1450
twobyte GetBottomDuration() const
Returns the Bottom Note Value for "Duration" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:11901
static const char * FFUUID_ORGAN2STAFF
Definition: ff_other.h:7492
virtual bool DeepSaveAs(CMPER itemno)
Saves the data under another item number, but also makes a deep copy of the object.
Definition: ff_other.h:274
Definition: ff_other.h:19779
An internal inci holder for composite time signature bottom elements.
Definition: ff_other.h:416
static const char * FFUUID_XALAM
Definition: ff_other.h:8253
twobyte GetStyleID() const
Returns the staff style ID, for use with the FCStaffStyleDef class. Please note that the style ID is ...
Definition: ff_other.h:18118
FCArticulationDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:11650
static const char * FFUUID_TARKA
Definition: ff_other.h:7766
static const char * FFUUID_CYMBALS
Definition: ff_other.h:8713
static const char * FFUUID_FONTOMFROM
Definition: ff_other.h:8579
static const char * FFUUID_BALAPHON
Definition: ff_other.h:8440
The class for a measure (the full vertical measure stack) in the document. It maps the Measure Attrib...
Definition: ff_other.h:4052
static const char * FFUUID_BABENDIL
Definition: ff_other.h:8809
static const char * FFUUID_LYRE
Definition: ff_other.h:8166
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:23500
Evpu16 GetRightMargin() const
Returns the right page margin as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3351
void SetAboveSymbolChar(eUniChar32 symbol)
Sets the character for the "above" symbol. On Finale 2012 and above, this supports the Unicode range...
Definition: ff_other.h:12221
static const char * FFUUID_TIBETANCYMBALS
Definition: ff_other.h:8950
static const char * FFUUID_GUITJO
Definition: ff_other.h:8126
void Init_FillSolid()
Inits a FillSolid instruction, which fills the path.
Definition: ff_other.h:1544
void _SetRawTextID(twobyte therawtextid)
Sets the text ID for the raw text.
Definition: ff_other.h:15223
bool GetIndividualPositioning() const
Returns true if the bracket has individual positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:21690
bool UsesTextFont()
Returns true if the category uses the text font settings.
Definition: ff_other.h:13304
static const char * FFUUID_MANJEERA
Definition: ff_other.h:8916
static const char * FFUUID_AGOGOBELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8729
Evpu16 GetBottomBracketPosition() const
Returns the vertical bottom position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21718
bool SetMusicFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Sets the font info for the music font.
Definition: ff_other.h:13147
Definition: ff_other.h:13683
static const char * FFUUID_CLAVES
Definition: ff_other.h:8745
static const char * FFUUID_ENGLISHHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7578
bool IsMeasureIncluded(int measure)
Returns true if the measure number is included in the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18493
void SetUseBreakRepeatBarlines(bool state)
Sets if the "Break repeat barlines between staves" setting should be part of the staff style or not...
Definition: ff_other.h:17903
bool SetNumberFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Sets the font info for the number font.
Definition: ff_other.h:13164
void SetLineSpacing(Efix32 distance)
Sets the distance between the staff lines, in EFIXs.
Definition: ff_other.h:10254
Definition: ff_other.h:19813
void SetNumberHorizontalAdjust(twobyte value)
Sets the horizontal adjustment value for the multimeasure rest number.
Definition: ff_other.h:18481
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:446
twobyte GetVerticalEntryOffset() const
Returns the vertical "Additional Entry Offset" in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14720
static const char * FFUUID_JAWHARP
Definition: ff_other.h:8388
twobyte _GetInci()
Returns the inci for the fretboard (which indicates the alternate version of a fretboard).
Definition: ff_other.h:21132
eMeas GetStartMeasure() const
Returns the start measure number of the assigned staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18125
Efix32 GetRoundedCornerRadius() const
Returns the rounded corner radius, to use when rounded corners are enabled for the text block frame...
Definition: ff_other.h:15406
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:21179
void SetVerticalPosRightPage(Evpu16 value)
Sets the vertical position for right-side pages (if used).
Definition: ff_other.h:19242
Definition: ff_other.h:2879
void SetVerticalAlignment(GRAPHIC_VERTICAL_ALIGN alignment)
Sets the vertical alignment for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:19332
Definition: ff_other.h:13686
void SetStringSpacing(Efix32 value)
Sets the string spacing, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20837
bool GetFrameEdgeRef() const
Returns if the frame edge is used as the positioning reference or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:15912
static const char * FFUUID_EKTARA1
Definition: ff_other.h:8111
Definition: ff_other.h:2870
void SetVerticalAlignmentPoint(VERT_ALIGNMENT value)
Sets the vertical alignment point for the category definition positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:13353
void SetUseStafflineAdjustments(bool state)
Sets if the staffline adjustments settings should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17882
Collection class for FCSystemStaff class objects, which contains the list of staves available within ...
Definition: ff_othercollection.h:511
twobyte GetID() const
Returns the definition ID for the shape or text expresion.
Definition: ff_other.h:16812
bool GetFlippedSymbolIsShape() const
Returns true if the flipped symbol is a shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:12023
static const char * FFUUID_SAMPHO
Definition: ff_other.h:8653
bool GetExpandHorizontally() const
Returns if the text block is set to "Expand Vertically" for a standard frame.
Definition: ff_other.h:15635
bool IsPercussion()
Returns true if the staff is a percussion staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10583
static const char * FFUUID_AEOLIANHARP
Definition: ff_other.h:8797
static const char * FFUUID_SIPSI
Definition: ff_other.h:7816
bool IsEqualString(FCString *pString)
Returns true if the string is identical with the parameter. (FCString string version.)
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1564
static const char * FFUUID_SHOFAR
Definition: ff_other.h:7996
bool UsesStaffList()
Returns true if the category uses a staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:13298
static const char * FFUUID_BUGLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7938
Class that stores the information for drum mapping, either for a staff or staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:6860
Definition: ff_other.h:5443
Efix32 GetLineSpacing() const
Returns the distance between the staff lines, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:9497
bool GetExpandSingleWord() const
Returns the "expand single word" state, which effects the full justification modes.
Definition: ff_other.h:15378
bool GetBreakMMRest() const
Gets the state of the "Break multi-measure rest" setting for a specific measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4796
bool GetVelocityIsPercent() const
Returns the "Values are percentages" for "Velocity" playback change.
Definition: ff_other.h:11907
void SetBackwardRepeat(bool state)
Sets if a backward repeat should be displayed for the measure or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:4442
static const char * FFUUID_DANNGUYET
Definition: ff_other.h:8092
static const char * FFUUID_RAINSTICK
Definition: ff_other.h:8757
Evpu16 GetVerticalPosRightPage() const
Returns the vertical positioning for right-side pages (if used).
Definition: ff_other.h:19063
int _loadedsize
Loaded size of the data block for a loaded object, in bytes. Since the datablock is implementation-sp...
Definition: ff_base.h:653
static const char * FFUUID_DOUBLEBELLEUPHONIUM
Definition: ff_other.h:7980
void SetBreakMMRest(bool state)
Sets the "Break Multi-measure rest" option in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14074
static const char * FFUUID_GUQIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8130
static const char * FFUUID_DUXIANQIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8108
twobyte GetExecutableShapeID() const
Returns the executable shape ID.
Definition: ff_other.h:13846
void SetUseCategoryPos(bool value)
Sets if the "use category positioning" should be checked or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:14922
static const char * FFUUID_PERCACCESSORIES
Definition: ff_other.h:8699
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:3266
static const char * FFUUID_ZURLA
Definition: ff_other.h:7892
static const char * FFUUID_GRANDSTAFF
Definition: ff_other.h:7370
static const char * FFUUID_KPOKOKPOKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8908
static const char * FFUUID_PEMADEGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8418
static const char * FFUUID_BONANGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8406
static const char * FFUUID_CRETANLYRA
Definition: ff_other.h:7409
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOCRUMHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7782
static const char * FFUUID_CMELODYSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7690
static const char * FFUUID_ADODO
Definition: ff_other.h:8795
Class for a multi-staff instrument defined in the Score Manager.
Definition: ff_other.h:18540
static const char * FFUUID_SURNAY
Definition: ff_other.h:7884
bool GetShape() const
Identical to IsShape().
Definition: ff_other.h:16800
bool GetUseIndependentTimeSig() const
Returns true if independent time signatures should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17591
static const char * FFUUID_KOBZA
Definition: ff_other.h:8156
void SetLineInset(int value)
Sets the inset between text and border (in EFIXes) for the frame's border.
Definition: ff_other.h:15498
Evpu16 GetSpaceAfter() const
Gets the extra space after the music in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4917
static const char * FFUUID_DIDDLEYBOW
Definition: ff_other.h:8100
Evpu16 GetHorizontalPos() const
Returns the horiozontal position (in EVPUs) from the measure's origin. The value is depending on the ...
Definition: ff_other.h:19923
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMKPANLOGO1LARGE
Definition: ff_other.h:8571
static const char * FFUUID_OCTOBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:7453
void SetPartAssignment(bool value)
Sets if the expression is assigned to the parts.
Definition: ff_other.h:16857
virtual ~FCCompositeTimeSigBottom()
The destructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:967
twobyte GetPlaybackLayerAssignment() const
Returns the layer that the playback of the expression is assigned to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16630
static const char * FFUUID_ALBOKA
Definition: ff_other.h:7780
The class for a staff in the score. It is also a base class for staff styles.
Definition: ff_other.h:10912
int GetLastPage() const
Returns the start page for the graphics.
Definition: ff_other.h:18972
bool IsAutoRehearsalMark() const
Returns true if an automatic rehearsal number style is used.
Definition: ff_other.h:14362
static const char * FFUUID_KHARTAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8904
void SetPercent(twobyte percent)
Set the resize percentage of the page.
Definition: ff_other.h:3455
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:6937
bool GetShowRepeats() const
Returns true if repeats should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9158
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMSOGO
Definition: ff_other.h:8577
bool GetUseShowNoteColors() const
Returns true if note colors should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17633
Evpu16 GetHorizontalRightBracketPosition() const
Returns the horizontal position of the bracket's right side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21279
void SetDrawFingeringWhite(bool state)
Sets if the fingering numbers should be drawn in white.
Definition: ff_other.h:20992
void _SetCmper(CMPER cmper)
Primarily for internal use.
Definition: ff_other.h:98
static const char * FFUUID_NAGARA
Definition: ff_other.h:8623
bool GetShowPartTimeSignatures() const
Returns true if the time signature should be displayed for the staff in parts.
Definition: ff_other.h:9116
Base class for all data-related classes (that handles Finale data).
Definition: ff_base.h:628
void SetAltNotationStyle(ALTERNATE_STAFF value)
Sets the alternate notation style for the staff or staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:10266
twobyte GetStartNumberingAt() const
Returns the threshold number where mm rests should start to be created.
Definition: ff_other.h:18375
STAFFNOTATION_STYLE
Styles for the FCStaff::GetNotationStyle() and FCStaff::SetNotationStyle() methods. The constants are also used for the similar FCStaffStyleDef methods.
Definition: ff_other.h:8977
twobyte GetTopDuration() const
Returns the Top Note Value for "Duration" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:11895
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:21109
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:1647
HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION GetHorizontalJustification() const
Gets the "Horizontal Justification" in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13050
static const char * FFUUID_KENKENI
Definition: ff_other.h:8601
Evpu16 GetWidth() const
Gets the (relative) measure width.
Definition: ff_other.h:4885
static const char * FFUUID_CLAP
Definition: ff_other.h:8741
static const char * FFUUID_SHAWM
Definition: ff_other.h:7872
virtual bool SaveNew(CMPER itemno)
Creates a new inci record with data.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4206
bool IsStartClef()
Returns true if it's the starting clef in the cell.
Definition: ff_other.h:24337
bool GetSolo() const
Returns the "Solo" state of the layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:22947
bool GetCopyMainSymbolHorizontally() const
Returns the state of the "Horizontally/Vertically" setting that's used (when GetCopyMainSymbol is set...
Definition: ff_other.h:11854
bool IsDefaultTempoAlterations()
Returns true if the category is the standard (pre-defined/Finale-created) category "Tempo Alterations...
Definition: ff_other.h:13255
Definition: ff_other.h:13710
static const char * FFUUID_CHABARA
Definition: ff_other.h:8827
eMeas GetTargetMeasure() const
Sets the playback destination measure for the backward repeat.
Definition: ff_other.h:21681
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:20202
twobyte GetSize() const
Returns the font size as an integer number.
Definition: ff_base.h:1115
static const char * FFUUID_BALAFON
Definition: ff_other.h:8438
static const char * FFUUID_GANDINGANAKAYO
Definition: ff_other.h:8448
static const char * FFUUID_CUICA
Definition: ff_other.h:8749
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:22708
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:11631
Efix32 GetFretSpacing() const
Returns the fret spacing, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20645
virtual bool Save()
Saves the currently loaded to its current location.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:848
static const char * FFUUID_HARPSICHORD
Definition: ff_other.h:7488
void SetAction(FCTextRepeat::REPACTIONS mode)
Sets the action type for the backward repeat. This controls what should happen when the backward repe...
Definition: ff_other.h:21999
static const char * FFUUID_RATTLECOG
Definition: ff_other.h:8922
static const char * FFUUID_STIRDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8940
static const char * FFUUID_GUAN
Definition: ff_other.h:7838
virtual ~FCInstrumentPlaybackData()
The destructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:23046
bool GetUseCategoryPos() const
Returns true if the expression is marked to use the category positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:14694
Collection class for FCPercussionLayoutNote class objects (=a percussion layout). ...
Definition: ff_othercollection.h:1555
static const char * FFUUID_KENBAU
Definition: ff_other.h:7848
static const char * FFUUID_RATCHET
Definition: ff_other.h:8759
static const char * FFUUID_HECKELPHONECLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7800
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:4267
void SetShowFretboards(bool value)
Sets if fretboards should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10054
ECompositeTimeLower * _GetSecondRecordPtr()
For internal use only.
Definition: ff_other.h:470
bool GetTransposeSimplifyKey() const
Returns the state of the "Simplify Key Sig" in the transposition dialog box.
Definition: ff_other.h:9386
int GetLineWidth() const
Returns the line width (in 64ths of an EVPUs).
Definition: ff_other.h:3107
STAFF_HIDEMODES
The different hide modes for FCStaff::GetHideMode() and FCStaff::SetHideMode().
Definition: ff_other.h:9024
static const char * FFUUID_SE
Definition: ff_other.h:8220
static const char * FFUUID_STEELGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8016
static const char * FFUUID_BUFFALODRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8539
Efix32 GetNutThickness() const
Returns the nut thickness, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20657
twobyte GetVerticalOffset() const
Returns the vertical adjustment for the mid-clef change.
Definition: ff_other.h:24250
static void DebugOutBool(const char *pszPrefixText, bool state)
Static method that outputs a line for debugging purposes. The boolean state appears afterwards as eit...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:390
SHOW_STATES
Settings used for FCMeasure::SetShowKeySignature(), FCMeasure::SetShowTimeSignature(), FCMeasure::GetShowKeySignature() and FCMeasure::GetShowKeySignature()
Definition: ff_other.h:4255
void SetFingeredShapeID(twobyte value)
Sets the shape ID of the "fingered" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20998
void SetChordFlag(bool state)
Set to true if chords are available anywhere in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4736
bool GetUseEnclosure() const
Returns true if the text expression uses an enclosure.
Definition: ff_other.h:13900
Definition: ff_other.h:2888
static const char * FFUUID_SETAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8222
static void DebugOutBlock(const void *pBuffer, int startoffset, int size)
Static method that outputs a memory block for debugging purposes. Eight bytes per line will appear (a...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:397
void SetRehearsalMarkOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the rehearsal mark offset.
Definition: ff_other.h:16951
void SetHorizontalLeftBracketPosition(Evpu16 position)
Sets the horizontal position of the repeat bracket's left side.
Definition: ff_other.h:21413
Evpu16 GetDefaultVerticalPos() const
Returns the default vertical position for the articulation definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:11960
void SetMainSymbolIsShape(bool useshape)
Set the main symbol to use shape or a font character.
Definition: ff_other.h:12270
FCTextBlock()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:15199
bool GetShowTies() const
Returns true if ties should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9368
bool GetShowNoteColors() const
Returns if the staff should display note colors.
Definition: ff_other.h:9195
void SetTotalPasses(twobyte totalpasses)
Sets the number of passes for the text repeat assignment.
Definition: ff_other.h:20048
FLAG_16 GetJustification() const
Returns the justification for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15334
static const char * FFUUID_PAHUHULA
Definition: ff_other.h:8637
static const char * FFUUID_TUMPONG
Definition: ff_other.h:7770
static const char * FFUUID_HANG
Definition: ff_other.h:8878
void Init_StartObject(int xorigin, int yorigin, int left, int top, int right, int bottom, int xtransform=1000, int ytransform=1000, int rotation=0)
Creates a st_startobject shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1442
static const char * FFUUID_JANGGU
Definition: ff_other.h:8593
void Init_DrawChar(eUniChar16 character)
Creates a st_drawchar shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1585
int GetElementCount()
Returns the number of array elements for all the bottom time sig digits.
Definition: ff_other.h:1028
static const char * FFUUID_KULINTANGATINIOK
Definition: ff_other.h:8458
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:477
static const char * FFUUID_VIHUELAMEXICO
Definition: ff_other.h:8245
static const char * FFUUID_YUEQIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8259
Definition: ff_other.h:4206
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMATOKE
Definition: ff_other.h:8855
static const char * FFUUID_ZITHER
Definition: ff_other.h:8050
static const char * FFUUID_XIAO
Definition: ff_other.h:7774
static const char * FFUUID_DRUMSET
Definition: ff_other.h:8491
CATEGORY_MODE
Constants used by the FCString::ReplaceCategoryFonts method.
Definition: ff_other.h:12765
FCTextRepeat()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:19849
static const char * FFUUID_PUEBLODRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8645
void SetContainsManualMeasureNumbers(bool state)
Marks the measure that it contains manually adjusted measure numbers (or not).
Definition: ff_other.h:4601
HORIZ_ALIGNMENT GetHorizontalAlignmentPoint() const
Gets the "Horizontal Alignment Point" in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13065
bool GetUseShowAugmentationDots() const
Returns true if the augmentation dot setting is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17411
void SetAltShowOtherExpressions(bool state)
Sets if expressions should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10348
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:445
bool IsShape() const
Returns true if the expression is a shape expression.
Definition: ff_other.h:16784
REHEARSALMARK_STYLES GetRehearsalMarkStyle() const
Returns the rehearsal mark numbering style.
Definition: ff_other.h:14034
void SetHorizontalPos(Evpu32 value)
Sets the horizontal position (in EVPUs) from the measure's origin. The value is depending on the FCTe...
Definition: ff_other.h:19930
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BANJO_DOUBLEC
Definition: ff_other.h:8289
virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno, twobyte inci)
Loads the indicated record within the item number.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4169
virtual bool SaveAll()
Overridden SaveAll method that repacks the composite top time sig.
Definition: ff_other.h:778
void SetNameByID(twobyte id)
Sets the font name by using the document's internal Enigma font ID.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:3330
twobyte GetNumberHorizontalAdjust() const
Returns the horizontal adjustment value for the multimeasure rest number.
Definition: ff_other.h:18382
bool RemoveStaff(twobyte staffnumber)
Removes a staff number from the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23732
static const char * FFUUID_MODERNTAROGATO
Definition: ff_other.h:7818
Simple class to put numbers into collections.
Definition: ff_base.h:3840
FCTextRepeat::REPTARGETTRIGGERS GetTargetTrigger() const
Returns the target trigger for the backwards repeat. This value also affects how the GetTargetMeasure...
Definition: ff_other.h:21842
void SetFlippedHandleVerticalOffset(Evpu16 value)
Sets the vertical offset to handle for the flipped symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:12481
bool GetBelowUsesMain() const
Return the state of the "When Placed Below a Note, Use the" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11837
twobyte GetNumberVerticalAdjust() const
Returns the vertical adjustment value for the multimeasure rest number.
Definition: ff_other.h:18388
static const char * FFUUID_CLARINETTEDAMOUR
Definition: ff_other.h:7790
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:23119
twobyte GetBottomAttack() const
Returns the Bottom Note Value for "Attack" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:11882
void SetShowLastFret(bool state)
Sets if the last fret should be shown when drawing the fretboards, or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:20978
virtual bool LoadFirst()
Loads the first element of 1-based data.
Definition: ff_other.h:328
twobyte GetPercussionMapID() const
Returns the percussion mapping ID for the instrument.
Definition: ff_other.h:22825
void SetMode(STAFFLIST_MODES mode)
Sets the list of data that should be used when reading/saving the record.
Definition: ff_other.h:23447
void SetPageBreak(bool state)
Sets the page break for a specific measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4386
virtual bool LoadNext()
Overridden LoadNext, since the data loading mechanism requires it for LoadAll() to work...
Definition: ff_other.h:14560
bool GetClefAfterBarline() const
Returns true if the clef should appear to the right of the barline. Only affects the first clefs in t...
Definition: ff_other.h:24270
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddBracket(int brackettype)
Adds a Bracket instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1982
bool GetUseShowScoreStaffNames() const
Returns true if the statff name display in the score is active for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17455
void SetUseFullNamePosition(bool state)
Sets if the full name positioning should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17966
void SetSpaceBeforeMusic(twobyte space)
Sets the extra space before the music, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3634
void SetStyleID(twobyte value)
Sets the staff style definition ID for the applied staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18173
void SetUseNotationStyle(bool state)
Sets if the notation style should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17851
void SetUseShowAugmentationDots(bool state)
Sets if augmentation dot setting should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17738
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLA
Definition: ff_other.h:7379
void Init_Stroke()
Creates a st_stroke shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1632
static const char * FFUUID_UCHIWADAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8688
FCShapeDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:2347
bool GetAboveUsesMain() const
Return the state of the "When Placed Above a Note, Use the" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11828
static const char * FFUUID_KESI
Definition: ff_other.h:8902
static const char * FFUUID_TROMBONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7918
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7572
twobyte GetStringTuning(int stringnumber)
Returns the MIDI number for a specific open string's tuning.
Definition: ff_other.h:24004
twobyte GetSpaceAbove() const
Returns the space to the previous system (or the distance from the top page margin), in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3788
void SetDistance(Evpu32 distance)
Sets the distance between this staff and the top staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:6779
twobyte GetOrderID() const
Returns the order ID for the percussion note type.
Definition: ff_other.h:22578
static const char * FFUUID_HANDBELLS_BCLEF
Definition: ff_other.h:8384
bool ContainsStaff(CMPER staffno)
Returns true if the staff is available in the multi-instrument group.
Definition: ff_other.h:18604
void SetNumberVerticalAdjust(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical adjustment value for the multimeasure rest number.
Definition: ff_other.h:18487
static const char * FFUUID_FISCORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7968
void SetAltSlashDots(bool state)
Sets if dots should be added to slashes in compound meters (for altered layers). This setting is only...
Definition: ff_other.h:10362
Evpu16 GetHorizontalTextPosition() const
Returns the horizontal position of the repeat text.
Definition: ff_other.h:21297
static const char * FFUUID_BASSOBOE
Definition: ff_other.h:7672
FCGuide(Efix32 position)
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:24359
static const char * FFUUID_BOUGARABOU
Definition: ff_other.h:8537
virtual TimeEdu32 GetMeasurePos() const
Gets the duration reference position for the element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22398
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BASSGUITAR_4
Definition: ff_other.h:8295
FCTimeSignature * GetTimeSignature() const
Returns a pointer to the time signature object.
Definition: ff_other.h:5166
static const char * FFUUID_SLENTHEMSGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8430
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANORECORDER
Definition: ff_other.h:7608
FCExpression()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:16547
twobyte GetSymbolSpace() const
Gets the space between multimeasure rest symbols for the mm rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18367
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:18576
static const char * FFUUID_SHINOBUE
Definition: ff_other.h:7758
bool SaveNewWithType(SHAPEDEF_TYPES shapedeftype)
Saves a new shape definition the with the SaveNew() method, but also saves the type of shape with the...
Definition: ff_other.h:2477
static void DebugOutHex(const char *pszPrefixText, int i)
Static method that outputs a line for debugging purposes. The text appears with the extra digit (in h...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:343
virtual __FCBaseData * CreateObject()=0
Creates a new instance of the object.
bool GetShowAugmentationDots() const
Returns true if augmentation dots should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9183
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMKAGAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8569
virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno)
Loads the indicated item in a special way, since there's a crash bug when loading empty shapes...
Definition: ff_other.h:2401
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:18042
bool GetVisible() const
Returns true if the text block is visible (in the score/part that's currently in focus).
Definition: ff_other.h:15961
static const char * FFUUID_GENDERGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8410
int GetVerticalTextOffset() const
Returns the vertical offset for the text (relative to the left frame side).
Definition: ff_other.h:15589
static const char * FFUUID_CONGADRUMS
Definition: ff_other.h:8511
static const char * FFUUID_QUINTTOMS
Definition: ff_other.h:8497
static const char * FFUUID_LIRONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7447
void SetFretNumberText(FCString *pString)
Sets the fret number text, using a FCString object.
Definition: ff_other.h:20941
static const char * FFUUID_GAIDAPIPES
Definition: ff_other.h:7646
FCPercussionMapNote * FindRawNoteType(PERC_NOTE_TYPE rawnotetype)
Finds and returns the raw note type in the collection.
Definition: ff_other.h:22636
Evpu16 GetVerticalPos() const
Returns the vertical position (in EVPUs) from the top reference line of the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:19936
static const char * FFUUID_SLIDEWHISTLE
Definition: ff_other.h:8400
static const char * FFUUID_DULCIMER8VB
Definition: ff_other.h:8038
FCPercussionMapNotes(twobyte percussionid)
The constructor. Not supported by Lua.
Definition: ff_other.h:22614
STAFFLIST_MODES
Modes for loading/saving the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23387
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddEllipse(int width, int height)
Adds an Ellipse instruction (draws a circle).
Definition: ff_other.h:1842
void SetBarlineShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the barline shape ID (for use with the FCShapeDef class), for custom barlines.
Definition: ff_other.h:4673
void SetFretInstrumentDefID(CMPER newid)
Sets the ID for the tablature instrument (for tablature notation).
Definition: ff_other.h:10475
bool GetBreakRepeatBarlines() const
Returns the "Break repeat barlines between staves" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:9176
static const char * FFUUID_WINDMACHINE
Definition: ff_other.h:8777
void SetTopMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the top margin value (the distance between the system top and the topmost staff reference line)...
Definition: ff_other.h:3661
Base class for "other" (ot_*) data with incis.
Definition: ff_other.h:59
__FCNoInciOther()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:247
FCTempoElement()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:22380
twobyte GetCustomShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID of the "custom" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20781
twobyte GetLayerAssignment() const
Returns the layer that the expression is assigned to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16617
void SetVerticalOffset(int offset)
Sets the vertical offset.
Definition: ff_other.h:2983
Definition: ff_other.h:19799
static const char * FFUUID_EWEDRUMAXATSE
Definition: ff_other.h:8857
static const char * FFUUID_HANDCYMBAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8876
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:19489
static const char * FFUUID_HUN
Definition: ff_other.h:7728
TEXT_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN GetHorizontalAlignmentRightPage() const
Returns the horizontal alignment for a right-side page text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15875
Definition: ff_other.h:13737
static const char * FFUUID_ATABAQUE
Definition: ff_other.h:8527
bool GetAltShowOtherSmartShapes() const
Returns if smart shapes should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9566
static const char * FFUUID_ZILLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8968
static const char * FFUUID_SALLANEH
Definition: ff_other.h:8206
void _RestoreTempAllMeasures()
For internal use only.
Definition: ff_other.h:6682
static const char * FFUUID_CHROMANOTESINSTRUMENTS
Definition: ff_other.h:8367
void AppendCharacter(eUniChar16 character)
Appends a character to the string.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1617
static const char * FFUUID_DULCIAN
Definition: ff_other.h:7834
void SetHorizontalPosRightPage(twobyte value)
Sets the horizontal position for the text block on right-side pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:16135
void SetShowTopRepeatDot(bool state)
Sets if the top repeat dot should be displayed for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staff S...
Definition: ff_other.h:9990
static const char * FFUUID_KEMPULGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8785
bool GetTextFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Gets the font info for the text font.
Definition: ff_other.h:13087
twobyte GetTopVelocity() const
Returns the Top Note Value for "Velocity" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:11913
static const char * FFUUID_WASHBOARD
Definition: ff_other.h:8773
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:18807
static const char * FFUUID_ALBOGUE
Definition: ff_other.h:7778
static const char * FFUUID_SRALAI
Definition: ff_other.h:7880
static const char * FFUUID_BYZANTINELYRA
Definition: ff_other.h:7407
static const char * FFUUID_TRYCHEL
Definition: ff_other.h:8964
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:15185
EDataID _dataid
The EdataID for the last loaded/saved object.
Definition: ff_base.h:657
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20148
EXPRESSION_PLAYBACK_STARTPOINTS
Constants for GetPlaybackStart() and SetPlaybackStart().
Definition: ff_other.h:16515
static const char * FFUUID_DAWURO
Definition: ff_other.h:8849
static const char * FFUUID_KALIMBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8390
void SetFretThickness(Efix32 value)
Sets the fret thickness, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20867
static const char * FFUUID_DOMRA
Definition: ff_other.h:8104
void SetAltShowExpression(bool state)
Sets if expressions should be diplayed on the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10318
FCCellClefChange()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:24211
Class that provides storage for text. This is to achieve platform-transparent text handling...
Definition: ff_base.h:1473
static const char * FFUUID_RANATEKLEK
Definition: ff_other.h:8470
__FCCompositeTimeSigTopElement()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:388
void SetHorizontalPos(twobyte value)
Sets the horizontal position for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:16125
static const char * FFUUID_SAUNG
Definition: ff_other.h:8216
PERC_NOTE_TYPE GetNoteType() const
Returns the percussion note type.
Definition: ff_other.h:22572
void SetStaff(eStaff staffno)
Sets the 1-based staff number for this slot.
Definition: ff_other.h:6785
static const char * FFUUID_NOHKAN
Definition: ff_other.h:7744
double GetFloatData(int index)
Returns the floating point data contained at the 0-based index position.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32109
FCPercussionLayoutNotes * GetItemAt(int index)
Overridden GetItemAt method.
Definition: ff_other.h:22735
FCPercussionMapNote(int midikey, int notetype, const char *pszName)
The constructor. Not supported by Lua.
Definition: ff_other.h:22552
void SetFretSpacing(Efix32 value)
Sets the fret spacing, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20857
void SetOverrideGroupBarlines(bool state)
Sets the "Override group barlines" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:4625
bool GetShowTimeSignatures() const
Returns true if the time signature should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9087
static const char * FFUUID_POSTHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7956
Encapsulates a note entry from an owner class (for example FCNoteEntryCell, FCNoteEntryLayer) class...
Definition: ff_noteframe.h:808
void SetResizeVerticalSpace(bool value)
Sets the "Resize Vertical Space" option.
Definition: ff_other.h:3725
Definition: ff_other.h:2898
void SetIndividualPositioning(bool state)
Sets if individual positioning on different staves should be allowed..
Definition: ff_other.h:19986
static const char * FFUUID_DAFF
Definition: ff_other.h:8845
bool GetAltShowOtherLyrics() const
Returns if lyrics should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9560
void SetFretCountDefault(int value)
Sets the default number of frets for the style.
Definition: ff_other.h:20972
FCShapeDefInstructions * CreateInstructions()
Creates a collection with all the instructions for the shape.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32183
static const char * FFUUID_ROTHPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7868
bool GetOverrideGroupBarlines() const
Gets the state of the "Override group barlines" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:5018
bool LoadDataBlock()
Loads the data. If the object is of dynamic size, the old memory block is freed and a new is allocate...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:818
twobyte GetGraceNoteIndex() const
Returns the grace note index that the expression is connected to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16738
twobyte GetSpaceAfterMusic() const
Gets the extra space after the music, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3779
Evpu16 GetOriginalWidth() const
Returns the original graphic rectangle's width (before stretching), in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:19017
static const char * FFUUID_KAGUL
Definition: ff_other.h:8896
bool GetUseShowClefs() const
Returns true if the clef is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17397
GRAPHIC_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN
Horizontal alignment constants for graphic.
Definition: ff_other.h:18915
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRALTOCLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7588
static const char * FFUUID_CENGCENGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8781
void SetHorizontalFretNumberOffset(Efix32 value)
Sets the horizontal text offset for fret number text, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20952
void SetShowTuplets(bool state)
For tablature notation: sets if tuplets should show or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:10120
static const char * FFUUID_PENNYWHISTLEG
Definition: ff_other.h:7626
virtual bool SaveAs(CMPER itemno)
Saves the data under another item number. The object will now be connected to the new item number...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4127
static const char * FFUUID_PENNYWHISTLED
Definition: ff_other.h:7624
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:17002
ENCLOSURESHAPE
The enclosure shapes.
Definition: ff_other.h:2861
void SetBreakRepeatBarlines(bool state)
Sets the "Break repeat barlines between staves" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:9891
Collection class for FCBeatChartElement class objects (which is a beat chart for a measure)...
Definition: ff_othercollection.h:1406
static const char * FFUUID_RIDECYMBAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8721
void SetShowBottomRepeatDot(bool state)
Sets if the bottom repeat dot should be displayed for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staf...
Definition: ff_other.h:10000
bool GetName(FCString *pString)
Gets the name of the fretted instrument definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:23950
static const char * FFUUID_BELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8331
void SetEndMeasurePos(TimeEdu32 value)
Sets the end measure position for the applied staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18167
bool GetIndividualPositioning() const
Returns true if the bracket has individual staff positioning enabled.
Definition: ff_other.h:21243
static const char * FFUUID_BASSDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8489
bool SetFourbyteData(int index, fourbyte fbvalue)
Sets the fourbyte data contained at the 0-based index position.
Definition: ff_other.h:1413
bool GetUseFullNamePosition() const
Returns true if the full name positioning should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17612
static const char * FFUUID_GUZHENG
Definition: ff_other.h:8132
void SetShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the shape ID that is connected to the executable shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20224
bool GetForwardRepeat() const
Returns true if a forward repeat should be displayed for the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4812
void SetHorizontalOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the "Additional Horizontal Offset" in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14938
void SetHorizontalMargin(int margin)
Sets the horizontal margin (which is half the width value in the enclosure dialog box)...
Definition: ff_other.h:2994
void SetVerticalAlignmentPoint(FCCategoryDef::VERT_ALIGNMENT value)
Sets the vertical alignment point for the expression definition positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:14151
static const char * FFUUID_IBO
Definition: ff_other.h:8886
static const char * FFUUID_BASSETHORN
Definition: ff_other.h:7676
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:11478
GRAPHIC_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN GetHorizontalAlignment() const
Returns the horizontal alignment for the graphic on left-side (or all) pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:19083
void SetVerticalBaselineOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical "Additional Baseline Offset" in the text expression definition. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:14167
void SetOtherRestPosition(twobyte position)
Sets the vertical position for the "other" rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialog...
Definition: ff_other.h:9937
static const char * FFUUID_SACKBUT
Definition: ff_other.h:7982
bool GetShowRests() const
Returns true if rests should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9350
void SetAltShowOtherLyrics(bool state)
Sets if lyrics should be displayed on layers other than the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10336
Evpu16 GetTopMargin() const
Returns the top margin value, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3796
static const char * FFUUID_GUITARRON
Definition: ff_other.h:8124
bool IncludesStaff(twobyte staffnumber)
Returns true if the staff number is included in the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23622
static const char * FFUUID_GHUNGROO
Definition: ff_other.h:8870
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLIN
Definition: ff_other.h:7377
static const char * FFUUID_INDIANGONG
Definition: ff_other.h:8888
static const char * FFUUID_DIPLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7712
static const char * FFUUID_ARCHLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:8052
static const char * FFUUID_CHOIROOHS
Definition: ff_other.h:7553
virtual ~FCShapeDefInstruction()
The destructor.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:31974
twobyte GetHorizontalPos() const
Returns the horizontal offset position in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:16724
void SetMinimumPosition(Evpu16 value)
Sets the minimum position for the element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22296
fourbyte GetFourbyteData(int index)
Returns the fourbyte data contained at the 0-based index position.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32092
static const char * FFUUID_CHINESEPERCUSSIONENSEMBLE
Definition: ff_other.h:8839
static const char * FFUUID_BELLTREE
Definition: ff_other.h:8705
static const char * FFUUID_HARMONICA
Definition: ff_other.h:7632
static const char * FFUUID_ALTOGLOCKENSPIEL
Definition: ff_other.h:8341
static const char * FFUUID_LAVASTONES
Definition: ff_other.h:8912
static const char * FFUUID_TENORSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7604
Efix32 GetHorizontalHandleOffset() const
Returns the horizontal handle offset, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20681
static const char * FFUUID_SOPRANOVOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7527
bool IsDiatonic()
Returns if the instrument has diatonic fretboard information defined or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:24055
static const char * FFUUID_TEMPLEBELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8478
bool GetUseAbbreviatedPosition() const
Returns true if the abbreviated name positioning should be used for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17619
FCLayerPlaybackData * GetChordLayerData()
Returns the chord playback layer object (of the FCLayerPlaybackData class).
Definition: ff_other.h:23065
Definition: ff_other.h:13740
static const char * FFUUID_YODEL
Definition: ff_other.h:7555
void SetHorizontalOffset1(Evpu16 value)
Sets the 1st horizontal offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16441
static const char * FFUUID_CHUDAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8543
bool GetAltSlashDots() const
Returns if dots should be added to slashes in compound meters (for altered layers). This setting is only used with slash notation.
Definition: ff_other.h:9586
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:11222
Evpu16 GetBottomMargin() const
Returns the bottom margin value, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3803
void SetVerticalPos(Evpu16 pos)
Sets the graphic rectangle's bottom position, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:19165
void SetInstrumentUUID(const char *pszUUID)
Sets a predefined UUID for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10518
twobyte GetHorizontalOffset() const
Returns the horizontal offset adjustment value.
Definition: ff_other.h:7016
virtual twobyte CalcLastInci()
Overridden version of CalcLastInci for __FCInciOther-based classes.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4187
void SetHorizontalAlignment(GRAPHIC_HORIZONTAL_ALIGN alignment)
Sets the horizontal alignment for left-side (or all) pages.
Definition: ff_other.h:19263
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:13782
static const char * FFUUID_SUBCONTRABASSSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7700
static const char * FFUUID_ANCIENTTAROGATO
Definition: ff_other.h:7888
void SetCustomShapeID(twobyte value)
Sets the shape ID of the "custom" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:21034
static const char * FFUUID_VIBRASLAP
Definition: ff_other.h:8771
FCFretboardGroupDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:21123
static const char * FFUUID_BRASSSECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7934
static const char * FFUUID_NAGADODAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8621
void SetCmperAndInci(CMPER cmper, twobyte inci)
Sets both the CMPER and the incident number in the dataID record. Mainly for internal use...
Definition: ff_other.h:27
CATEGORY_DEFAULTIDS
The default/predefined category IDs in Finale.
Definition: ff_other.h:12742
static const char * FFUUID_RAUSCHPFEIFE
Definition: ff_other.h:7814
void SetShapeID(twobyte shapeID)
Sets the layout shape ID for the text block.
Definition: ff_other.h:15281
void SetStartMeasurePos(TimeEdu32 value)
Sets the start measure position for the applied staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18155
static const char * FFUUID_HECKELPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7670
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:13586
static const char * FFUUID_CONCHSHELL
Definition: ff_other.h:7992
static const char * FFUUID_PI
Definition: ff_other.h:7856
void ResetPos()
Resets the position of the expression.
Definition: ff_other.h:16584
Definition: ff_other.h:4191
void SetIndependentRightPage(bool state)
Sets if the right-side page positioning is used.
Definition: ff_other.h:16177
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:2692
Class that encapsulates EREGION and provides additional functionality to region handling.
Definition: ff_region.h:24
void SetFingeringFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Copies the fingering font information from a FCFontInfo object.
Definition: ff_other.h:21045
Class for a staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17040
static const char * FFUUID_LUNTANG
Definition: ff_other.h:8464
TimeEdu32 GetStartMeasurePos() const
Returns the start position of the region within the measure.
Definition: ff_region.h:475
static const char * FFUUID_DOUBLEBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:7383
static const char * FFUUID_DANSO
Definition: ff_other.h:7706
void SetWidth(Evpu32 width)
Sets the page width.
Definition: ff_other.h:3404
static const char * FFUUID_BEGENA
Definition: ff_other.h:8064
static const char * FFUUID_HURDYGURDY
Definition: ff_other.h:7433
The class for a single tempo change in the Tempo Tool. The tempo elements should be stored in measure...
Definition: ff_other.h:22334
static const char * FFUUID_TAMTAM
Definition: ff_other.h:8725
void SetMeasurePos(twobyte edupos)
Sets the duration reference position for the element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22392
void SetTargetTrigger(FCTextRepeat::REPTARGETTRIGGERS value)
Set the target trigger for the ending repeat. This method should also be combined with a SetTargetMea...
Definition: ff_other.h:21536
virtual EXTAG Tag()=0
The Enigma tag for the derived class.
static const char * FFUUID_TARDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8676
static const char * FFUUID_REPINIQUE
Definition: ff_other.h:8647
void SetIgnoreKeySig(bool state)
Sets the "Ignore Key Signature" state for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9775
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:23837
The class representing a physical page in Finale.
Definition: ff_other.h:3240
int GetHorizontalOffset() const
Returns the horizontal offset.
Definition: ff_other.h:3117
Definition: ff_other.h:5455
void SetMainHandleVerticalOffset(Evpu16 value)
Sets the vertical offset to handle for the main symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:12459
static const char * FFUUID_HORAGAI
Definition: ff_other.h:7994
void SetFlippedSymbolIsShape(bool useshape)
Set the flipped symbol to use shape or a font character.
Definition: ff_other.h:12280
void Init_EndGroup()
Creates a st_endgroup shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1481
static const char * FFUUID_STAMP
Definition: ff_other.h:8938
static const char * FFUUID_EUPHONIUM
Definition: ff_other.h:7922
bool DeleteGroup(int groupindex)
Deletes a group from the array.
Definition: ff_other.h:1068
Definition: ff_other.h:13725
bool GetUseStaffResize() const
Returns the flag that marks if any of the staves on the system use individual staff resizing...
Definition: ff_other.h:3857
Definition: ff_other.h:5440
static const char * FFUUID_TENORRECORDER
Definition: ff_other.h:7614
Definition: ff_other.h:1219
static const char * FFUUID_STEELDRUMS_TCLEF
Definition: ff_other.h:8402
static const char * FFUUID_BONGOBELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8819
void SetUseShowTextRepeats(bool state)
Sets if the text repeat display setting should be part of the staff style or not. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:17910
static const char * FFUUID_HICHIRIKI
Definition: ff_other.h:7842
The class for instrument playback data. This is also the link between staves/staff styles and the FCI...
Definition: ff_other.h:22991
static const char * FFUUID_DAFLI
Definition: ff_other.h:8847
twobyte GetShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID (for use in the FCShapeDef class) for the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18325
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_MANDOLIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8313
Definition: ff_other.h:12890
int GetTarget() const
Returns the target measure or ID for the text repeat. This value is dependent on the GetTargetTrigger...
Definition: ff_other.h:19949
bool GetInsideSlurs() const
Returns the state of the "Inside slurs" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:11945
bool GetPageEdgeRef() const
Returns true if positioning is referenced from the page edge.
Definition: ff_other.h:19045
Collection class for FCExpression class objects.
Definition: ff_othercollection.h:788
void Init_SetGrey(int greyvalue)
Sets the grey percent (0-100).
Definition: ff_other.h:1536
Collection class for FCString class objects.
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:924
Evpu16 GetFlippedHandleHorizontalOffset() const
Gets the horizontal offset to handle for the flipped symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:12005
int GetFretCountDefault() const
Returns the default number of frets for the style.
Definition: ff_other.h:20719
Definition: ff_other.h:1246
void SetStartNumberingAt(twobyte value)
Sets the threshold number where mm rests should start to be created.
Definition: ff_other.h:18475
twobyte GetStaffHeight() const
Returns the default staff height for the system, in 1/64th of a Evpu32.
Definition: ff_other.h:3832
void SetVerticalMargin(int margin)
Sets the vertical margin (which is half the height value in the enclosure dialog box).
Definition: ff_other.h:3005
static const char * FFUUID_JAWBONE
Definition: ff_other.h:8892
static const char * FFUUID_SYNTHBRASS
Definition: ff_other.h:7508
static const char * FFUUID_VOICE
Definition: ff_other.h:7539
twobyte GetID() const
Returns the internal category ID. This is a read-only value.
Definition: ff_other.h:12953
static const char * FFUUID_WOODBLOCKS
Definition: ff_other.h:8779
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:22364
void SetShowOnlyFirstMeasureClef(bool state)
For tablature notation: sets if the clef should show only on the first measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:10129
static const char * FFUUID_FINGERCYMBALS
Definition: ff_other.h:8715
void SetUsePositioning(bool state)
Sets if the positioning is activated for the staff (or staff style).
Definition: ff_other.h:7108
static const char * FFUUID_OBOEDAMORE
Definition: ff_other.h:7576
void _AssignEDTEnclosure(void *pPointer)
For internal use ONLY! Assigns enclosure data to the class (for structures that doesn't load their ow...
Definition: ff_other.h:2924
void SetAddToMenu(bool value)
Sets if the staff style definition should be added to the staff style menu, or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17677
bool GetUseShowPartStaffNames() const
Returns true if the staff name display in parts is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17462
void SetUseIndependentFont(bool state)
Sets if independent notehead font state should be part of the staff style or not. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:17837
static const char * FFUUID_ALMGLOCKEN
Definition: ff_other.h:8432
void SetHorizontalPos(Evpu16 pos)
Sets the graphic rectangle's left-side position, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:19152
void SetPageEdgeRef(bool state)
Sets if positioning is referenced from the page edge, or from the margin.
Definition: ff_other.h:16193
static const char * FFUUID_LAMBEGDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8609
void SetIndependentKeySig(bool state)
Sets the state of independent key sigs for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10190
void SetBreakMMRest(bool state)
Sets the "Break Multimeasure Rest" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:14821
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITAR_DOUBLED
Definition: ff_other.h:8273
Definition: ff_other.h:13719
static const char * FFUUID_CABASA
Definition: ff_other.h:8735
bool GetBreakBarlines() const
Returns the "Break barlines between staves" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:9170
virtual bool DeleteData()
Deletes the associated data from Finale's database. Be careful when deleting multiple objects...
Definition: ff_other.h:2386
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:22622
Evpu16 GetMainHandleHorizontalOffset() const
Gets the horizontal offset to handle for the main symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:11992
static const char * FFUUID_HARPGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8134
static const char * FFUUID_MAQRUNAH
Definition: ff_other.h:7806
Definition: ff_other.h:13689
bool GetResetOnRepeatAction() const
Returns the "Reset on Repeat Action" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:21861
twobyte GetOtherRestPosition() const
Returns the vertical position for the "other" rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dia...
Definition: ff_other.h:9223
static const char * FFUUID_CHARANGO
Definition: ff_other.h:8078
static const char * FFUUID_BASSETCLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7674
virtual bool LoadNext()
Overridden LoadNext so the FCStaffLists collection work correctly.
Definition: ff_other.h:23519
Collection class for FCSeparatePlacement records, that handles separate placements in repeats...
Definition: ff_othercollection.h:913
bool UsesMusicFont()
Returns true if the category uses the music font settings.
Definition: ff_other.h:13310
bool GetPositionEvenly() const
Gets the state of the "Position Evenly across Measure" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:5042
static const char * FFUUID_PATSCHEN
Definition: ff_other.h:8920
Evpu16 GetRightBracketPosition() const
Returns the horizontal right-side position of the bracket.
Definition: ff_other.h:21727
void SetLowestFret(twobyte value)
For tablature notation, set the default lowest fret number.
Definition: ff_other.h:10439
static const char * FFUUID_GONGAGENGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8783
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddClosePath()
Adds a ClosePath instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1827
void SetMainSymbolShapeID(CMPER shapeID)
Sets the shape ID for the main symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:12291
static const char * FFUUID_VIRGINAL
Definition: ff_other.h:7520
Evpu16 GetVerticalTextPosition() const
Returns the vertical position of the repeat text.
Definition: ff_other.h:21306
FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_ALIGNMENT GetHorizontalAlignmentPoint() const
Returns the "Horizontal Alignment Point" setting in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14234
void SetShowPartStaffNames(bool value)
Sets if part staff names should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10073
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:20291
Definition: ff_other.h:5446
virtual TimeEdu32 GetMeasurePos() const
Returns the measure position (in EDUs) where the clef is placed in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:24232
static const char * FFUUID_RUDRAVEENA
Definition: ff_other.h:8204
void SetStaffHeight(twobyte value)
Sets the default staff height for the system, in 1/64th of a Evpu32.
Definition: ff_other.h:3717
Evpu16 GetRightMargin() const
Returns the right margin value, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:3821
static const char * FFUUID_SURDO
Definition: ff_other.h:8659
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:4023
Definition: ff_other.h:13674
void SetRotate(bool state)
Sets if the fret should be rotated or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:20986
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:13783
static const char * FFUUID_PENYACAHGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8420
void SetIndependentRightPage(bool state)
Sets if the right-side page positioning is used or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:19219
TimeEdu32 GetDuration()
Returns the duration of the measure, based on the standard time signature.
Definition: ff_other.h:4743
void SetUseTransposition(bool state)
Sets if the transposition settings should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17889
virtual bool LoadFirst()
Overridden LoadFirst, since the data loading mechanism requires it for LoadAll() to work...
Definition: ff_other.h:14557
bool GetAutoUpdateTarget() const
Returns the "Auto-update target" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:19962
REPEAT_REPLACE_MODE
Constants for use with FCTextRepeatDef::GetReplaceMode() and FCTextRepeatDef::SetReplaceMode().
Definition: ff_other.h:19476
int GetPassNumbersCount() const
Returns the number of pass numbers available to the ending repeat.
Definition: ff_other.h:21328
static const char * FFUUID_FLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7570
bool _GetIsEmptyShape()
For internal use.
Definition: ff_other.h:2362
void SetMode(SEPARATEPLACEMENT_MODES mode)
Sets the list of data that should be used when reading/saving the record.
Definition: ff_other.h:16331
static const char * FFUUID_DIPLICA
Definition: ff_other.h:7794
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:22089
void SetReferenceWidth(Evpu16 width)
Sets the reference width for the beat chart.
Definition: ff_other.h:22285
FCStrings * CreateTextStrings()
Returns a string collection with all the texts in the shape.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:32368
virtual bool SaveNew()
SaveNew() is not supported.
Definition: ff_other.h:23510
twobyte GetVerticalBaselineOffset() const
Returns the vertical "Additional Baseline Offset" in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14750
void SetShowRests(bool value)
Sets if rests should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10067
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRABASSSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7698
ENCLOSURESHAPE GetShape() const
Returns the shape of the enclosure.
Definition: ff_other.h:3096
static const char * FFUUID_SHENG
Definition: ff_other.h:7900
TimeEdu32 GetMeasurePos() const
Returns the expression position in EDUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:16715
void SetJustification(FLAG_16 justification)
Sets the justification to any of the text block justification styles.
Definition: ff_other.h:15297
void SetHeight(Evpu16 height)
Sets the graphic rectangle's height, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:19184
void SetLineWidth(int width)
Sets the line width (in 64ths of a EVPUs).
Definition: ff_other.h:2963
PERC_NOTE_TYPE GetRawNoteType() const
Returns the "raw" percussion note type. This includes the order ID as well.
Definition: ff_other.h:22563
bool UsesNumberFont()
Returns true if the category uses the number font settings.
Definition: ff_other.h:13316
virtual eMeas GetMeasure() const
Virtual method for returning the measure number.
Definition: ff_other.h:129
void SetEndMeasure(eMeas value)
Sets the end measure for the applied staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18161
bool GetUseBreakRepeatBarlines() const
Returns true if the "Break repeat barlines between staves" setting should be used for the staff style...
Definition: ff_other.h:17549
static const char * FFUUID_JARANATERCERA
Definition: ff_other.h:8146
Evpu16 GetVerticalOffset2() const
Returns the 2nd horizontal offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16414
void SetAllowHorizontalStretching(bool state)
Sets the "Allow Horizontal Stretching" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:14803
void Init_Ellipse(int width, int height)
Inits a Ellipse instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1562
Evpu16 GetLeftMargin() const
Returns the left page margin as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3343
static const char * FFUUID_SISTRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8930
static const char * FFUUID_PANDERO
Definition: ff_other.h:8641
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:244
bool GetAllowHorizontalStretching() const
Returns the "Allow Horizontal Stretching" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:14595
static const char * FFUUID_GANZA
Definition: ff_other.h:8866
virtual bool IsDynamicSize()
Definition: ff_base.h:678
Definition: ff_other.h:1234
Definition: ff_other.h:13755
static const char * FFUUID_HIRADAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8585
void SetAllowHorizontalSplit(bool state)
Sets the "Allow Horizontal Split Points" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:4549
bool GetSmartShapeFlag() const
Returns true if a smart shape runs somewhere through the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:5140
Class that stores one record of a chord suffix definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:20248
void SetRoundedCorners(bool state)
Sets if rounded corners should be used (on Finale 25.4 and later) for the enclosure.
Definition: ff_other.h:3038
static const char * FFUUID_LANGELEIK
Definition: ff_other.h:8164
bool GetIndependentTimeSig() const
Returns true if independent time signatures is set for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9053
bool GetUseExecutableShape() const
Returns true if an executable is used for the expression def.
Definition: ff_other.h:13835
bool GetAbsolute() const
Returns true if the tempo is an absolute or relative tempo setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:22405
static const char * FFUUID_GUIRO
Definition: ff_other.h:8751
static const char * FFUUID_HIRTENSCHALMEI
Definition: ff_other.h:7802
void SetPageAssignment(TEXT_ASSIGNMENT assign)
Sets the page assignment (all/odd/even).
Definition: ff_other.h:16081
Class for key signatures. Instances of this class is auto-created by FCMeasure:GetKeySignature and FC...
Definition: ff_keysig.h:22
Evpu16 GetBottomMargin() const
Returns the bottom page margin as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3367
Definition: ff_other.h:13695
static const char * FFUUID_SARRUSOPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7870
static const char * FFUUID_CHALUMEAU
Definition: ff_other.h:7788
Evpu16 GetBottomBarlineOffset() const
Returns the bottom barline offset, in EVPUs. This parameter controls how far the barlines extends dow...
Definition: ff_other.h:9708
void SetUseHideMode(bool state)
Sets if the hide mode (such as GetHideMode) should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17952
bool GetUseShowLyrics() const
Returns true if the lyrics display is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17425
virtual bool SaveAllForItem(CMPER cmper)
Overridden SaveAllForItem method that repacks the composite top time sig according to the cmper...
Definition: ff_other.h:1118
bool GetAltShowExpression() const
Returns if expressions should be diplayed on the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:9542
static const char * FFUUID_IGIHUMURIZO
Definition: ff_other.h:8587
static const char * FFUUID_PUNGISNAKECHARMER
Definition: ff_other.h:7860
static const char * FFUUID_TONETANG
Definition: ff_other.h:8962
The class for a "current staff state" (the sum of staff changes and staff style changes) at a specifi...
Definition: ff_other.h:11456
twobyte GetLastPage() const
Returns the page number for the last page.
Definition: ff_other.h:15828
virtual bool DeleteDataForItem(CMPER cmper)
Deletes all subrecords (incis) from the Finale database for a specific item (cmper).
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:13080
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:3521
bool IsTablature()
Returns true if the staff is a tablature staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10593
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLOTTA
Definition: ff_other.h:7477
void SetHorizontalAlignmentPoint(FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_ALIGNMENT value)
Sets the "Horizontal Alignment Point" setting in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14248
void Add(__FCBase *pNewItem)
Adds an element to the end of the collection.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:12756
FLAG_16 GetEnigmaStyles() const
Gets the font style as standard Enigma bit storage.
Definition: ff_base.h:1164
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_BANJO_G
Definition: ff_other.h:8281
static const char * FFUUID_TENORLINE
Definition: ff_other.h:8501
void SetHalfRestPosition(twobyte position)
Sets the vertical position for the half rests. This setting is located in the "Staff Setup" dialog bo...
Definition: ff_other.h:9923
int GetGroupElementBeats(int groupindex, int subindex)
Returns the beat number for a group element.
Definition: ff_other.h:748
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_LUTELETTERS
Definition: ff_other.h:8311
static const char * FFUUID_TROMBAMARINA
Definition: ff_other.h:7465
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:18090
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:19701
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:23174
Efix32 GetStringThickness() const
Returns the string thickness, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20639
twobyte GetStringCount() const
Returns the number of strings for the instrument definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:23904
static const char * FFUUID_KAYAGUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8152
void AppendCString(const char *pOtherString)
Appends a C-style string to the string.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1636
void SetSymbolSpace(twobyte space)
Sets the space between multimeasure rest symbols.
Definition: ff_other.h:18469
FCStaffSystem()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:3591
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddSetGrey(int percent)
Adds a SetGrey instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1802
void SetAbsolute(bool value)
Sets the tempo to absolute or relative.
Definition: ff_other.h:22413
static const char * FFUUID_DUMBEK
Definition: ff_other.h:8567
TEXT_REPEAT_JUSTIFICATION
Constants for use with FCTextRepeatDef::GetJustification() and FCTextRepeatDef::SetJustification().
Definition: ff_other.h:19457
void SetNextSysMeasure(eMeas measure)
Sets the measure starting the next system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3626
virtual bool LoadNext()
Loads the next element from the database, if any.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:877
static const char * FFUUID_DULCIMER
Definition: ff_other.h:8034
void SetPlaybackLayerAssignment(twobyte layer)
Sets the layer that the playback of the expression is assigned to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16872
static const char * FFUUID_OPHICLEIDE
Definition: ff_other.h:7986
eMeas GetFirstMeasure() const
Returns the measure for the first measure of the system.
Definition: ff_other.h:3757
void SetBreakTablatureLines(bool state)
For tablature notation: sets if tablature lines should break at fret numbers.
Definition: ff_other.h:10147
bool GetAllowVerticalDrag() const
Returns the "Allow Vertical Drag" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:24263
twobyte GetLowestFret() const
For tablature notation, returns the default lowest fret number.
Definition: ff_other.h:9679
static const char * FFUUID_VOICENONAME
Definition: ff_other.h:7541
static const char * FFUUID_WAGNERTUBA
Definition: ff_other.h:7960
static const char * FFUUID_SANTOOR
Definition: ff_other.h:8210
static const char * FFUUID_TENORUKULELE
Definition: ff_other.h:8046
static const char * FFUUID_DOIRA
Definition: ff_other.h:8853
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:16296
twobyte GetTextID() const
Returns the text ID for the expression text. For use with the FCTextBlock class.
Definition: ff_other.h:13941
static const char * FFUUID_DUDUK
Definition: ff_other.h:7832
static const char * FFUUID_TINGSHA
Definition: ff_other.h:8958
void SetResetOnRepeatAction(bool state)
Sets the "Reset on Repeat Action" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:21953
FCEnclosure * GetEnclosureMultiple(bool parts)
Gets the pointer to the multiple enclosure object. This object is a part of the measure number region...
Definition: ff_other.h:6243
static const char * FFUUID_MRIDANGAM
Definition: ff_other.h:8617
A lookup table for FCPercussionMapNotes notes.
Definition: ff_other.h:22672
void SetBeatDuration(twobyte value)
Sets the beat duration (in EDUs), or the composite bottom ID.
Definition: ff_timesig.h:105
static const char * FFUUID_MANDOLA
Definition: ff_other.h:8172
static const char * FFUUID_TOERE
Definition: ff_other.h:8960
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:21068
void SetForwardRepeat(bool state)
Sets if a forward repeat should be displayed for the measure or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:4405
static const char * FFUUID_TICTOCBLOCK
Definition: ff_other.h:8952
static const char * FFUUID_DHOL
Definition: ff_other.h:8555
void SetNotationStyle(STAFFNOTATION_STYLE value)
Sets the notation style for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10160
static const char * FFUUID_THAIGONG
Definition: ff_other.h:8948
Definition: ff_other.h:13704
void SetWidth(Evpu16 width)
Sets the graphic rectangle's width, in EVPUs.
Definition: ff_other.h:19175
static const char * FFUUID_SYNTHSOUNDTRACK
Definition: ff_other.h:7510
twobyte GetCategoryID() const
Returns the category ID for the expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14833
eClef GetSpeedyClef() const
Returns the clef number to be used in Speedy Edit.
Definition: ff_other.h:23926
virtual bool Load(CMPER itemno)
Loads the indicated item.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4109
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: ff_other.h:3220
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLONCELLOPICCOLO
Definition: ff_other.h:7475
void SetTopBarlineOffset(Evpu16 distance)
Sets the top barline offset, in EVPUs. This parameter controls how far the barlines extends upwards...
Definition: ff_other.h:10497
static const char * FFUUID_MBIRA
Definition: ff_other.h:8466
twobyte GetVerticalPosRightPage() const
Returns the vertical position for the text block for right-side pages (if used).
Definition: ff_other.h:15951
bool GetBreakMMRest() const
Returns the "Break Multimeasure Rest" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:14613
static const char * FFUUID_DOUBLECLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7796
void SetUserCreated(bool value)
Sets the user-defined state. Use with care!
Definition: ff_other.h:13370
void SetUseExecutableShape(bool state)
Sets the use of executable shape. Normally this isn't called directly. Instead, use SetExecutableShap...
Definition: ff_other.h:14794
static const char * FFUUID_ONDESMARTENOT
Definition: ff_other.h:7516
bool IsShape()
Returns true if a shape is used for the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18504
bool GetSystemBreak() const
Gets the system break state for the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4804
bool GetVisible() const
Returns the visibility status of the page graphic.
Definition: ff_other.h:19037
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:17323
bool GetMusicFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pInfo)
Gets the font info for the music font.
Definition: ff_other.h:13101
bool GetSkipOnIgnore() const
Returns the "Skip ending if ignoring repeats" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:21225
CMPER GetFretInstrumentDefID() const
Returns the ID for the tablature instrument (for tablature notation). Use the FCFretInstrumentDef cla...
Definition: ff_other.h:9698
void Init_Rectangle(int width, int height)
Inits a Rectangle instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1574
void SetNoKeySigShowAccidentals(bool state)
Sets the "Hide key signature & show all accidentals" state, available in the Finale 2014 Score Manage...
Definition: ff_other.h:10428
int CalcTotalGroupBeats(int groupindex)
Returns the accumulated number of beats the composite group element.
Definition: ff_other.h:730
void SetBarreShapeID(twobyte value)
Sets the shape ID of the "barre" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:21025
void SetStartMeasure(twobyte measure)
Sets the start measure of the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18411
static const char * FFUUID_UDU
Definition: ff_other.h:8966
bool IsNormalNotation()
Returns true if the staff is using "normal" music notation (not percussion and not TAB notation)...
Definition: ff_other.h:10602
bool GetShowTopRepeatDot() const
Returns if the top repeat dot should be displayed for the staff. This setting is located in the "Staf...
Definition: ff_other.h:9275
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_DULCIMER_DAA
Definition: ff_other.h:8301
static const char * FFUUID_CORNETTO
Definition: ff_other.h:7966
static const char * FFUUID_NAAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8619
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:22088
static const char * FFUUID_MELODICA
Definition: ff_other.h:7498
virtual bool HasStaffValue()
Method that should return true if GetStaff() returns actual values.
Definition: ff_other.h:141
FCSystemStaff()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:6754
static const char * FFUUID_IPU
Definition: ff_other.h:8890
bool GetScaleWithEntry() const
Returns if the expression should scale to entry or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:16709
static const char * FFUUID_REYONGGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8793
static const char * FFUUID_KORA
Definition: ff_other.h:7441
void _SetTempAllMeasures(FCMeasures *pAllMeasuresToUse)
For internal use only.
Definition: ff_other.h:6670
void SetHeight(Evpu32 height)
Sets the page height.
Definition: ff_other.h:3412
VERT_ALIGNMENT GetVerticalAlignmentPoint() const
Returns the vertical alignment point for the category definition positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:13021
FCBackwardRepeat()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:21669
void SetUseTimeSigForDisplay(bool value)
Turns time sig for display ON or OFF.
Definition: ff_other.h:5230
twobyte GetTopAttack() const
Returns the Top Note Value for "Attack" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:11876
void SetCategoryID(twobyte ID)
Sets the category ID for the expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14848
Definition: ff_other.h:2901
twobyte GetID() const
Returns the definition ID for the text repeat.
Definition: ff_other.h:19905
void SetUseAllowHiding(bool state)
Sets if the "optimization" state should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17865
FCCategoryDef::VERT_ALIGNMENT GetVerticalAlignmentPoint() const
Returns the vertical alignment point for the expression definition positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:14740
EXTAG GetRawTextExtag()
Returns the full EXTAG that is used to store the raw text.
Definition: ff_other.h:15226
static const char * FFUUID_HARDANGERFIDDLE
Definition: ff_other.h:7431
void SetPlay(bool state)
Sets the "Play" state of the layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:22969
virtual TimeEdu32 GetMeasurePos() const
Virtual method for returning the position within the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:148
Data class for the global clef definitions.
Definition: ff_globals.h:42
bool GetResetOnRepeat() const
Returns the "Reset on Repeat" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:20071
bool GetUseShowRepeats() const
Returns true if the repeat bar display is active for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17432
static const char * FFUUID_CORNETEFLAT
Definition: ff_other.h:7940
bool GetTextRepeatFlag() const
Returns true if there are text repeats in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4868
Definition: ff_other.h:13752
static const char * FFUUID_TUBULARBELLS
Definition: ff_other.h:8349
bool IsDefaultTechniqueText()
Returns true if the category is the standard (pre-defined/Finale-created) category "Technique Text"...
Definition: ff_other.h:13277
void SetExpandSingleWord(bool state)
Sets the default "expand single word" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:7099
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_REQUINTO
Definition: ff_other.h:8315
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:24194
static const char * FFUUID_SANDBLOCK
Definition: ff_other.h:8763
bool GetShowBottomRepeatDot() const
Returns if the bottom repeat dot should be displayed for the staff. This setting is located in the "S...
Definition: ff_other.h:9285
bool GetUseHideMode() const
Returns true if the hide mode (such as GetHideMode) should be used for the staff style definition...
Definition: ff_other.h:17598
static const char * FFUUID_PICCOLOHECKELPHONE
Definition: ff_other.h:7668
static const char * FFUUID_PIANO
Definition: ff_other.h:7484
static const char * FFUUID_TANTAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8669
static const char * FFUUID_SAZ
Definition: ff_other.h:8218
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRABASSFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7652
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:18273
static const char * FFUUID_SULING
Definition: ff_other.h:7764
void SetKeyless(bool state)
Sets the keyless time signature mode for the measure. Only works on Finale 2014 and above...
Definition: ff_other.h:4359
MNALIGNMENTS
The measure number alignment values.
Definition: ff_other.h:5484
static const char * FFUUID_ACOUSTICBASS
Definition: ff_other.h:8022
twobyte GetClefIndex() const
Returns the clef index.
Definition: ff_other.h:24223
static const char * FFUUID_OCTAVEMANDOLIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8190
static const char * FFUUID_ERHU
Definition: ff_other.h:7419
void SetHorizontalPosRightPage(Evpu16 value)
Sets the horizontal position for right-side pages (if used).
Definition: ff_other.h:19233
static const char * FFUUID_KOMUZ
Definition: ff_other.h:8158
twobyte GetStaffListID() const
Gets the staff list ID.
Definition: ff_other.h:21745
static const char * FFUUID_KKWAENGGWARI
Definition: ff_other.h:8906
static const char * FFUUID_XYLORIMBA
Definition: ff_other.h:8361
static const char * FFUUID_MOROCCODRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8615
static const char * FFUUID_SHEHNAI
Definition: ff_other.h:7874
static const char * FFUUID_CONTRABASSCLARINET
Definition: ff_other.h:7592
void Init_Null()
Creates a NULL shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1639
bool IsElementAvailable(twobyte stafflistelement)
Returns true if the element (staff or top/bottom setting) is available.
Definition: ff_other.h:23587
Definition: ff_other.h:19809
static const char * FFUUID_ZHALEIKA
Definition: ff_other.h:7822
virtual int DataSizeLoad()=0
Returns the data size for the data structure that should be loaded.
Collection class for FCPercussionMapNote class objects, used by the FCInstrumentDef class...
Definition: ff_other.h:22604
bool GetUseAllowHiding() const
Returns true if the "optimization" state should be used for the staff style definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:17511
Definition: ff_other.h:5490
bool GetShowStems() const
Returns true if stems should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9362
static const char * FFUUID_CHINESECYMBALS
Definition: ff_other.h:8835
CMPER GetLeftBarlineShapeID() const
Returns the left barline shape ID (for use with the FCShapeDef class), for custom left barlines...
Definition: ff_other.h:5094
bool GetCopyable() const
Returns if the staff style definition should be copyable or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17358
twobyte GetMuteStringShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID of the "mute string" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20763
static const char * FFUUID_SHIMEDAIKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8657
FCMeasure()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:4291
void SetUseExecutableShape(bool state)
Sets the use of executable shape. Normally this isn't called directly. Instead, use SetExecutableShap...
Definition: ff_other.h:13870
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLONCELLOSECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7391
twobyte GetTotalPasses() const
Returns the number of passes for the playback. This is used as value for "Jump on Pass" as well...
Definition: ff_other.h:21700
Definition: ff_other.h:1231
NUMBERVIEWS
The number views where the region should show.
Definition: ff_other.h:5468
static const char * FFUUID_PSALTERY
Definition: ff_other.h:8198
static const char * FFUUID_KOTO
Definition: ff_other.h:8160
int GetConnectedStaff() const
Returns the connected staff for loaded data.
Definition: ff_other.h:11523
static const char * FFUUID_BLANKSTAFF
Definition: ff_other.h:7368
void SetPositionEvenly(bool state)
Sets the "Position Evenly across Measure" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:4650
The class for a start of repeat bracket in the document. There can only be one ending repeat in each ...
Definition: ff_other.h:21157
static const char * FFUUID_SARONPANERUSGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8426
twobyte GetOpenStringShapeID() const
Returns the shape ID of the "open string" shape.
Definition: ff_other.h:20754
FCExecutableShapeDef()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:20216
void SetFirstStaff(CMPER value)
Sets the staff number of the first staff in the instrument group, Use with care!
Definition: ff_other.h:18646
bool DataIsLoaded() const
Returns true is any data has been loaded into the object.
Definition: ff_base.h:715
static const char * FFUUID_HELICON
Definition: ff_other.h:7984
void SetVerticalOffset1(Evpu16 value)
Sets the 1st horizontal offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16452
virtual const char * ClassName()
Returns the name of the class, for diagnostic purposes. This method MUST be overwritten in each child...
Definition: ff_other.h:6988
twobyte GetWidth() const
Returns the width of the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18317
static const char * FFUUID_BODHRAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8533
static const char * FFUUID_MADDALE
Definition: ff_other.h:8613
static const char * FFUUID_SUONA
Definition: ff_other.h:7882
bool CopyToUnicodeBuffer(eUniChar16 *pBuffer, int maxbufferlen=0) const
Copies the string to a 16-bit Unicode buffer. The buffer must be big enough to have room for an endin...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:1111
Definition: ff_other.h:19842
static const char * FFUUID_DUTAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8106
CMPER GetPercussionLibrary()
Returns the number to the percussion library that's used. This is loaded by the percussion layout...
Definition: ff_other.h:6915
void SetDefaultClef(twobyte clefindex)
Sets the start/default clef.
Definition: ff_other.h:10401
static const char * FFUUID_CELLO
Definition: ff_other.h:7381
void SetNextHorizontalPosition(Evpu16 value)
Sets the next position in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:22259
bool GetPageBreak() const
Gets the page break state for a specific measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4787
static const char * FFUUID_SOUNDFX
Definition: ff_other.h:7512
static const char * FFUUID_SITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8048
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLADAMORE
Definition: ff_other.h:7399
void SetIndependentTimeSig(bool state)
Sets the independent time sigs state for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9781
static const char * FFUUID_LUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:8042
twobyte CalcMeasureSpan()
Calculates the number of measures that MM rest spans.
Definition: ff_other.h:18395
fourbyte GetRatio() const
Returns the tempo ratio value.
Definition: ff_other.h:22423
static const char * FFUUID_JARANASEGUNDA
Definition: ff_other.h:8144
FCPageGraphic()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:18945
void SetShowNoteShapes(bool state)
Sets if the staff should display note colors.
Definition: ff_other.h:9916
bool HasInstrumentAssigned()
Returns true if there is an instrument assigned to the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10875
SHAPEDEFTAGS
The instruction tag constants that can be returned from the GetTag method.
Definition: ff_other.h:1201
twobyte GetStartMeasure() const
Returns the start measure for the region.
Definition: ff_region.h:400
static const char * FFUUID_TRUMPETC
Definition: ff_other.h:7906
FCStaffList()
the constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:23410
static const char * FFUUID_VOCALS
Definition: ff_other.h:7537
bool IsPortrait()
Returns true if the height is larger than the width.
Definition: ff_other.h:3316
static const char * FFUUID_TAB_GUITARNONAME
Definition: ff_other.h:8265
void SetPlayback(bool state)
Sets the playback change state bit for the articulation definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:12371
virtual bool SaveAll()
Overridden SaveAll method that repacks the composite bottom time sig.
Definition: ff_other.h:1099
FCCompositeTimeSigTop()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:619
void SetBottomVelocity(twobyte value)
Sets the Bottom Note Value for "Velocity" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:12538
static const char * FFUUID_MUSICALBOW
Definition: ff_other.h:8186
twobyte GetFretCount() const
Returns the number of frets for the instrument definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:23886
bool GetIndependentRightPage() const
Returns true if the right-side page positioning is used.
Definition: ff_other.h:15970
bool GetShowBarlines() const
Returns true if barlines should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9145
static const char * FFUUID_HYPERBASSFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7656
void Init_ClosePath()
Inits a ClosePath instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1551
Definition: ff_other.h:19482
void SetAltShowSmartShapes(bool state)
Sets if smart shapes should be diplayed n the altered layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:10312
static const char * FFUUID_MOODSWINGER
Definition: ff_other.h:8184
Evpu16 GetTopMargin() const
Returns the top page margin as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3359
Text used for an instrument definition. Please refer to the FCInstrumentDef class.
Definition: ff_text.h:223
static const char * FFUUID_MIZMAR
Definition: ff_other.h:7850
void SetFlippedHandleHorizontalOffset(Evpu16 value)
Sets the horizontal offset to handle for the flipped symbol.
Definition: ff_other.h:12491
FCLayerPlaybackData * GetMidiExpressionLayerData()
Returns the MIDI expression playback layer object (of the FCLayerPlaybackData class).
Definition: ff_other.h:23085
static const char * FFUUID_DOUBLEBASSSECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7393
static const char * FFUUID_VIOLASECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7387
static const char * FFUUID_RACKETT
Definition: ff_other.h:7862
A lookup table for FCPercussionLayoutNotes collections.
Definition: ff_other.h:22705
TimeEdu32 GetMeasurePos() const
Return the duration reference position for the element.
Definition: ff_other.h:22126
bool GetPageEdgeRef() const
Returns true if positioning is referenced from the page edge.
Definition: ff_other.h:15901
Definition: ff_other.h:1225
virtual bool LoadFirst()
Different approach for loading first for shapes.
Definition: ff_other.h:2381
void SetHorizontalJustification(FCCategoryDef::HORIZ_JUSTIFICATION value)
Sets the "Horizontal Justification" in the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14867
FCPercussionStaff()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:6902
void SetRatio(fourbyte value)
Sets the tempo ratio value.
Definition: ff_other.h:22429
FCSeparatePlacement()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:16314
static const char * FFUUID_ERXIAN
Definition: ff_other.h:7421
PERCUSSION_NOTE_TYPES
The predefined "virtual" percussion note types in Finale.
Definition: ff_other.h:22514
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:11632
static const char * FFUUID_THEREMIN
Definition: ff_other.h:7518
void SetVerticalPos(Evpu32 value)
Sets the vertical position (in EVPUs) from the top reference line of the measure. ...
Definition: ff_other.h:19942
void SetNextSysMeasure(twobyte measure)
Sets the start measure for the subsequent system.
Definition: ff_other.h:13573
static const char * FFUUID_TAMBORITA
Definition: ff_other.h:8665
virtual EVERSION EnigmaVersion()
The Enigma version for save/load/create/delete operations.
Definition: ff_base.h:757
POSITIONING_MODES
Settings used for FCMeasure::SetPositioningNotesMode() and FCMeasure::GetPositioningNotesMode() ...
Definition: ff_other.h:4237
virtual bool SaveNew()
Creates the data as completely new item number. The object will now be connected to the new item numb...
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:4133
void SetEndMeasure(twobyte measure)
Sets the end measure of the MM rest.
Definition: ff_other.h:18418
int GetDiatonicCount()
Returns the number of diatonic steps that are defined for the instrument.
Definition: ff_other.h:24064
void SetStartMeasure(eMeas value)
Sets the start measure for the applied staff style.
Definition: ff_other.h:18149
int GetElementCount() const
Returns the number of elements in the staff list. Both staff numbers and top/bottom staff are include...
Definition: ff_other.h:23526
void SetSpaceBefore(Evpu16 space)
Sets the extra space before the music in the measure.
Definition: ff_other.h:4509
static const char * FFUUID_SORNA
Definition: ff_other.h:7878
twobyte GetBottomVelocity() const
Returns the Bottom Note Value for "Velocity" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:11919
static const char * FFUUID_POLICEWHISTLE
Definition: ff_other.h:8755
eUniChar32 GetBelowSymbolChar() const
Returns the character for the "below" symbol. On Finale 2012 and above, this supports the Unicode ran...
Definition: ff_other.h:11720
void SetUseShowRepeats(bool state)
Sets if repeat bar display should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17768
void SetAttackIsPercent(bool state)
Sets the "Values are percentages" state for the "Attack" playback change.
Definition: ff_other.h:12378
void Make1LineFullBarlineStaff()
Fills the necessary values in the Staff Setup dialog to make a 1-line staff with full-length barlines...
Definition: ff_other.h:10677
void SetLeftMargin(Evpu16 margin)
Sets the left page margin, as a positive value.
Definition: ff_other.h:3420
static const char * FFUUID_SARANGI
Definition: ff_other.h:7459
void SetUseShowScoreStaffNames(bool state)
Sets if staff name display in score should be part of the staff style or not.
Definition: ff_other.h:17797
static const char * FFUUID_BASSSAX
Definition: ff_other.h:7696
static const char * FFUUID_CHITARRABATTENTE
Definition: ff_other.h:8080
bool GetBreakMMRest() const
Returns the "Break Multi-measure rest" option in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14064
static const char * FFUUID_SANSHIN
Definition: ff_other.h:8208
virtual eStaff GetStaff() const
Returns the staff that the separate placement should be matched to.
Definition: ff_other.h:16361
Definition: ff_other.h:12893
void SetRoundedCornerRadius(Efix32 radius)
Sets the rounded corner radius, to use when rounded corners are enabled for the text block frame...
Definition: ff_other.h:15479
bool GetNoKeySigShowAccidentals() const
Returns the "Hide key signature & show all accidentals" state, available in the Finale 2014 Score Man...
Definition: ff_other.h:9637
static const char * FFUUID_FLAMENCOGUITAR
Definition: ff_other.h:8113
static const char * FFUUID_APENTEMMA
Definition: ff_other.h:8521
Base class for all collection classes. A collection is a storage that can store multiple objects of s...
Definition: ff_basecollection.h:24
static const char * FFUUID_WINDSECTION
Definition: ff_other.h:7598
The class for an executable shape definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:20161
static const char * FFUUID_KAKKO
Definition: ff_other.h:8595
void SetVerticalEntryOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the vertical "Additional Entry Offset" value in the category definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:13416
Definition: ff_other.h:2885
Efix32 GetRoundedCornerRadius() const
Returns the corner radius (in EFIXes) for rounded corners on Finale 25.4 and above.
Definition: ff_other.h:3196
ePlaybackRoute GetInstrumentDefID() const
Returns the ID that maps to the FCInstrumentDef class.
Definition: ff_other.h:22927
void SetSolo(bool state)
Sets the "Solo" state of the layer.
Definition: ff_other.h:22978
void SetHorizontalOffset(twobyte value)
Sets the "Additional Horizontal Offset" in the text expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:14279
FCShapeDefInstruction * AddEndGroup()
Adds a LineWidth instruction, which closes the group that was started with AddStartGroup.
Definition: ff_other.h:1772
bool GetBreakWordExtension() const
Gets the "Break Word Extension" state.
Definition: ff_other.h:5002
FCTextRepeat::REPTARGETTRIGGERS GetTargetTrigger() const
Returns the target trigger for the ending repeat. This value also affects how the GetTargetMeasure() ...
Definition: ff_other.h:21343
void SetAttachToTopNote(bool state)
Sets the state of the "Attach to top note" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12441
bool AssignShapeDef(FCShapeDef *pShapeDef)
Assigns a saved FCShapeDef object to the shape expression definition.
Definition: ff_other.h:15001
void SetTransposeChromatic(bool state)
Sets the chromatic transposition status for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:10039
bool GetRoundedCorners() const
Returns if the text frame should use rounded corners.
Definition: ff_other.h:15391
bool GetShowPartStaffNames() const
Returns true if part staff names should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9356
static const char * FFUUID_HANDDRUM
Definition: ff_other.h:8583
bool IsEmpty()
Returns true if the string is empty.
Definition: ff_base.h:2461
void SetSecondStaff(CMPER value)
Sets the staff number of the second staff in the instrument group. Use with care! ...
Definition: ff_other.h:18652
bool GetExpressionFlag() const
Gets the flag that marks if a measure contains any expressions.
Definition: ff_other.h:4822
virtual bool DeepDeleteData()
Reimplemented method that deletes the enclosure and text string before deleting the data...
Definition: ff_other.h:19521
static const char * FFUUID_KANJIRA
Definition: ff_other.h:8597
Definition: ff_other.h:5452
__FCInciOther()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:69
virtual const PDKFRAMEWORK_CLASSID GetClassID()
Returns the internal class ID for the PDK Framework class. This is implemented mostly because Lua has...
Definition: ff_other.h:12782
void SetExpressionFlag(bool state)
Sets the flag that marks if a measure contains any expressions.
Definition: ff_other.h:4416
Definition: ff_other.h:13761
static const char * FFUUID_QUENA
Definition: ff_other.h:7750
void SetBottomDuration(twobyte value)
Sets the Bottom Note Value for "Duration" change of playback.
Definition: ff_other.h:12512
FCStaff()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:11254
Efix32 GetHorizontalFretNumberOffset() const
Returns the horizontal text offset for fret number text, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20707
void SetAboveUsesMain(bool state)
Sets the state of the "When Placed Above a Note, Use the" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:12338
virtual void DebugDump()
Outputs the class data/information for debugging purposes.
Definition: finaleframework.cpp:547
void SetFretNumberFontInfo(FCFontInfo *pFontInfo)
Copies the fret number font information fro a FCFontInfo object.
Definition: ff_other.h:21059
static const char * FFUUID_DJEMBE
Definition: ff_other.h:8507
static const char * FFUUID_DANTAMTHAPLUC
Definition: ff_other.h:8094
Efix32 GetFingeringWhiteout() const
Returns the whiteout for fingering numbers, in EFIXes.
Definition: ff_other.h:20675
bool AddBottomStaff()
Adds a "Bottom Staff" to the staff list.
Definition: ff_other.h:23693
static const char * FFUUID_CRASHCYMBAL
Definition: ff_other.h:8717
FCAllotment()
The constructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:18821
static const char * FFUUID_KONCOVKAALTOFLUTE
Definition: ff_other.h:7738
void SetEnigmaStyles(FLAG_16 fontstyles)
Sets the font style as standard Enigma bit storage.
Definition: ff_base.h:1261
virtual ~FCMeasure()
Destructor.
Definition: ff_other.h:4302
void Init_SetDash(int dashlength, int spacebetween)
Creates a st_setdash shape instruction.
Definition: ff_other.h:1606
static const char * FFUUID_JARANAMOSQUITO
Definition: ff_other.h:8142
void SetIncludeInNumbering(bool state)
Sets the "Include in numbering" setting.
Definition: ff_other.h:4617
void SetGroupID(eStaffGroup value)
Sets the staff group ID. Use with care!
Definition: ff_other.h:18665
static const char * FFUUID_GANGSAGAMELAN
Definition: ff_other.h:8408
static const char * FFUUID_MANDORA
Definition: ff_other.h:8174
void SetVerticalOffset2(Evpu16 value)
Sets the 2nd vertical offset, compared to the standard positioning.
Definition: ff_other.h:16472
void SetShowChords(bool value)
Sets if chords should be displayed for the staff.
Definition: ff_other.h:9853